Update OpenSSL to 1.1.1.

Note it does not update build infrastructure.

464 files changed, 52033 insertions, 10 deletions

diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ADMISSIONS.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ADMISSIONS.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5dcf72e201c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ADMISSIONS.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ADMISSIONS,
+ADMISSIONS_get0_admissionAuthority,
+ADMISSIONS_get0_namingAuthority,
+ADMISSIONS_get0_professionInfos,
+ADMISSIONS_set0_admissionAuthority,
+ADMISSIONS_set0_namingAuthority,
+ADMISSIONS_set0_professionInfos,
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX,
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_admissionAuthority,
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_contentsOfAdmissions,
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_admissionAuthority,
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_contentsOfAdmissions,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityId,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityURL,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityText,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityId,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityURL,
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityText,
+PROFESSION_INFO,
+PROFESSION_INFOS,
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_addProfessionInfo,
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_namingAuthority,
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionItems,
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionOIDs,
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_registrationNumber,
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_addProfessionInfo,
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_namingAuthority,
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionItems,
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionOIDs,
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_registrationNumber
+- Accessors and settors for ADMISSION_SYNTAX
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ typedef struct NamingAuthority_st NAMING_AUTHORITY;
+ typedef struct ProfessionInfo_st PROFESSION_INFO;
+ typedef STACK_OF(PROFESSION_INFO) PROFESSION_INFOS;
+ typedef struct Admissions_st ADMISSIONS;
+ typedef struct AdmissionSyntax_st ADMISSION_SYNTAX;
+
+ const ASN1_OBJECT *NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityId(
+     const NAMING_AUTHORITY *n);
+ void NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityId(NAMING_AUTHORITY *n,
+     ASN1_OBJECT* namingAuthorityId);
+ const ASN1_IA5STRING *NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityURL(
+     const NAMING_AUTHORITY *n);
+ void NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityURL(NAMING_AUTHORITY *n,
+     ASN1_IA5STRING* namingAuthorityUrl);
+ const ASN1_STRING *NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityText(
+     const NAMING_AUTHORITY *n);
+ void NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityText(NAMING_AUTHORITY *n,
+     ASN1_STRING* namingAuthorityText);
+
+ const GENERAL_NAME *ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_admissionAuthority(
+     const ADMISSION_SYNTAX *as);
+ void ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_admissionAuthority(
+     ADMISSION_SYNTAX *as, GENERAL_NAME *aa);
+ const STACK_OF(ADMISSIONS) *ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_contentsOfAdmissions(
+     const ADMISSION_SYNTAX *as);
+ void ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_contentsOfAdmissions(
+     ADMISSION_SYNTAX *as, STACK_OF(ADMISSIONS) *a);
+
+ const GENERAL_NAME *ADMISSIONS_get0_admissionAuthority(const ADMISSIONS *a);
+ void ADMISSIONS_set0_admissionAuthority(ADMISSIONS *a, GENERAL_NAME *aa);
+ const NAMING_AUTHORITY *ADMISSIONS_get0_namingAuthority(const ADMISSIONS *a);
+ void ADMISSIONS_set0_namingAuthority(ADMISSIONS *a, NAMING_AUTHORITY *na);
+ const PROFESSION_INFOS *ADMISSIONS_get0_professionInfos(const ADMISSIONS *a);
+ void ADMISSIONS_set0_professionInfos(ADMISSIONS *a, PROFESSION_INFOS *pi);
+
+ const ASN1_OCTET_STRING *PROFESSION_INFO_get0_addProfessionInfo(
+     const PROFESSION_INFO *pi);
+ void PROFESSION_INFO_set0_addProfessionInfo(
+     PROFESSION_INFO *pi, ASN1_OCTET_STRING *aos);
+ const NAMING_AUTHORITY *PROFESSION_INFO_get0_namingAuthority(
+     const PROFESSION_INFO *pi);
+ void PROFESSION_INFO_set0_namingAuthority(
+     PROFESSION_INFO *pi, NAMING_AUTHORITY *na);
+ const STACK_OF(ASN1_STRING) *PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionItems(
+     const PROFESSION_INFO *pi);
+ void PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionItems(
+     PROFESSION_INFO *pi, STACK_OF(ASN1_STRING) *as);
+ const STACK_OF(ASN1_OBJECT) *PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionOIDs(
+     const PROFESSION_INFO *pi);
+ void PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionOIDs(
+     PROFESSION_INFO *pi, STACK_OF(ASN1_OBJECT) *po);
+ const ASN1_PRINTABLESTRING *PROFESSION_INFO_get0_registrationNumber(
+     const PROFESSION_INFO *pi);
+ void PROFESSION_INFO_set0_registrationNumber(
+     PROFESSION_INFO *pi, ASN1_PRINTABLESTRING *rn);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<PROFESSION_INFOS>, B<ADMISSION_SYNTAX>, B<ADMISSIONS>, and
+B<PROFESSION_INFO> types are opaque structures representing the
+analogous types defined in the Common PKI Specification published
+by L<https://www.t7ev.org>.
+Knowledge of those structures and their semantics is assumed.
+
+The conventional routines to convert between DER and the local format
+are described in L<d2i_X509(3)>.
+The conventional routines to allocate and free the types are defined
+in L<X509_dup(3)>.
+
+The B<PROFESSION_INFOS> type is a stack of B<PROFESSION_INFO>; see
+L<DEFINE_STACK_OF(3)> for details.
+
+The B<NAMING_AUTHORITY> type has an authority ID and URL, and text fields.
+The NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_authorityId(),
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_get0_authorityURL(), and
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_get0_get0_authorityText(), functions return pointers
+to those values within the object.
+The NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_authorityId(),
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_get0_authorityURL(), and
+NAMING_AUTHORITY_set0_get0_authorityText(),
+functions free any existing value and set the pointer to the specified value.
+
+The B<ADMISSION_SYNTAX> type has an authority name and a stack of
+B<ADMISSION> objects.
+The ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_admissionAuthority()
+and ADMISSION_SYNTAX_get0_contentsOfAdmissions() functions return pointers
+to those values within the object.
+The
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_admissionAuthority() and
+ADMISSION_SYNTAX_set0_contentsOfAdmissions()
+functions free any existing value and set the pointer to the specified value.
+
+The B<ADMISSION> type has an authority name, authority object, and a
+stack of B<PROFSSION_INFO> items.
+The ADMISSIONS_get0_admissionAuthority(), ADMISSIONS_get0_namingAuthority(),
+and ADMISSIONS_get0_professionInfos()
+functions return pointers to those values within the object.
+The
+ADMISSIONS_set0_admissionAuthority(),
+ADMISSIONS_set0_namingAuthority(), and
+ADMISSIONS_set0_professionInfos()
+functions free any existing value and set the pointer to the specified value.
+
+The B<PROFESSION_INFO> type has a name authority, stacks of
+profession Items and OIDs, a registration number, and additional
+profession info.
+The functions PROFESSION_INFO_get0_addProfessionInfo(),
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_namingAuthority(), PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionItems(),
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_professionOIDs(), and
+PROFESSION_INFO_get0_registrationNumber()
+functions return pointers to those values within the object.
+The
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_addProfessionInfo(),
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_namingAuthority(),
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionItems(),
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_professionOIDs(), and
+PROFESSION_INFO_set0_registrationNumber()
+functions free any existing value and set the pointer to the specified value.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Described above.
+Note that all of the I<get0> functions return a pointer to the internal data
+structure and must not be freed.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<X509_dup(3)>,
+L<d2i_X509(3)>,
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0a6a3c810a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_get_uint64, ASN1_INTEGER_set_uint64,
+ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64, ASN1_INTEGER_get, ASN1_INTEGER_set_int64, ASN1_INTEGER_set, BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER, ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN, ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64, ASN1_ENUMERATED_get, ASN1_ENUMERATED_set_int64, ASN1_ENUMERATED_set, BN_to_ASN1_ENUMERATED, ASN1_ENUMERATED_to_BN
+- ASN.1 INTEGER and ENUMERATED utilities
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ int ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64(int64_t *pr, const ASN1_INTEGER *a);
+ long ASN1_INTEGER_get(const ASN1_INTEGER *a);
+
+ int ASN1_INTEGER_set_int64(ASN1_INTEGER *a, int64_t r);
+ int ASN1_INTEGER_set(const ASN1_INTEGER *a, long v);
+
+ int ASN1_INTEGER_get_uint64(uint64_t *pr, const ASN1_INTEGER *a);
+ int ASN1_INTEGER_set_uint64(ASN1_INTEGER *a, uint64_t r);
+
+ ASN1_INTEGER *BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER(const BIGNUM *bn, ASN1_INTEGER *ai);
+ BIGNUM *ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN(const ASN1_INTEGER *ai, BIGNUM *bn);
+
+ int ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64(int64_t *pr, const ASN1_INTEGER *a);
+ long ASN1_ENUMERATED_get(const ASN1_ENUMERATED *a);
+
+ int ASN1_ENUMERATED_set_int64(ASN1_INTEGER *a, int64_t r);
+ int ASN1_ENUMERATED_set(ASN1_ENUMERATED *a, long v);
+
+ ASN1_ENUMERATED *BN_to_ASN1_ENUMERATED(BIGNUM *bn, ASN1_ENUMERATED *ai);
+ BIGNUM *ASN1_ENUMERATED_to_BN(ASN1_ENUMERATED *ai, BIGNUM *bn);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions convert to and from B<ASN1_INTEGER> and B<ASN1_ENUMERATED>
+structures.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64() converts an B<ASN1_INTEGER> into an B<int64_t> type
+If successful it returns 1 and sets B<*pr> to the value of B<a>. If it fails
+(due to invalid type or the value being too big to fit into an B<int64_t> type)
+it returns 0.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_get_uint64() is similar to ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64_t() except it
+converts to a B<uint64_t> type and an error is returned if the passed integer
+is negative.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_get() also returns the value of B<a> but it returns 0 if B<a> is
+NULL and -1 on error (which is ambiguous because -1 is a legitimate value for
+an B<ASN1_INTEGER>). New applications should use ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64()
+instead.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_set_int64() sets the value of B<ASN1_INTEGER> B<a> to the
+B<int64_t> value B<r>.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_set_uint64() sets the value of B<ASN1_INTEGER> B<a> to the
+B<uint64_t> value B<r>.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_set() sets the value of B<ASN1_INTEGER> B<a> to the B<long> value
+B<v>.
+
+BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER() converts B<BIGNUM> B<bn> to an B<ASN1_INTEGER>. If B<ai>
+is NULL a new B<ASN1_INTEGER> structure is returned. If B<ai> is not NULL then
+the existing structure will be used instead.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN() converts ASN1_INTEGER B<ai> into a B<BIGNUM>. If B<bn> is
+NULL a new B<BIGNUM> structure is returned. If B<bn> is not NULL then the
+existing structure will be used instead.
+
+ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64(), ASN1_ENUMERATED_set_int64(),
+ASN1_ENUMERATED_set(), BN_to_ASN1_ENUMERATED() and ASN1_ENUMERATED_to_BN()
+behave in an identical way to their ASN1_INTEGER counterparts except they
+operate on an B<ASN1_ENUMERATED> value.
+
+ASN1_ENUMERATED_get() returns the value of B<a> in a similar way to
+ASN1_INTEGER_get() but it returns B<0xffffffffL> if the value of B<a> will not
+fit in a long type. New applications should use ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64()
+instead.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+In general an B<ASN1_INTEGER> or B<ASN1_ENUMERATED> type can contain an
+integer of almost arbitrary size and so cannot always be represented by a C
+B<int64_t> type. However in many cases (for example version numbers) they
+represent small integers which can be more easily manipulated if converted to
+an appropriate C integer type.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The ambiguous return values of ASN1_INTEGER_get() and ASN1_ENUMERATED_get()
+mean these functions should be avoided if possible. They are retained for
+compatibility. Normally the ambiguous return values are not legitimate
+values for the fields they represent.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_set_int64(), ASN1_INTEGER_set(), ASN1_ENUMERATED_set_int64() and
+ASN1_ENUMERATED_set() return 1 for success and 0 for failure. They will only
+fail if a memory allocation error occurs.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64() and ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64() return 1 for success
+and 0 for failure. They will fail if the passed type is incorrect (this will
+only happen if there is a programming error) or if the value exceeds the range
+of an B<int64_t> type.
+
+BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER() and BN_to_ASN1_ENUMERATED() return an B<ASN1_INTEGER> or
+B<ASN1_ENUMERATED> structure respectively or NULL if an error occurs. They will
+only fail due to a memory allocation error.
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN() and ASN1_ENUMERATED_to_BN() return a B<BIGNUM> structure
+of NULL if an error occurs. They can fail if the passed type is incorrect
+(due to programming error) or due to a memory allocation failure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+ASN1_INTEGER_set_int64(), ASN1_INTEGER_get_int64(),
+ASN1_ENUMERATED_set_int64() and ASN1_ENUMERATED_get_int64()
+were added to OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_ITEM_lookup.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_ITEM_lookup.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9ba69c9d34dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_ITEM_lookup.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_ITEM_lookup, ASN1_ITEM_get - lookup ASN.1 structures
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ const ASN1_ITEM *ASN1_ITEM_lookup(const char *name);
+ const ASN1_ITEM *ASN1_ITEM_get(size_t i);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+ASN1_ITEM_lookup() returns the B<ASN1_ITEM name>.
+
+ASN1_ITEM_get() returns the B<ASN1_ITEM> with index B<i>. This function
+returns B<NULL> if the index B<i> is out of range.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_ITEM_lookup() and ASN1_ITEM_get() return a valid B<ASN1_ITEM> structure
+or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_OBJECT_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_OBJECT_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c018efffd56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_OBJECT_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_OBJECT_new, ASN1_OBJECT_free - object allocation functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ ASN1_OBJECT *ASN1_OBJECT_new(void);
+ void ASN1_OBJECT_free(ASN1_OBJECT *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The ASN1_OBJECT allocation routines, allocate and free an
+ASN1_OBJECT structure, which represents an ASN1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER.
+
+ASN1_OBJECT_new() allocates and initializes an ASN1_OBJECT structure.
+
+ASN1_OBJECT_free() frees up the B<ASN1_OBJECT> structure B<a>.
+If B<a> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Although ASN1_OBJECT_new() allocates a new ASN1_OBJECT structure it
+is almost never used in applications. The ASN1 object utility functions
+such as OBJ_nid2obj() are used instead.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+If the allocation fails, ASN1_OBJECT_new() returns B<NULL> and sets an error
+code that can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+Otherwise it returns a pointer to the newly allocated structure.
+
+ASN1_OBJECT_free() returns no value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<d2i_ASN1_OBJECT(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e1786bf085c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE, ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add, ASN1_STRING_TABLE_get,
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_cleanup - ASN1_STRING_TABLE manipulation functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ typedef struct asn1_string_table_st ASN1_STRING_TABLE;
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add(int nid, long minsize, long maxsize,
+                           unsigned long mask, unsigned long flags);
+ ASN1_STRING_TABLE * ASN1_STRING_TABLE_get(int nid);
+ void ASN1_STRING_TABLE_cleanup(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+=head2 Types
+
+B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> is a table which holds string information
+(basically minimum size, maximum size, type and etc) for a NID object.
+
+=head2 Functions
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add() adds a new B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> item into the
+local ASN1 string table based on the B<nid> along with other parameters.
+
+If the item is already in the table, fields of B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> are
+updated (depending on the values of those parameters, e.g., B<minsize>
+and B<maxsize> >= 0, B<mask> and B<flags> != 0). If the B<nid> is standard,
+a copy of the standard B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> is created and updated with
+other parameters.
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_get() searches for an B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> item based
+on B<nid>. It will search the local table first, then the standard one.
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_cleanup() frees all B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> items added
+by ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_add() returns 1 on success, 0 if an error occurred.
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_get() returns a valid B<ASN1_STRING_TABLE> structure
+or B<NULL> if nothing is found.
+
+ASN1_STRING_TABLE_cleanup() does not return a value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..85d356540bc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_length.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_STRING_dup, ASN1_STRING_cmp, ASN1_STRING_set, ASN1_STRING_length,
+ASN1_STRING_type, ASN1_STRING_get0_data, ASN1_STRING_data,
+ASN1_STRING_to_UTF8 - ASN1_STRING utility functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_length(ASN1_STRING *x);
+ const unsigned char * ASN1_STRING_get0_data(const ASN1_STRING *x);
+ unsigned char * ASN1_STRING_data(ASN1_STRING *x);
+
+ ASN1_STRING * ASN1_STRING_dup(ASN1_STRING *a);
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_cmp(ASN1_STRING *a, ASN1_STRING *b);
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_set(ASN1_STRING *str, const void *data, int len);
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_type(const ASN1_STRING *x);
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_to_UTF8(unsigned char **out, const ASN1_STRING *in);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions allow an B<ASN1_STRING> structure to be manipulated.
+
+ASN1_STRING_length() returns the length of the content of B<x>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_get0_data() returns an internal pointer to the data of B<x>.
+Since this is an internal pointer it should B<not> be freed or
+modified in any way.
+
+ASN1_STRING_data() is similar to ASN1_STRING_get0_data() except the
+returned value is not constant. This function is deprecated:
+applications should use ASN1_STRING_get0_data() instead.
+
+ASN1_STRING_dup() returns a copy of the structure B<a>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_cmp() compares B<a> and B<b> returning 0 if the two
+are identical. The string types and content are compared.
+
+ASN1_STRING_set() sets the data of string B<str> to the buffer
+B<data> or length B<len>. The supplied data is copied. If B<len>
+is -1 then the length is determined by strlen(data).
+
+ASN1_STRING_type() returns the type of B<x>, using standard constants
+such as B<V_ASN1_OCTET_STRING>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_to_UTF8() converts the string B<in> to UTF8 format, the
+converted data is allocated in a buffer in B<*out>. The length of
+B<out> is returned or a negative error code. The buffer B<*out>
+should be freed using OPENSSL_free().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Almost all ASN1 types in OpenSSL are represented as an B<ASN1_STRING>
+structure. Other types such as B<ASN1_OCTET_STRING> are simply typedef'ed
+to B<ASN1_STRING> and the functions call the B<ASN1_STRING> equivalents.
+B<ASN1_STRING> is also used for some B<CHOICE> types which consist
+entirely of primitive string types such as B<DirectoryString> and
+B<Time>.
+
+These functions should B<not> be used to examine or modify B<ASN1_INTEGER>
+or B<ASN1_ENUMERATED> types: the relevant B<INTEGER> or B<ENUMERATED>
+utility functions should be used instead.
+
+In general it cannot be assumed that the data returned by ASN1_STRING_data()
+is null terminated or does not contain embedded nulls. The actual format
+of the data will depend on the actual string type itself: for example
+for an IA5String the data will be ASCII, for a BMPString two bytes per
+character in big endian format, and for an UTF8String it will be in UTF8 format.
+
+Similar care should be take to ensure the data is in the correct format
+when calling ASN1_STRING_set().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_STRING_length() returns the length of the content of B<x>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_get0_data() and ASN1_STRING_data() return an internal pointer to
+the data of B<x>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_dup() returns a valid B<ASN1_STRING> structure or B<NULL> if an
+error occurred.
+
+ASN1_STRING_cmp() returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0,
+according to whether B<a> is greater than, equal to, or less than B<b>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_set() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+ASN1_STRING_type() returns the type of B<x>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_to_UTF8() returns the number of bytes in output string B<out> or a
+negative value if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7bd2fc19210b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_STRING_new, ASN1_STRING_type_new, ASN1_STRING_free -
+ASN1_STRING allocation functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ ASN1_STRING * ASN1_STRING_new(void);
+ ASN1_STRING * ASN1_STRING_type_new(int type);
+ void ASN1_STRING_free(ASN1_STRING *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+ASN1_STRING_new() returns an allocated B<ASN1_STRING> structure. Its type
+is undefined.
+
+ASN1_STRING_type_new() returns an allocated B<ASN1_STRING> structure of
+type B<type>.
+
+ASN1_STRING_free() frees up B<a>.
+If B<a> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Other string types call the B<ASN1_STRING> functions. For example
+ASN1_OCTET_STRING_new() calls ASN1_STRING_type(V_ASN1_OCTET_STRING).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_STRING_new() and ASN1_STRING_type_new() return a valid
+ASN1_STRING structure or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
+
+ASN1_STRING_free() does not return a value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_print_ex.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_print_ex.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f0b70e836e9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_STRING_print_ex.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_tag2str, ASN1_STRING_print_ex, ASN1_STRING_print_ex_fp, ASN1_STRING_print
+- ASN1_STRING output routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ int ASN1_STRING_print_ex(BIO *out, const ASN1_STRING *str, unsigned long flags);
+ int ASN1_STRING_print_ex_fp(FILE *fp, const ASN1_STRING *str, unsigned long flags);
+ int ASN1_STRING_print(BIO *out, const ASN1_STRING *str);
+
+ const char *ASN1_tag2str(int tag);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions output an B<ASN1_STRING> structure. B<ASN1_STRING> is used to
+represent all the ASN1 string types.
+
+ASN1_STRING_print_ex() outputs B<str> to B<out>, the format is determined by
+the options B<flags>. ASN1_STRING_print_ex_fp() is identical except it outputs
+to B<fp> instead.
+
+ASN1_STRING_print() prints B<str> to B<out> but using a different format to
+ASN1_STRING_print_ex(). It replaces unprintable characters (other than CR, LF)
+with '.'.
+
+ASN1_tag2str() returns a human-readable name of the specified ASN.1 B<tag>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+ASN1_STRING_print() is a deprecated function which should be avoided; use
+ASN1_STRING_print_ex() instead.
+
+Although there are a large number of options frequently B<ASN1_STRFLGS_RFC2253> is
+suitable, or on UTF8 terminals B<ASN1_STRFLGS_RFC2253 & ~ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_MSB>.
+
+The complete set of supported options for B<flags> is listed below.
+
+Various characters can be escaped. If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_2253> is set the characters
+determined by RFC2253 are escaped. If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_CTRL> is set control
+characters are escaped. If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_MSB> is set characters with the
+MSB set are escaped: this option should B<not> be used if the terminal correctly
+interprets UTF8 sequences.
+
+Escaping takes several forms.
+
+If the character being escaped is a 16 bit character then the form "\UXXXX" is used
+using exactly four characters for the hex representation. If it is 32 bits then
+"\WXXXXXXXX" is used using eight characters of its hex representation. These forms
+will only be used if UTF8 conversion is not set (see below).
+
+Printable characters are normally escaped using the backslash '\' character. If
+B<ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_QUOTE> is set then the whole string is instead surrounded by
+double quote characters: this is arguably more readable than the backslash
+notation. Other characters use the "\XX" using exactly two characters of the hex
+representation.
+
+If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_UTF8_CONVERT> is set then characters are converted to UTF8
+format first. If the terminal supports the display of UTF8 sequences then this
+option will correctly display multi byte characters.
+
+If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_IGNORE_TYPE> is set then the string type is not interpreted at
+all: everything is assumed to be one byte per character. This is primarily for
+debugging purposes and can result in confusing output in multi character strings.
+
+If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_SHOW_TYPE> is set then the string type itself is printed out
+before its value (for example "BMPSTRING"), this actually uses ASN1_tag2str().
+
+The content of a string instead of being interpreted can be "dumped": this just
+outputs the value of the string using the form #XXXX using hex format for each
+octet.
+
+If B<ASN1_STRFLGS_DUMP_ALL> is set then any type is dumped.
+
+Normally non character string types (such as OCTET STRING) are assumed to be
+one byte per character, if B<ASN1_STRFLGS_DUMP_UNKNOWN> is set then they will
+be dumped instead.
+
+When a type is dumped normally just the content octets are printed, if
+B<ASN1_STRFLGS_DUMP_DER> is set then the complete encoding is dumped
+instead (including tag and length octets).
+
+B<ASN1_STRFLGS_RFC2253> includes all the flags required by RFC2253. It is
+equivalent to:
+ ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_2253 | ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_CTRL | ASN1_STRFLGS_ESC_MSB |
+ ASN1_STRFLGS_UTF8_CONVERT | ASN1_STRFLGS_DUMP_UNKNOWN ASN1_STRFLGS_DUMP_DER
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_STRING_print_ex() and ASN1_STRING_print_ex_fp() return the number of
+characters written or -1 if an error occurred.
+
+ASN1_STRING_print() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+ASN1_tag2str() returns a human-readable name of the specified ASN.1 B<tag>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<X509_NAME_print_ex(3)>,
+L<ASN1_tag2str(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2002-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a083ebfd1bd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TIME_set.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_TIME_set, ASN1_UTCTIME_set, ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set,
+ASN1_TIME_adj, ASN1_UTCTIME_adj, ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_adj,
+ASN1_TIME_check, ASN1_UTCTIME_check, ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_check,
+ASN1_TIME_set_string, ASN1_UTCTIME_set_string, ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set_string,
+ASN1_TIME_set_string_X509,
+ASN1_TIME_normalize,
+ASN1_TIME_to_tm,
+ASN1_TIME_print, ASN1_UTCTIME_print, ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print,
+ASN1_TIME_diff,
+ASN1_TIME_cmp_time_t, ASN1_UTCTIME_cmp_time_t,
+ASN1_TIME_compare,
+ASN1_TIME_to_generalizedtime - ASN.1 Time functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ ASN1_TIME *ASN1_TIME_set(ASN1_TIME *s, time_t t);
+ ASN1_UTCTIME *ASN1_UTCTIME_set(ASN1_UTCTIME *s, time_t t);
+ ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set(ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *s,
+                                                time_t t);
+
+ ASN1_TIME *ASN1_TIME_adj(ASN1_TIME *s, time_t t, int offset_day,
+                          long offset_sec);
+ ASN1_UTCTIME *ASN1_UTCTIME_adj(ASN1_UTCTIME *s, time_t t,
+                                int offset_day, long offset_sec);
+ ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_adj(ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *s,
+                                                time_t t, int offset_day,
+                                                long offset_sec);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_set_string(ASN1_TIME *s, const char *str);
+ int ASN1_TIME_set_string_X509(ASN1_TIME *s, const char *str);
+ int ASN1_UTCTIME_set_string(ASN1_UTCTIME *s, const char *str);
+ int ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set_string(ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *s,
+                                     const char *str);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_normalize(ASN1_TIME *s);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_check(const ASN1_TIME *t);
+ int ASN1_UTCTIME_check(const ASN1_UTCTIME *t);
+ int ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_check(const ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *t);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_print(BIO *b, const ASN1_TIME *s);
+ int ASN1_UTCTIME_print(BIO *b, const ASN1_UTCTIME *s);
+ int ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print(BIO *b, const ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *s);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_to_tm(const ASN1_TIME *s, struct tm *tm);
+ int ASN1_TIME_diff(int *pday, int *psec, const ASN1_TIME *from,
+                    const ASN1_TIME *to);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_cmp_time_t(const ASN1_TIME *s, time_t t);
+ int ASN1_UTCTIME_cmp_time_t(const ASN1_UTCTIME *s, time_t t);
+
+ int ASN1_TIME_compare(const ASN1_TIME *a, const ASN1_TIME *b);
+
+ ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *ASN1_TIME_to_generalizedtime(ASN1_TIME *t,
+                                                    ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME **out);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The ASN1_TIME_set(), ASN1_UTCTIME_set() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set()
+functions set the structure B<s> to the time represented by the time_t
+value B<t>. If B<s> is NULL a new time structure is allocated and returned.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_adj(), ASN1_UTCTIME_adj() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_adj()
+functions set the time structure B<s> to the time represented
+by the time B<offset_day> and B<offset_sec> after the time_t value B<t>.
+The values of B<offset_day> or B<offset_sec> can be negative to set a
+time before B<t>. The B<offset_sec> value can also exceed the number of
+seconds in a day. If B<s> is NULL a new structure is allocated
+and returned.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_set_string(), ASN1_UTCTIME_set_string() and
+ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set_string() functions set the time structure B<s>
+to the time represented by string B<str> which must be in appropriate ASN.1
+time format (for example YYMMDDHHMMSSZ or YYYYMMDDHHMMSSZ). If B<s> is NULL
+this function performs a format check on B<str> only. The string B<str>
+is copied into B<s>.
+
+ASN1_TIME_set_string_X509() sets ASN1_TIME structure B<s> to the time
+represented by string B<str> which must be in appropriate time format
+that RFC 5280 requires, which means it only allows YYMMDDHHMMSSZ and
+YYYYMMDDHHMMSSZ (leap second is rejected), all other ASN.1 time format
+are not allowed. If B<s> is NULL this function performs a format check
+on B<str> only.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_normalize() function converts an ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME or
+ASN1_UTCTIME into a time value that can be used in a certificate. It
+should be used after the ASN1_TIME_set_string() functions and before
+ASN1_TIME_print() functions to get consistent (i.e. GMT) results.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_check(), ASN1_UTCTIME_check() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_check()
+functions check the syntax of the time structure B<s>.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_print(), ASN1_UTCTIME_print() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print()
+functions print the time structure B<s> to BIO B<b> in human readable
+format. It will be of the format MMM DD HH:MM:SS YYYY [GMT], for example
+"Feb  3 00:55:52 2015 GMT" it does not include a newline. If the time
+structure has invalid format it prints out "Bad time value" and returns
+an error. The output for generalized time may include a fractional part
+following the second.
+
+ASN1_TIME_to_tm() converts the time B<s> to the standard B<tm> structure.
+If B<s> is NULL, then the current time is converted. The output time is GMT.
+The B<tm_sec>, B<tm_min>, B<tm_hour>, B<tm_mday>, B<tm_wday>, B<tm_yday>,
+B<tm_mon> and B<tm_year> fields of B<tm> structure are set to proper values,
+whereas all other fields are set to 0. If B<tm> is NULL this function performs
+a format check on B<s> only. If B<s> is in Generalized format with fractional
+seconds, e.g. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.SSSZ, the fractional seconds will be lost while
+converting B<s> to B<tm> structure.
+
+ASN1_TIME_diff() sets B<*pday> and B<*psec> to the time difference between
+B<from> and B<to>. If B<to> represents a time later than B<from> then
+one or both (depending on the time difference) of B<*pday> and B<*psec>
+will be positive. If B<to> represents a time earlier than B<from> then
+one or both of B<*pday> and B<*psec> will be negative. If B<to> and B<from>
+represent the same time then B<*pday> and B<*psec> will both be zero.
+If both B<*pday> and B<*psec> are non-zero they will always have the same
+sign. The value of B<*psec> will always be less than the number of seconds
+in a day. If B<from> or B<to> is NULL the current time is used.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_cmp_time_t() and ASN1_UTCTIME_cmp_time_t() functions compare
+the two times represented by the time structure B<s> and the time_t B<t>.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_compare() function compares the two times represented by the
+time structures B<a> and B<b>.
+
+The ASN1_TIME_to_generalizedtime() function converts an ASN1_TIME to an
+ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME, regardless of year. If either B<out> or
+B<*out> are NULL, then a new object is allocated and must be freed after use.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The ASN1_TIME structure corresponds to the ASN.1 structure B<Time>
+defined in RFC5280 et al. The time setting functions obey the rules outlined
+in RFC5280: if the date can be represented by UTCTime it is used, else
+GeneralizedTime is used.
+
+The ASN1_TIME, ASN1_UTCTIME and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME structures are represented
+as an ASN1_STRING internally and can be freed up using ASN1_STRING_free().
+
+The ASN1_TIME structure can represent years from 0000 to 9999 but no attempt
+is made to correct ancient calendar changes (for example from Julian to
+Gregorian calendars).
+
+ASN1_UTCTIME is limited to a year range of 1950 through 2049.
+
+Some applications add offset times directly to a time_t value and pass the
+results to ASN1_TIME_set() (or equivalent). This can cause problems as the
+time_t value can overflow on some systems resulting in unexpected results.
+New applications should use ASN1_TIME_adj() instead and pass the offset value
+in the B<offset_sec> and B<offset_day> parameters instead of directly
+manipulating a time_t value.
+
+ASN1_TIME_adj() may change the type from ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME to ASN1_UTCTIME,
+or vice versa, based on the resulting year. The ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_adj() and
+ASN1_UTCTIME_adj() functions will not modify the type of the return structure.
+
+It is recommended that functions starting with ASN1_TIME be used instead of
+those starting with ASN1_UTCTIME or ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME. The functions
+starting with ASN1_UTCTIME and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME act only on that specific
+time format. The functions starting with ASN1_TIME will operate on either
+format.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+ASN1_TIME_print(), ASN1_UTCTIME_print() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print()
+do not print out the time zone: it either prints out "GMT" or nothing. But all
+certificates complying with RFC5280 et al use GMT anyway.
+
+Use the ASN1_TIME_normalize() function to normalize the time value before
+printing to get GMT results.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Set a time structure to one hour after the current time and print it out:
+
+ #include <time.h>
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ ASN1_TIME *tm;
+ time_t t;
+ BIO *b;
+
+ t = time(NULL);
+ tm = ASN1_TIME_adj(NULL, t, 0, 60 * 60);
+ b = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ ASN1_TIME_print(b, tm);
+ ASN1_STRING_free(tm);
+ BIO_free(b);
+
+Determine if one time is later or sooner than the current time:
+
+ int day, sec;
+
+ if (!ASN1_TIME_diff(&day, &sec, NULL, to))
+     /* Invalid time format */
+
+ if (day > 0 || sec > 0)
+     printf("Later\n");
+ else if (day < 0 || sec < 0)
+     printf("Sooner\n");
+ else
+     printf("Same\n");
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_TIME_set(), ASN1_UTCTIME_set(), ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set(), ASN1_TIME_adj(),
+ASN1_UTCTIME_adj and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set return a pointer to a time structure
+or NULL if an error occurred.
+
+ASN1_TIME_set_string(), ASN1_UTCTIME_set_string(), ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_set_string()
+ASN1_TIME_set_string_X509() return 1 if the time value is successfully set and 0 otherwise.
+
+ASN1_TIME_normalize() returns 1 on success, and 0 on error.
+
+ASN1_TIME_check(), ASN1_UTCTIME_check and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_check() return 1
+if the structure is syntactically correct and 0 otherwise.
+
+ASN1_TIME_print(), ASN1_UTCTIME_print() and ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME_print() return 1
+if the time is successfully printed out and 0 if an error occurred (I/O error or
+invalid time format).
+
+ASN1_TIME_to_tm() returns 1 if the time is successfully parsed and 0 if an
+error occurred (invalid time format).
+
+ASN1_TIME_diff() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure. It can fail if the
+passed-in time structure has invalid syntax, for example.
+
+ASN1_TIME_cmp_time_t() and ASN1_UTCTIME_cmp_time_t() return -1 if B<s> is
+before B<t>, 0 if B<s> equals B<t>, or 1 if B<s> is after B<t>. -2 is returned
+on error.
+
+ASN1_TIME_compare() returns -1 if B<a> is before B<b>, 0 if B<a> equals B<b>, or 1 if B<a> is after B<b>. -2 is returned on error.
+
+ASN1_TIME_to_generalizedtime() returns a pointer to
+the appropriate time structure on success or NULL if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The ASN1_TIME_to_tm() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+The ASN1_TIME_set_string_X509() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+The ASN1_TIME_normalize() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+The ASN1_TIME_cmp_time_t() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+The ASN1_TIME_compare() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..70c56878b8e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_TYPE_get.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_TYPE_get, ASN1_TYPE_set, ASN1_TYPE_set1, ASN1_TYPE_cmp, ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence, ASN1_TYPE_pack_sequence - ASN1_TYPE utility
+functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ int ASN1_TYPE_get(const ASN1_TYPE *a);
+ void ASN1_TYPE_set(ASN1_TYPE *a, int type, void *value);
+ int ASN1_TYPE_set1(ASN1_TYPE *a, int type, const void *value);
+ int ASN1_TYPE_cmp(const ASN1_TYPE *a, const ASN1_TYPE *b);
+
+ void *ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence(const ASN1_ITEM *it, const ASN1_TYPE *t);
+ ASN1_TYPE *ASN1_TYPE_pack_sequence(const ASN1_ITEM *it, void *s,
+                                    ASN1_TYPE **t);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions allow an ASN1_TYPE structure to be manipulated. The
+ASN1_TYPE structure can contain any ASN.1 type or constructed type
+such as a SEQUENCE: it is effectively equivalent to the ASN.1 ANY type.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_get() returns the type of B<a>.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_set() sets the value of B<a> to B<type> and B<value>. This
+function uses the pointer B<value> internally so it must B<not> be freed
+up after the call.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_set1() sets the value of B<a> to B<type> a copy of B<value>.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_cmp() compares ASN.1 types B<a> and B<b> and returns 0 if
+they are identical and non-zero otherwise.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence() attempts to parse the SEQUENCE present in
+B<t> using the ASN.1 structure B<it>. If successful it returns a pointer
+to the ASN.1 structure corresponding to B<it> which must be freed by the
+caller. If it fails it return NULL.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_pack_sequence() attempts to encode the ASN.1 structure B<s>
+corresponding to B<it> into an ASN1_TYPE. If successful the encoded
+ASN1_TYPE is returned. If B<t> and B<*t> are not NULL the encoded type
+is written to B<t> overwriting any existing data. If B<t> is not NULL
+but B<*t> is NULL the returned ASN1_TYPE is written to B<*t>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The type and meaning of the B<value> parameter for ASN1_TYPE_set() and
+ASN1_TYPE_set1() is determined by the B<type> parameter.
+If B<type> is V_ASN1_NULL B<value> is ignored. If B<type> is V_ASN1_BOOLEAN
+then the boolean is set to TRUE if B<value> is not NULL. If B<type> is
+V_ASN1_OBJECT then value is an ASN1_OBJECT structure. Otherwise B<type>
+is and ASN1_STRING structure. If B<type> corresponds to a primitive type
+(or a string type) then the contents of the ASN1_STRING contain the content
+octets of the type. If B<type> corresponds to a constructed type or
+a tagged type (V_ASN1_SEQUENCE, V_ASN1_SET or V_ASN1_OTHER) then the
+ASN1_STRING contains the entire ASN.1 encoding verbatim (including tag and
+length octets).
+
+ASN1_TYPE_cmp() may not return zero if two types are equivalent but have
+different encodings. For example the single content octet of the boolean TRUE
+value under BER can have any non-zero encoding but ASN1_TYPE_cmp() will
+only return zero if the values are the same.
+
+If either or both of the parameters passed to ASN1_TYPE_cmp() is NULL the
+return value is non-zero. Technically if both parameters are NULL the two
+types could be absent OPTIONAL fields and so should match, however passing
+NULL values could also indicate a programming error (for example an
+unparseable type which returns NULL) for types which do B<not> match. So
+applications should handle the case of two absent values separately.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_TYPE_get() returns the type of the ASN1_TYPE argument.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_set() does not return a value.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_set1() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_cmp() returns 0 if the types are identical and non-zero otherwise.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_unpack_sequence() returns a pointer to an ASN.1 structure or
+NULL on failure.
+
+ASN1_TYPE_pack_sequence() return an ASN1_TYPE structure if it succeeds or
+NULL on failure.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_generate_nconf.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_generate_nconf.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bf29af62f729
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASN1_generate_nconf.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASN1_generate_nconf, ASN1_generate_v3 - ASN1 generation functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/asn1.h>
+
+ ASN1_TYPE *ASN1_generate_nconf(const char *str, CONF *nconf);
+ ASN1_TYPE *ASN1_generate_v3(const char *str, X509V3_CTX *cnf);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions generate the ASN1 encoding of a string
+in an B<ASN1_TYPE> structure.
+
+B<str> contains the string to encode B<nconf> or B<cnf> contains
+the optional configuration information where additional strings
+will be read from. B<nconf> will typically come from a config
+file whereas B<cnf> is obtained from an B<X509V3_CTX> structure
+which will typically be used by X509 v3 certificate extension
+functions. B<cnf> or B<nconf> can be set to B<NULL> if no additional
+configuration will be used.
+
+=head1 GENERATION STRING FORMAT
+
+The actual data encoded is determined by the string B<str> and
+the configuration information. The general format of the string
+is:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<[modifier,]type[:value]>
+
+=back
+
+That is zero or more comma separated modifiers followed by a type
+followed by an optional colon and a value. The formats of B<type>,
+B<value> and B<modifier> are explained below.
+
+=head2 Supported Types
+
+The supported types are listed below. Unless otherwise specified
+only the B<ASCII> format is permissible.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<BOOLEAN>, B<BOOL>
+
+This encodes a boolean type. The B<value> string is mandatory and
+should be B<TRUE> or B<FALSE>. Additionally B<TRUE>, B<true>, B<Y>,
+B<y>, B<YES>, B<yes>, B<FALSE>, B<false>, B<N>, B<n>, B<NO> and B<no>
+are acceptable.
+
+=item B<NULL>
+
+Encode the B<NULL> type, the B<value> string must not be present.
+
+=item B<INTEGER>, B<INT>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<INTEGER> type. The B<value> string represents
+the value of the integer, it can be prefaced by a minus sign and
+is normally interpreted as a decimal value unless the prefix B<0x>
+is included.
+
+=item B<ENUMERATED>, B<ENUM>
+
+Encodes the ASN1 B<ENUMERATED> type, it is otherwise identical to
+B<INTEGER>.
+
+=item B<OBJECT>, B<OID>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<OBJECT IDENTIFIER>, the B<value> string can be
+a short name, a long name or numerical format.
+
+=item B<UTCTIME>, B<UTC>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<UTCTime> structure, the value should be in
+the format B<YYMMDDHHMMSSZ>.
+
+=item B<GENERALIZEDTIME>, B<GENTIME>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<GeneralizedTime> structure, the value should be in
+the format B<YYYYMMDDHHMMSSZ>.
+
+=item B<OCTETSTRING>, B<OCT>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<OCTET STRING>. B<value> represents the contents
+of this structure, the format strings B<ASCII> and B<HEX> can be
+used to specify the format of B<value>.
+
+=item B<BITSTRING>, B<BITSTR>
+
+Encodes an ASN1 B<BIT STRING>. B<value> represents the contents
+of this structure, the format strings B<ASCII>, B<HEX> and B<BITLIST>
+can be used to specify the format of B<value>.
+
+If the format is anything other than B<BITLIST> the number of unused
+bits is set to zero.
+
+=item B<UNIVERSALSTRING>, B<UNIV>, B<IA5>, B<IA5STRING>, B<UTF8>,
+B<UTF8String>, B<BMP>, B<BMPSTRING>, B<VISIBLESTRING>,
+B<VISIBLE>, B<PRINTABLESTRING>, B<PRINTABLE>, B<T61>,
+B<T61STRING>, B<TELETEXSTRING>, B<GeneralString>, B<NUMERICSTRING>,
+B<NUMERIC>
+
+These encode the corresponding string types. B<value> represents the
+contents of this structure. The format can be B<ASCII> or B<UTF8>.
+
+=item B<SEQUENCE>, B<SEQ>, B<SET>
+
+Formats the result as an ASN1 B<SEQUENCE> or B<SET> type. B<value>
+should be a section name which will contain the contents. The
+field names in the section are ignored and the values are in the
+generated string format. If B<value> is absent then an empty SEQUENCE
+will be encoded.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 Modifiers
+
+Modifiers affect the following structure, they can be used to
+add EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT tagging, add wrappers or to change
+the string format of the final type and value. The supported
+formats are documented below.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<EXPLICIT>, B<EXP>
+
+Add an explicit tag to the following structure. This string
+should be followed by a colon and the tag value to use as a
+decimal value.
+
+By following the number with B<U>, B<A>, B<P> or B<C> UNIVERSAL,
+APPLICATION, PRIVATE or CONTEXT SPECIFIC tagging can be used,
+the default is CONTEXT SPECIFIC.
+
+=item B<IMPLICIT>, B<IMP>
+
+This is the same as B<EXPLICIT> except IMPLICIT tagging is used
+instead.
+
+=item B<OCTWRAP>, B<SEQWRAP>, B<SETWRAP>, B<BITWRAP>
+
+The following structure is surrounded by an OCTET STRING, a SEQUENCE,
+a SET or a BIT STRING respectively. For a BIT STRING the number of unused
+bits is set to zero.
+
+=item B<FORMAT>
+
+This specifies the format of the ultimate value. It should be followed
+by a colon and one of the strings B<ASCII>, B<UTF8>, B<HEX> or B<BITLIST>.
+
+If no format specifier is included then B<ASCII> is used. If B<UTF8> is
+specified then the value string must be a valid B<UTF8> string. For B<HEX> the
+output must be a set of hex digits. B<BITLIST> (which is only valid for a BIT
+STRING) is a comma separated list of the indices of the set bits, all other
+bits are zero.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+A simple IA5String:
+
+ IA5STRING:Hello World
+
+An IA5String explicitly tagged:
+
+ EXPLICIT:0,IA5STRING:Hello World
+
+An IA5String explicitly tagged using APPLICATION tagging:
+
+ EXPLICIT:0A,IA5STRING:Hello World
+
+A BITSTRING with bits 1 and 5 set and all others zero:
+
+ FORMAT:BITLIST,BITSTRING:1,5
+
+A more complex example using a config file to produce a
+SEQUENCE consisting of a BOOL an OID and a UTF8String:
+
+ asn1 = SEQUENCE:seq_section
+
+ [seq_section]
+
+ field1 = BOOLEAN:TRUE
+ field2 = OID:commonName
+ field3 = UTF8:Third field
+
+This example produces an RSAPrivateKey structure, this is the
+key contained in the file client.pem in all OpenSSL distributions
+(note: the field names such as 'coeff' are ignored and are present just
+for clarity):
+
+ asn1=SEQUENCE:private_key
+ [private_key]
+ version=INTEGER:0
+
+ n=INTEGER:0xBB6FE79432CC6EA2D8F970675A5A87BFBE1AFF0BE63E879F2AFFB93644\
+ D4D2C6D000430DEC66ABF47829E74B8C5108623A1C0EE8BE217B3AD8D36D5EB4FCA1D9
+
+ e=INTEGER:0x010001
+
+ d=INTEGER:0x6F05EAD2F27FFAEC84BEC360C4B928FD5F3A9865D0FCAAD291E2A52F4A\
+ F810DC6373278C006A0ABBA27DC8C63BF97F7E666E27C5284D7D3B1FFFE16B7A87B51D
+
+ p=INTEGER:0xF3929B9435608F8A22C208D86795271D54EBDFB09DDEF539AB083DA912\
+ D4BD57
+
+ q=INTEGER:0xC50016F89DFF2561347ED1186A46E150E28BF2D0F539A1594BBD7FE467\
+ 46EC4F
+
+ exp1=INTEGER:0x9E7D4326C924AFC1DEA40B45650134966D6F9DFA3A7F9D698CD4ABEA\
+ 9C0A39B9
+
+ exp2=INTEGER:0xBA84003BB95355AFB7C50DF140C60513D0BA51D637272E355E397779\
+ E7B2458F
+
+ coeff=INTEGER:0x30B9E4F2AFA5AC679F920FC83F1F2DF1BAF1779CF989447FABC2F5\
+ 628657053A
+
+This example is the corresponding public key in a SubjectPublicKeyInfo
+structure:
+
+ # Start with a SEQUENCE
+ asn1=SEQUENCE:pubkeyinfo
+
+ # pubkeyinfo contains an algorithm identifier and the public key wrapped
+ # in a BIT STRING
+ [pubkeyinfo]
+ algorithm=SEQUENCE:rsa_alg
+ pubkey=BITWRAP,SEQUENCE:rsapubkey
+
+ # algorithm ID for RSA is just an OID and a NULL
+ [rsa_alg]
+ algorithm=OID:rsaEncryption
+ parameter=NULL
+
+ # Actual public key: modulus and exponent
+ [rsapubkey]
+ n=INTEGER:0xBB6FE79432CC6EA2D8F970675A5A87BFBE1AFF0BE63E879F2AFFB93644\
+ D4D2C6D000430DEC66ABF47829E74B8C5108623A1C0EE8BE217B3AD8D36D5EB4FCA1D9
+
+ e=INTEGER:0x010001
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASN1_generate_nconf() and ASN1_generate_v3() return the encoded
+data as an B<ASN1_TYPE> structure or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
+
+The error codes that can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..204280210e04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_free, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd,
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds,
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_changed_fds, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd - functions to manage
+waiting for asynchronous jobs to complete
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/async.h>
+
+ ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new(void);
+ void ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_free(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx);
+ int ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, const void *key,
+                                OSSL_ASYNC_FD fd,
+                                void *custom_data,
+                                void (*cleanup)(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *, const void *,
+                                                OSSL_ASYNC_FD, void *));
+ int ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, const void *key,
+                           OSSL_ASYNC_FD *fd, void **custom_data);
+ int ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, OSSL_ASYNC_FD *fd,
+                                size_t *numfds);
+ int ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_changed_fds(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, OSSL_ASYNC_FD *addfd,
+                                    size_t *numaddfds, OSSL_ASYNC_FD *delfd,
+                                    size_t *numdelfds);
+ int ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, const void *key);
+
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+For an overview of how asynchronous operations are implemented in OpenSSL see
+L<ASYNC_start_job(3)>. An ASYNC_WAIT_CTX object represents an asynchronous
+"session", i.e. a related set of crypto operations. For example in SSL terms
+this would have a one-to-one correspondence with an SSL connection.
+
+Application code must create an ASYNC_WAIT_CTX using the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new()
+function prior to calling ASYNC_start_job() (see L<ASYNC_start_job(3)>). When
+the job is started it is associated with the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX for the duration of
+that job. An ASYNC_WAIT_CTX should only be used for one ASYNC_JOB at any one
+time, but can be reused after an ASYNC_JOB has finished for a subsequent
+ASYNC_JOB. When the session is complete (e.g. the SSL connection is closed),
+application code cleans up with ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_free().
+
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTXs can have "wait" file descriptors associated with them. Calling
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds() and passing in a pointer to an ASYNC_WAIT_CTX in
+the B<ctx> parameter will return the wait file descriptors associated with that
+job in B<*fd>. The number of file descriptors returned will be stored in
+B<*numfds>. It is the caller's responsibility to ensure that sufficient memory
+has been allocated in B<*fd> to receive all the file descriptors. Calling
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds() with a NULL B<fd> value will return no file
+descriptors but will still populate B<*numfds>. Therefore application code is
+typically expected to call this function twice: once to get the number of fds,
+and then again when sufficient memory has been allocated. If only one
+asynchronous engine is being used then normally this call will only ever return
+one fd. If multiple asynchronous engines are being used then more could be
+returned.
+
+The function ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_changed_fds() can be used to detect if any fds
+have changed since the last call time ASYNC_start_job() returned an ASYNC_PAUSE
+result (or since the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX was created if no ASYNC_PAUSE result has
+been received). The B<numaddfds> and B<numdelfds> parameters will be populated
+with the number of fds added or deleted respectively. B<*addfd> and B<*delfd>
+will be populated with the list of added and deleted fds respectively. Similarly
+to ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds() either of these can be NULL, but if they are not
+NULL then the caller is responsible for ensuring sufficient memory is allocated.
+
+Implementors of async aware code (e.g. engines) are encouraged to return a
+stable fd for the lifetime of the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX in order to reduce the "churn"
+of regularly changing fds - although no guarantees of this are provided to
+applications.
+
+Applications can wait for the file descriptor to be ready for "read" using a
+system function call such as select or poll (being ready for "read" indicates
+that the job should be resumed). If no file descriptor is made available then an
+application will have to periodically "poll" the job by attempting to restart it
+to see if it is ready to continue.
+
+Async aware code (e.g. engines) can get the current ASYNC_WAIT_CTX from the job
+via L<ASYNC_get_wait_ctx(3)> and provide a file descriptor to use for waiting
+on by calling ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd(). Typically this would be done by an
+engine immediately prior to calling ASYNC_pause_job() and not by end user code.
+An existing association with a file descriptor can be obtained using
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd() and cleared using ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd(). Both of
+these functions requires a B<key> value which is unique to the async aware
+code.  This could be any unique value but a good candidate might be the
+B<ENGINE *> for the engine. The B<custom_data> parameter can be any value, and
+will be returned in a subsequent call to ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd(). The
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd() function also expects a pointer to a "cleanup"
+routine. This can be NULL but if provided will automatically get called when
+the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX is freed, and gives the engine the opportunity to close the
+fd or any other resources. Note: The "cleanup" routine does not get called if
+the fd is cleared directly via a call to ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd().
+
+An example of typical usage might be an async capable engine. User code would
+initiate cryptographic operations. The engine would initiate those operations
+asynchronously and then call ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd() followed by
+ASYNC_pause_job() to return control to the user code. The user code can then
+perform other tasks or wait for the job to be ready by calling "select" or other
+similar function on the wait file descriptor. The engine can signal to the user
+code that the job should be resumed by making the wait file descriptor
+"readable". Once resumed the engine should clear the wake signal on the wait
+file descriptor.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new() returns a pointer to the newly allocated ASYNC_WAIT_CTX or
+NULL on error.
+
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds,
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_changed_fds and ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd all return 1 on
+success or 0 on error.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+On Windows platforms the openssl/async.h header is dependent on some
+of the types customarily made available by including windows.h. The
+application developer is likely to require control over when the latter
+is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore
+it is defined as an application developer's responsibility to include
+windows.h prior to async.h.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<ASYNC_start_job(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_free, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd,
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_fd, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds,
+ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_changed_fds, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_clear_fd were first added to
+OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..21b77a96b95e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ASYNC_start_job.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ASYNC_get_wait_ctx,
+ASYNC_init_thread, ASYNC_cleanup_thread, ASYNC_start_job, ASYNC_pause_job,
+ASYNC_get_current_job, ASYNC_block_pause, ASYNC_unblock_pause, ASYNC_is_capable
+- asynchronous job management functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/async.h>
+
+ int ASYNC_init_thread(size_t max_size, size_t init_size);
+ void ASYNC_cleanup_thread(void);
+
+ int ASYNC_start_job(ASYNC_JOB **job, ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, int *ret,
+                     int (*func)(void *), void *args, size_t size);
+ int ASYNC_pause_job(void);
+
+ ASYNC_JOB *ASYNC_get_current_job(void);
+ ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ASYNC_get_wait_ctx(ASYNC_JOB *job);
+ void ASYNC_block_pause(void);
+ void ASYNC_unblock_pause(void);
+
+ int ASYNC_is_capable(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+OpenSSL implements asynchronous capabilities through an ASYNC_JOB. This
+represents code that can be started and executes until some event occurs. At
+that point the code can be paused and control returns to user code until some
+subsequent event indicates that the job can be resumed.
+
+The creation of an ASYNC_JOB is a relatively expensive operation. Therefore, for
+efficiency reasons, jobs can be created up front and reused many times. They are
+held in a pool until they are needed, at which point they are removed from the
+pool, used, and then returned to the pool when the job completes. If the user
+application is multi-threaded, then ASYNC_init_thread() may be called for each
+thread that will initiate asynchronous jobs. Before
+user code exits per-thread resources need to be cleaned up. This will normally
+occur automatically (see L<OPENSSL_init_crypto(3)>) but may be explicitly
+initiated by using ASYNC_cleanup_thread(). No asynchronous jobs must be
+outstanding for the thread when ASYNC_cleanup_thread() is called. Failing to
+ensure this will result in memory leaks.
+
+The B<max_size> argument limits the number of ASYNC_JOBs that will be held in
+the pool. If B<max_size> is set to 0 then no upper limit is set. When an
+ASYNC_JOB is needed but there are none available in the pool already then one
+will be automatically created, as long as the total of ASYNC_JOBs managed by the
+pool does not exceed B<max_size>. When the pool is first initialised
+B<init_size> ASYNC_JOBs will be created immediately. If ASYNC_init_thread() is
+not called before the pool is first used then it will be called automatically
+with a B<max_size> of 0 (no upper limit) and an B<init_size> of 0 (no ASYNC_JOBs
+created up front).
+
+An asynchronous job is started by calling the ASYNC_start_job() function.
+Initially B<*job> should be NULL. B<ctx> should point to an ASYNC_WAIT_CTX
+object created through the L<ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new(3)> function. B<ret> should
+point to a location where the return value of the asynchronous function should
+be stored on completion of the job. B<func> represents the function that should
+be started asynchronously. The data pointed to by B<args> and of size B<size>
+will be copied and then passed as an argument to B<func> when the job starts.
+ASYNC_start_job will return one of the following values:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<ASYNC_ERR>
+
+An error occurred trying to start the job. Check the OpenSSL error queue (e.g.
+see L<ERR_print_errors(3)>) for more details.
+
+=item B<ASYNC_NO_JOBS>
+
+There are no jobs currently available in the pool. This call can be retried
+again at a later time.
+
+=item B<ASYNC_PAUSE>
+
+The job was successfully started but was "paused" before it completed (see
+ASYNC_pause_job() below). A handle to the job is placed in B<*job>. Other work
+can be performed (if desired) and the job restarted at a later time. To restart
+a job call ASYNC_start_job() again passing the job handle in B<*job>. The
+B<func>, B<args> and B<size> parameters will be ignored when restarting a job.
+When restarting a job ASYNC_start_job() B<must> be called from the same thread
+that the job was originally started from.
+
+=item B<ASYNC_FINISH>
+
+The job completed. B<*job> will be NULL and the return value from B<func> will
+be placed in B<*ret>.
+
+=back
+
+At any one time there can be a maximum of one job actively running per thread
+(you can have many that are paused). ASYNC_get_current_job() can be used to get
+a pointer to the currently executing ASYNC_JOB. If no job is currently executing
+then this will return NULL.
+
+If executing within the context of a job (i.e. having been called directly or
+indirectly by the function "func" passed as an argument to ASYNC_start_job())
+then ASYNC_pause_job() will immediately return control to the calling
+application with ASYNC_PAUSE returned from the ASYNC_start_job() call. A
+subsequent call to ASYNC_start_job passing in the relevant ASYNC_JOB in the
+B<*job> parameter will resume execution from the ASYNC_pause_job() call. If
+ASYNC_pause_job() is called whilst not within the context of a job then no
+action is taken and ASYNC_pause_job() returns immediately.
+
+ASYNC_get_wait_ctx() can be used to get a pointer to the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX
+for the B<job>. ASYNC_WAIT_CTXs can have a "wait" file descriptor associated
+with them. Applications can wait for the file descriptor to be ready for "read"
+using a system function call such as select or poll (being ready for "read"
+indicates that the job should be resumed). If no file descriptor is made
+available then an application will have to periodically "poll" the job by
+attempting to restart it to see if it is ready to continue.
+
+An example of typical usage might be an async capable engine. User code would
+initiate cryptographic operations. The engine would initiate those operations
+asynchronously and then call L<ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd(3)> followed by
+ASYNC_pause_job() to return control to the user code. The user code can then
+perform other tasks or wait for the job to be ready by calling "select" or other
+similar function on the wait file descriptor. The engine can signal to the user
+code that the job should be resumed by making the wait file descriptor
+"readable". Once resumed the engine should clear the wake signal on the wait
+file descriptor.
+
+The ASYNC_block_pause() function will prevent the currently active job from
+pausing. The block will remain in place until a subsequent call to
+ASYNC_unblock_pause(). These functions can be nested, e.g. if you call
+ASYNC_block_pause() twice then you must call ASYNC_unblock_pause() twice in
+order to re-enable pausing. If these functions are called while there is no
+currently active job then they have no effect. This functionality can be useful
+to avoid deadlock scenarios. For example during the execution of an ASYNC_JOB an
+application acquires a lock. It then calls some cryptographic function which
+invokes ASYNC_pause_job(). This returns control back to the code that created
+the ASYNC_JOB. If that code then attempts to acquire the same lock before
+resuming the original job then a deadlock can occur. By calling
+ASYNC_block_pause() immediately after acquiring the lock and
+ASYNC_unblock_pause() immediately before releasing it then this situation cannot
+occur.
+
+Some platforms cannot support async operations. The ASYNC_is_capable() function
+can be used to detect whether the current platform is async capable or not.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ASYNC_init_thread returns 1 on success or 0 otherwise.
+
+ASYNC_start_job returns one of ASYNC_ERR, ASYNC_NO_JOBS, ASYNC_PAUSE or
+ASYNC_FINISH as described above.
+
+ASYNC_pause_job returns 0 if an error occurred or 1 on success. If called when
+not within the context of an ASYNC_JOB then this is counted as success so 1 is
+returned.
+
+ASYNC_get_current_job returns a pointer to the currently executing ASYNC_JOB or
+NULL if not within the context of a job.
+
+ASYNC_get_wait_ctx() returns a pointer to the ASYNC_WAIT_CTX for the job.
+
+ASYNC_is_capable() returns 1 if the current platform is async capable or 0
+otherwise.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+On Windows platforms the openssl/async.h header is dependent on some
+of the types customarily made available by including windows.h. The
+application developer is likely to require control over when the latter
+is included, commonly as one of the first included headers. Therefore
+it is defined as an application developer's responsibility to include
+windows.h prior to async.h.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+The following example demonstrates how to use most of the core async APIs:
+
+ #ifdef _WIN32
+ # include <windows.h>
+ #endif
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <openssl/async.h>
+ #include <openssl/crypto.h>
+
+ int unique = 0;
+
+ void cleanup(ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx, const void *key, OSSL_ASYNC_FD r, void *vw)
+ {
+     OSSL_ASYNC_FD *w = (OSSL_ASYNC_FD *)vw;
+
+     close(r);
+     close(*w);
+     OPENSSL_free(w);
+ }
+
+ int jobfunc(void *arg)
+ {
+     ASYNC_JOB *currjob;
+     unsigned char *msg;
+     int pipefds[2] = {0, 0};
+     OSSL_ASYNC_FD *wptr;
+     char buf = 'X';
+
+     currjob = ASYNC_get_current_job();
+     if (currjob != NULL) {
+         printf("Executing within a job\n");
+     } else {
+         printf("Not executing within a job - should not happen\n");
+         return 0;
+     }
+
+     msg = (unsigned char *)arg;
+     printf("Passed in message is: %s\n", msg);
+
+     if (pipe(pipefds) != 0) {
+         printf("Failed to create pipe\n");
+         return 0;
+     }
+     wptr = OPENSSL_malloc(sizeof(OSSL_ASYNC_FD));
+     if (wptr == NULL) {
+         printf("Failed to malloc\n");
+         return 0;
+     }
+     *wptr = pipefds[1];
+     ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_set_wait_fd(ASYNC_get_wait_ctx(currjob), &unique,
+                                pipefds[0], wptr, cleanup);
+
+     /*
+      * Normally some external event would cause this to happen at some
+      * later point - but we do it here for demo purposes, i.e.
+      * immediately signalling that the job is ready to be woken up after
+      * we return to main via ASYNC_pause_job().
+      */
+     write(pipefds[1], &buf, 1);
+
+     /* Return control back to main */
+     ASYNC_pause_job();
+
+     /* Clear the wake signal */
+     read(pipefds[0], &buf, 1);
+
+     printf ("Resumed the job after a pause\n");
+
+     return 1;
+ }
+
+ int main(void)
+ {
+     ASYNC_JOB *job = NULL;
+     ASYNC_WAIT_CTX *ctx = NULL;
+     int ret;
+     OSSL_ASYNC_FD waitfd;
+     fd_set waitfdset;
+     size_t numfds;
+     unsigned char msg[13] = "Hello world!";
+
+     printf("Starting...\n");
+
+     ctx = ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_new();
+     if (ctx == NULL) {
+         printf("Failed to create ASYNC_WAIT_CTX\n");
+         abort();
+     }
+
+     for (;;) {
+         switch (ASYNC_start_job(&job, ctx, &ret, jobfunc, msg, sizeof(msg))) {
+         case ASYNC_ERR:
+         case ASYNC_NO_JOBS:
+             printf("An error occurred\n");
+             goto end;
+         case ASYNC_PAUSE:
+             printf("Job was paused\n");
+             break;
+         case ASYNC_FINISH:
+             printf("Job finished with return value %d\n", ret);
+             goto end;
+         }
+
+         /* Wait for the job to be woken */
+         printf("Waiting for the job to be woken up\n");
+
+         if (!ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds(ctx, NULL, &numfds)
+                 || numfds > 1) {
+             printf("Unexpected number of fds\n");
+             abort();
+         }
+         ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_get_all_fds(ctx, &waitfd, &numfds);
+         FD_ZERO(&waitfdset);
+         FD_SET(waitfd, &waitfdset);
+         select(waitfd + 1, &waitfdset, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+     }
+
+ end:
+     ASYNC_WAIT_CTX_free(ctx);
+     printf("Finishing\n");
+
+     return 0;
+ }
+
+The expected output from executing the above example program is:
+
+ Starting...
+ Executing within a job
+ Passed in message is: Hello world!
+ Job was paused
+ Waiting for the job to be woken up
+ Resumed the job after a pause
+ Job finished with return value 1
+ Finishing
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<ERR_print_errors(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+ASYNC_init_thread, ASYNC_cleanup_thread,
+ASYNC_start_job, ASYNC_pause_job, ASYNC_get_current_job, ASYNC_get_wait_ctx(),
+ASYNC_block_pause(), ASYNC_unblock_pause() and ASYNC_is_capable() were first
+added to OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b20f634da6f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BF_encrypt.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BF_set_key, BF_encrypt, BF_decrypt, BF_ecb_encrypt, BF_cbc_encrypt,
+BF_cfb64_encrypt, BF_ofb64_encrypt, BF_options - Blowfish encryption
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/blowfish.h>
+
+ void BF_set_key(BF_KEY *key, int len, const unsigned char *data);
+
+ void BF_ecb_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                     BF_KEY *key, int enc);
+ void BF_cbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                     long length, BF_KEY *schedule,
+                     unsigned char *ivec, int enc);
+ void BF_cfb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                       long length, BF_KEY *schedule,
+                       unsigned char *ivec, int *num, int enc);
+ void BF_ofb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                       long length, BF_KEY *schedule,
+                       unsigned char *ivec, int *num);
+ const char *BF_options(void);
+
+ void BF_encrypt(BF_LONG *data, const BF_KEY *key);
+ void BF_decrypt(BF_LONG *data, const BF_KEY *key);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This library implements the Blowfish cipher, which was invented and described
+by Counterpane (see http://www.counterpane.com/blowfish.html ).
+
+Blowfish is a block cipher that operates on 64 bit (8 byte) blocks of data.
+It uses a variable size key, but typically, 128 bit (16 byte) keys are
+considered good for strong encryption.  Blowfish can be used in the same
+modes as DES (see L<des_modes(7)>).  Blowfish is currently one
+of the faster block ciphers.  It is quite a bit faster than DES, and much
+faster than IDEA or RC2.
+
+Blowfish consists of a key setup phase and the actual encryption or decryption
+phase.
+
+BF_set_key() sets up the B<BF_KEY> B<key> using the B<len> bytes long key
+at B<data>.
+
+BF_ecb_encrypt() is the basic Blowfish encryption and decryption function.
+It encrypts or decrypts the first 64 bits of B<in> using the key B<key>,
+putting the result in B<out>.  B<enc> decides if encryption (B<BF_ENCRYPT>)
+or decryption (B<BF_DECRYPT>) shall be performed.  The vector pointed at by
+B<in> and B<out> must be 64 bits in length, no less.  If they are larger,
+everything after the first 64 bits is ignored.
+
+The mode functions BF_cbc_encrypt(), BF_cfb64_encrypt() and BF_ofb64_encrypt()
+all operate on variable length data.  They all take an initialization vector
+B<ivec> which needs to be passed along into the next call of the same function
+for the same message.  B<ivec> may be initialized with anything, but the
+recipient needs to know what it was initialized with, or it won't be able
+to decrypt.  Some programs and protocols simplify this, like SSH, where
+B<ivec> is simply initialized to zero.
+BF_cbc_encrypt() operates on data that is a multiple of 8 bytes long, while
+BF_cfb64_encrypt() and BF_ofb64_encrypt() are used to encrypt an variable
+number of bytes (the amount does not have to be an exact multiple of 8).  The
+purpose of the latter two is to simulate stream ciphers, and therefore, they
+need the parameter B<num>, which is a pointer to an integer where the current
+offset in B<ivec> is stored between calls.  This integer must be initialized
+to zero when B<ivec> is initialized.
+
+BF_cbc_encrypt() is the Cipher Block Chaining function for Blowfish.  It
+encrypts or decrypts the 64 bits chunks of B<in> using the key B<schedule>,
+putting the result in B<out>.  B<enc> decides if encryption (BF_ENCRYPT) or
+decryption (BF_DECRYPT) shall be performed.  B<ivec> must point at an 8 byte
+long initialization vector.
+
+BF_cfb64_encrypt() is the CFB mode for Blowfish with 64 bit feedback.
+It encrypts or decrypts the bytes in B<in> using the key B<schedule>,
+putting the result in B<out>.  B<enc> decides if encryption (B<BF_ENCRYPT>)
+or decryption (B<BF_DECRYPT>) shall be performed.  B<ivec> must point at an
+8 byte long initialization vector. B<num> must point at an integer which must
+be initially zero.
+
+BF_ofb64_encrypt() is the OFB mode for Blowfish with 64 bit feedback.
+It uses the same parameters as BF_cfb64_encrypt(), which must be initialized
+the same way.
+
+BF_encrypt() and BF_decrypt() are the lowest level functions for Blowfish
+encryption.  They encrypt/decrypt the first 64 bits of the vector pointed by
+B<data>, using the key B<key>.  These functions should not be used unless you
+implement 'modes' of Blowfish.  The alternative is to use BF_ecb_encrypt().
+If you still want to use these functions, you should be aware that they take
+each 32-bit chunk in host-byte order, which is little-endian on little-endian
+platforms and big-endian on big-endian ones.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+None of the functions presented here return any value.
+
+=head1 NOTE
+
+Applications should use the higher level functions
+L<EVP_EncryptInit(3)> etc. instead of calling these
+functions directly.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<EVP_EncryptInit(3)>,
+L<des_modes(7)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b169e8a89c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDR.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_ADDR, BIO_ADDR_new, BIO_ADDR_clear, BIO_ADDR_free, BIO_ADDR_rawmake,
+BIO_ADDR_family, BIO_ADDR_rawaddress, BIO_ADDR_rawport,
+BIO_ADDR_hostname_string, BIO_ADDR_service_string,
+BIO_ADDR_path_string - BIO_ADDR routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ typedef union bio_addr_st BIO_ADDR;
+
+ BIO_ADDR *BIO_ADDR_new(void);
+ void BIO_ADDR_free(BIO_ADDR *);
+ void BIO_ADDR_clear(BIO_ADDR *ap);
+ int BIO_ADDR_rawmake(BIO_ADDR *ap, int family,
+                      const void *where, size_t wherelen, unsigned short port);
+ int BIO_ADDR_family(const BIO_ADDR *ap);
+ int BIO_ADDR_rawaddress(const BIO_ADDR *ap, void *p, size_t *l);
+ unsigned short BIO_ADDR_rawport(const BIO_ADDR *ap);
+ char *BIO_ADDR_hostname_string(const BIO_ADDR *ap, int numeric);
+ char *BIO_ADDR_service_string(const BIO_ADDR *ap, int numeric);
+ char *BIO_ADDR_path_string(const BIO_ADDR *ap);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<BIO_ADDR> type is a wrapper around all types of socket
+addresses that OpenSSL deals with, currently transparently
+supporting AF_INET, AF_INET6 and AF_UNIX according to what's
+available on the platform at hand.
+
+BIO_ADDR_new() creates a new unfilled B<BIO_ADDR>, to be used
+with routines that will fill it with information, such as
+BIO_accept_ex().
+
+BIO_ADDR_free() frees a B<BIO_ADDR> created with BIO_ADDR_new().
+
+BIO_ADDR_clear() clears any data held within the provided B<BIO_ADDR> and sets
+it back to an uninitialised state.
+
+BIO_ADDR_rawmake() takes a protocol B<family>, an byte array of
+size B<wherelen> with an address in network byte order pointed at
+by B<where> and a port number in network byte order in B<port> (except
+for the B<AF_UNIX> protocol family, where B<port> is meaningless and
+therefore ignored) and populates the given B<BIO_ADDR> with them.
+In case this creates a B<AF_UNIX> B<BIO_ADDR>, B<wherelen> is expected
+to be the length of the path string (not including the terminating
+NUL, such as the result of a call to strlen()).
+I<Read on about the addresses in L</RAW ADDRESSES> below>.
+
+BIO_ADDR_family() returns the protocol family of the given
+B<BIO_ADDR>.  The possible non-error results are one of the
+constants AF_INET, AF_INET6 and AF_UNIX. It will also return AF_UNSPEC if the
+BIO_ADDR has not been initialised.
+
+BIO_ADDR_rawaddress() will write the raw address of the given
+B<BIO_ADDR> in the area pointed at by B<p> if B<p> is non-NULL,
+and will set B<*l> to be the amount of bytes the raw address
+takes up if B<l> is non-NULL.
+A technique to only find out the size of the address is a call
+with B<p> set to B<NULL>.  The raw address will be in network byte
+order, most significant byte first.
+In case this is a B<AF_UNIX> B<BIO_ADDR>, B<l> gets the length of the
+path string (not including the terminating NUL, such as the result of
+a call to strlen()).
+I<Read on about the addresses in L</RAW ADDRESSES> below>.
+
+BIO_ADDR_rawport() returns the raw port of the given B<BIO_ADDR>.
+The raw port will be in network byte order.
+
+BIO_ADDR_hostname_string() returns a character string with the
+hostname of the given B<BIO_ADDR>.  If B<numeric> is 1, the string
+will contain the numerical form of the address.  This only works for
+B<BIO_ADDR> of the protocol families AF_INET and AF_INET6.  The
+returned string has been allocated on the heap and must be freed
+with OPENSSL_free().
+
+BIO_ADDR_service_string() returns a character string with the
+service name of the port of the given B<BIO_ADDR>.  If B<numeric>
+is 1, the string will contain the port number.  This only works
+for B<BIO_ADDR> of the protocol families AF_INET and AF_INET6.  The
+returned string has been allocated on the heap and must be freed
+with OPENSSL_free().
+
+BIO_ADDR_path_string() returns a character string with the path
+of the given B<BIO_ADDR>.  This only works for B<BIO_ADDR> of the
+protocol family AF_UNIX.  The returned string has been allocated
+on the heap and must be freed with OPENSSL_free().
+
+=head1 RAW ADDRESSES
+
+Both BIO_ADDR_rawmake() and BIO_ADDR_rawaddress() take a pointer to a
+network byte order address of a specific site.  Internally, those are
+treated as a pointer to B<struct in_addr> (for B<AF_INET>), B<struct
+in6_addr> (for B<AF_INET6>) or B<char *> (for B<AF_UNIX>), all
+depending on the protocol family the address is for.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+The string producing functions BIO_ADDR_hostname_string(),
+BIO_ADDR_service_string() and BIO_ADDR_path_string() will
+return B<NULL> on error and leave an error indication on the
+OpenSSL error stack.
+
+All other functions described here return 0 or B<NULL> when the
+information they should return isn't available.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_connect(3)>, L<BIO_s_connect(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ca6454abbcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ADDRINFO.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_lookup_type,
+BIO_ADDRINFO, BIO_ADDRINFO_next, BIO_ADDRINFO_free,
+BIO_ADDRINFO_family, BIO_ADDRINFO_socktype, BIO_ADDRINFO_protocol,
+BIO_ADDRINFO_address,
+BIO_lookup_ex,
+BIO_lookup
+- BIO_ADDRINFO type and routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ typedef union bio_addrinfo_st BIO_ADDRINFO;
+
+ enum BIO_lookup_type {
+     BIO_LOOKUP_CLIENT, BIO_LOOKUP_SERVER
+ };
+
+ int BIO_lookup_ex(const char *host, const char *service, int lookup_type,
+                   int family, int socktype, int protocol, BIO_ADDRINFO **res);
+ int BIO_lookup(const char *node, const char *service,
+                enum BIO_lookup_type lookup_type,
+                int family, int socktype, BIO_ADDRINFO **res);
+
+ const BIO_ADDRINFO *BIO_ADDRINFO_next(const BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+ int BIO_ADDRINFO_family(const BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+ int BIO_ADDRINFO_socktype(const BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+ int BIO_ADDRINFO_protocol(const BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+ const BIO_ADDR *BIO_ADDRINFO_address(const BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+ void BIO_ADDRINFO_free(BIO_ADDRINFO *bai);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<BIO_ADDRINFO> type is a wrapper for address information
+types provided on your platform.
+
+B<BIO_ADDRINFO> normally forms a chain of several that can be
+picked at one by one.
+
+BIO_lookup_ex() looks up a specified B<host> and B<service>, and
+uses B<lookup_type> to determine what the default address should
+be if B<host> is B<NULL>. B<family>, B<socktype> and B<protocol> are used to
+determine what protocol family, socket type and protocol should be used for
+the lookup.  B<family> can be any of AF_INET, AF_INET6, AF_UNIX and
+AF_UNSPEC. B<socktype> can be SOCK_STREAM, SOCK_DGRAM or 0. Specifying 0
+indicates that any type can be used. B<protocol> specifies a protocol such as
+IPPROTO_TCP, IPPROTO_UDP or IPPORTO_SCTP. If set to 0 than any protocol can be
+used. B<res> points at a pointer to hold the start of a B<BIO_ADDRINFO>
+chain.
+
+For the family B<AF_UNIX>, BIO_lookup_ex() will ignore the B<service>
+parameter and expects the B<node> parameter to hold the path to the
+socket file.
+
+BIO_lookup() does the same as BIO_lookup_ex() but does not provide the ability
+to select based on the protocol (any protocol may be returned).
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_family() returns the family of the given
+B<BIO_ADDRINFO>.  The result will be one of the constants
+AF_INET, AF_INET6 and AF_UNIX.
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_socktype() returns the socket type of the given
+B<BIO_ADDRINFO>.  The result will be one of the constants
+SOCK_STREAM and SOCK_DGRAM.
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_protocol() returns the protocol id of the given
+B<BIO_ADDRINFO>.  The result will be one of the constants
+IPPROTO_TCP and IPPROTO_UDP.
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_address() returns the underlying B<BIO_ADDR>
+of the given B<BIO_ADDRINFO>.
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_next() returns the next B<BIO_ADDRINFO> in the chain
+from the given one.
+
+BIO_ADDRINFO_free() frees the chain of B<BIO_ADDRINFO> starting
+with the given one.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_lookup_ex() and BIO_lookup() return 1 on success and 0 when an error
+occurred, and will leave an error indication on the OpenSSL error stack in that
+case.
+
+All other functions described here return 0 or B<NULL> when the
+information they should return isn't available.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The BIO_lookup_ex() implementation uses the platform provided getaddrinfo()
+function. On Linux it is known that specifying 0 for the protocol will not
+return any SCTP based addresses when calling getaddrinfo(). Therefore if an SCTP
+address is required then the B<protocol> parameter to BIO_lookup_ex() should be
+explicitly set to IPPROTO_SCTP. The same may be true on other platforms.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The BIO_lookup_ex() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..454832e7e032
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_connect.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_socket, BIO_bind, BIO_connect, BIO_listen, BIO_accept_ex, BIO_closesocket - BIO
+socket communication setup routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ int BIO_socket(int domain, int socktype, int protocol, int options);
+ int BIO_bind(int sock, const BIO_ADDR *addr, int options);
+ int BIO_connect(int sock, const BIO_ADDR *addr, int options);
+ int BIO_listen(int sock, const BIO_ADDR *addr, int options);
+ int BIO_accept_ex(int accept_sock, BIO_ADDR *peer, int options);
+ int BIO_closesocket(int sock);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_socket() creates a socket in the domain B<domain>, of type
+B<socktype> and B<protocol>.  Socket B<options> are currently unused,
+but is present for future use.
+
+BIO_bind() binds the source address and service to a socket and
+may be useful before calling BIO_connect().  The options may include
+B<BIO_SOCK_REUSADDR>, which is described in L</FLAGS> below.
+
+BIO_connect() connects B<sock> to the address and service given by
+B<addr>.  Connection B<options> may be zero or any combination of
+B<BIO_SOCK_KEEPALIVE>, B<BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK> and B<BIO_SOCK_NODELAY>.
+The flags are described in L</FLAGS> below.
+
+BIO_listen() has B<sock> start listening on the address and service
+given by B<addr>.  Connection B<options> may be zero or any
+combination of B<BIO_SOCK_KEEPALIVE>, B<BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK>,
+B<BIO_SOCK_NODELAY>, B<BIO_SOCK_REUSEADDR> and B<BIO_SOCK_V6_ONLY>.
+The flags are described in L</FLAGS> below.
+
+BIO_accept_ex() waits for an incoming connections on the given
+socket B<accept_sock>.  When it gets a connection, the address and
+port of the peer gets stored in B<peer> if that one is non-NULL.
+Accept B<options> may be zero or B<BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK>, and is applied
+on the accepted socket.  The flags are described in L</FLAGS> below.
+
+BIO_closesocket() closes B<sock>.
+
+=head1 FLAGS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item BIO_SOCK_KEEPALIVE
+
+Enables regular sending of keep-alive messages.
+
+=item BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK
+
+Sets the socket to non-blocking mode.
+
+=item BIO_SOCK_NODELAY
+
+Corresponds to B<TCP_NODELAY>, and disables the Nagle algorithm.  With
+this set, any data will be sent as soon as possible instead of being
+buffered until there's enough for the socket to send out in one go.
+
+=item BIO_SOCK_REUSEADDR
+
+Try to reuse the address and port combination for a recently closed
+port.
+
+=item BIO_SOCK_V6_ONLY
+
+When creating an IPv6 socket, make it only listen for IPv6 addresses
+and not IPv4 addresses mapped to IPv6.
+
+=back
+
+These flags are bit flags, so they are to be combined with the
+C<|> operator, for example:
+
+ BIO_connect(sock, addr, BIO_SOCK_KEEPALIVE | BIO_SOCK_NONBLOCK);
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_socket() returns the socket number on success or B<INVALID_SOCKET>
+(-1) on error.  When an error has occurred, the OpenSSL error stack
+will hold the error data and errno has the system error.
+
+BIO_bind(), BIO_connect() and BIO_listen() return 1 on success or 0 on error.
+When an error has occurred, the OpenSSL error stack will hold the error
+data and errno has the system error.
+
+BIO_accept_ex() returns the accepted socket on success or
+B<INVALID_SOCKET> (-1) on error.  When an error has occurred, the
+OpenSSL error stack will hold the error data and errno has the system
+error.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BIO_gethostname(), BIO_get_port(), BIO_get_host_ip(),
+BIO_get_accept_socket() and BIO_accept() were deprecated in
+OpenSSL 1.1.0.  Use the functions described above instead.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_ADDR(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..60cd10883b54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_ctrl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_ctrl, BIO_callback_ctrl, BIO_ptr_ctrl, BIO_int_ctrl, BIO_reset,
+BIO_seek, BIO_tell, BIO_flush, BIO_eof, BIO_set_close, BIO_get_close,
+BIO_pending, BIO_wpending, BIO_ctrl_pending, BIO_ctrl_wpending,
+BIO_get_info_callback, BIO_set_info_callback, BIO_info_cb
+- BIO control operations
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ typedef int BIO_info_cb(BIO *b, int state, int res);
+
+ long BIO_ctrl(BIO *bp, int cmd, long larg, void *parg);
+ long BIO_callback_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, BIO_info_cb *cb);
+ char *BIO_ptr_ctrl(BIO *bp, int cmd, long larg);
+ long BIO_int_ctrl(BIO *bp, int cmd, long larg, int iarg);
+
+ int BIO_reset(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_seek(BIO *b, int ofs);
+ int BIO_tell(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_flush(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_eof(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_set_close(BIO *b, long flag);
+ int BIO_get_close(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_pending(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_wpending(BIO *b);
+ size_t BIO_ctrl_pending(BIO *b);
+ size_t BIO_ctrl_wpending(BIO *b);
+
+ int BIO_get_info_callback(BIO *b, BIO_info_cb **cbp);
+ int BIO_set_info_callback(BIO *b, BIO_info_cb *cb);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_ctrl(), BIO_callback_ctrl(), BIO_ptr_ctrl() and BIO_int_ctrl()
+are BIO "control" operations taking arguments of various types.
+These functions are not normally called directly, various macros
+are used instead. The standard macros are described below, macros
+specific to a particular type of BIO are described in the specific
+BIOs manual page as well as any special features of the standard
+calls.
+
+BIO_reset() typically resets a BIO to some initial state, in the case
+of file related BIOs for example it rewinds the file pointer to the
+start of the file.
+
+BIO_seek() resets a file related BIO's (that is file descriptor and
+FILE BIOs) file position pointer to B<ofs> bytes from start of file.
+
+BIO_tell() returns the current file position of a file related BIO.
+
+BIO_flush() normally writes out any internally buffered data, in some
+cases it is used to signal EOF and that no more data will be written.
+
+BIO_eof() returns 1 if the BIO has read EOF, the precise meaning of
+"EOF" varies according to the BIO type.
+
+BIO_set_close() sets the BIO B<b> close flag to B<flag>. B<flag> can
+take the value BIO_CLOSE or BIO_NOCLOSE. Typically BIO_CLOSE is used
+in a source/sink BIO to indicate that the underlying I/O stream should
+be closed when the BIO is freed.
+
+BIO_get_close() returns the BIOs close flag.
+
+BIO_pending(), BIO_ctrl_pending(), BIO_wpending() and BIO_ctrl_wpending()
+return the number of pending characters in the BIOs read and write buffers.
+Not all BIOs support these calls. BIO_ctrl_pending() and BIO_ctrl_wpending()
+return a size_t type and are functions, BIO_pending() and BIO_wpending() are
+macros which call BIO_ctrl().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_reset() normally returns 1 for success and 0 or -1 for failure. File
+BIOs are an exception, they return 0 for success and -1 for failure.
+
+BIO_seek() and BIO_tell() both return the current file position on success
+and -1 for failure, except file BIOs which for BIO_seek() always return 0
+for success and -1 for failure.
+
+BIO_flush() returns 1 for success and 0 or -1 for failure.
+
+BIO_eof() returns 1 if EOF has been reached 0 otherwise.
+
+BIO_set_close() always returns 1.
+
+BIO_get_close() returns the close flag value: BIO_CLOSE or BIO_NOCLOSE.
+
+BIO_pending(), BIO_ctrl_pending(), BIO_wpending() and BIO_ctrl_wpending()
+return the amount of pending data.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+BIO_flush(), because it can write data may return 0 or -1 indicating
+that the call should be retried later in a similar manner to BIO_write_ex().
+The BIO_should_retry() call should be used and appropriate action taken
+is the call fails.
+
+The return values of BIO_pending() and BIO_wpending() may not reliably
+determine the amount of pending data in all cases. For example in the
+case of a file BIO some data may be available in the FILE structures
+internal buffers but it is not possible to determine this in a
+portably way. For other types of BIO they may not be supported.
+
+Filter BIOs if they do not internally handle a particular BIO_ctrl()
+operation usually pass the operation to the next BIO in the chain.
+This often means there is no need to locate the required BIO for
+a particular operation, it can be called on a chain and it will
+be automatically passed to the relevant BIO. However this can cause
+unexpected results: for example no current filter BIOs implement
+BIO_seek(), but this may still succeed if the chain ends in a FILE
+or file descriptor BIO.
+
+Source/sink BIOs return an 0 if they do not recognize the BIO_ctrl()
+operation.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Some of the return values are ambiguous and care should be taken. In
+particular a return value of 0 can be returned if an operation is not
+supported, if an error occurred, if EOF has not been reached and in
+the case of BIO_seek() on a file BIO for a successful operation.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_base64.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_base64.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5097c2849ba1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_base64.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_f_base64 - base64 BIO filter
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment multiple includes
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+ #include <openssl/evp.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_base64(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_base64() returns the base64 BIO method. This is a filter
+BIO that base64 encodes any data written through it and decodes
+any data read through it.
+
+Base64 BIOs do not support BIO_gets() or BIO_puts().
+
+BIO_flush() on a base64 BIO that is being written through is
+used to signal that no more data is to be encoded: this is used
+to flush the final block through the BIO.
+
+The flag BIO_FLAGS_BASE64_NO_NL can be set with BIO_set_flags()
+to encode the data all on one line or expect the data to be all
+on one line.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Because of the format of base64 encoding the end of the encoded
+block cannot always be reliably determined.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_base64() returns the base64 BIO method.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Base64 encode the string "Hello World\n" and write the result
+to standard output:
+
+ BIO *bio, *b64;
+ char message[] = "Hello World \n";
+
+ b64 = BIO_new(BIO_f_base64());
+ bio = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ BIO_push(b64, bio);
+ BIO_write(b64, message, strlen(message));
+ BIO_flush(b64);
+
+ BIO_free_all(b64);
+
+Read Base64 encoded data from standard input and write the decoded
+data to standard output:
+
+ BIO *bio, *b64, *bio_out;
+ char inbuf[512];
+ int inlen;
+
+ b64 = BIO_new(BIO_f_base64());
+ bio = BIO_new_fp(stdin, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ bio_out = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ BIO_push(b64, bio);
+ while ((inlen = BIO_read(b64, inbuf, 512)) > 0)
+     BIO_write(bio_out, inbuf, inlen);
+
+ BIO_flush(bio_out);
+ BIO_free_all(b64);
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The ambiguity of EOF in base64 encoded data can cause additional
+data following the base64 encoded block to be misinterpreted.
+
+There should be some way of specifying a test that the BIO can perform
+to reliably determine EOF (for example a MIME boundary).
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_buffer.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_buffer.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ceaaa3c0343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_buffer.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_get_buffer_num_lines,
+BIO_set_read_buffer_size,
+BIO_set_write_buffer_size,
+BIO_set_buffer_size,
+BIO_set_buffer_read_data,
+BIO_f_buffer
+- buffering BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_buffer(void);
+
+ long BIO_get_buffer_num_lines(BIO *b);
+ long BIO_set_read_buffer_size(BIO *b, long size);
+ long BIO_set_write_buffer_size(BIO *b, long size);
+ long BIO_set_buffer_size(BIO *b, long size);
+ long BIO_set_buffer_read_data(BIO *b, void *buf, long num);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_buffer() returns the buffering BIO method.
+
+Data written to a buffering BIO is buffered and periodically written
+to the next BIO in the chain. Data read from a buffering BIO comes from
+an internal buffer which is filled from the next BIO in the chain.
+Both BIO_gets() and BIO_puts() are supported.
+
+Calling BIO_reset() on a buffering BIO clears any buffered data.
+
+BIO_get_buffer_num_lines() returns the number of lines currently buffered.
+
+BIO_set_read_buffer_size(), BIO_set_write_buffer_size() and BIO_set_buffer_size()
+set the read, write or both read and write buffer sizes to B<size>. The initial
+buffer size is DEFAULT_BUFFER_SIZE, currently 4096. Any attempt to reduce the
+buffer size below DEFAULT_BUFFER_SIZE is ignored. Any buffered data is cleared
+when the buffer is resized.
+
+BIO_set_buffer_read_data() clears the read buffer and fills it with B<num>
+bytes of B<buf>. If B<num> is larger than the current buffer size the buffer
+is expanded.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+These functions, other than BIO_f_buffer(), are implemented as macros.
+
+Buffering BIOs implement BIO_gets() by using BIO_read_ex() operations on the
+next BIO in the chain. By prepending a buffering BIO to a chain it is therefore
+possible to provide BIO_gets() functionality if the following BIOs do not
+support it (for example SSL BIOs).
+
+Data is only written to the next BIO in the chain when the write buffer fills
+or when BIO_flush() is called. It is therefore important to call BIO_flush()
+whenever any pending data should be written such as when removing a buffering
+BIO using BIO_pop(). BIO_flush() may need to be retried if the ultimate
+source/sink BIO is non blocking.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_buffer() returns the buffering BIO method.
+
+BIO_get_buffer_num_lines() returns the number of lines buffered (may be 0).
+
+BIO_set_read_buffer_size(), BIO_set_write_buffer_size() and BIO_set_buffer_size()
+return 1 if the buffer was successfully resized or 0 for failure.
+
+BIO_set_buffer_read_data() returns 1 if the data was set correctly or 0 if
+there was an error.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio(7)>,
+L<BIO_reset(3)>,
+L<BIO_flush(3)>,
+L<BIO_pop(3)>,
+L<BIO_ctrl(3)>.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_cipher.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_cipher.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..65c3d0b1f52e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_cipher.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_f_cipher, BIO_set_cipher, BIO_get_cipher_status, BIO_get_cipher_ctx - cipher BIO filter
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment multiple includes
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+ #include <openssl/evp.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_cipher(void);
+ void BIO_set_cipher(BIO *b, const EVP_CIPHER *cipher,
+                     unsigned char *key, unsigned char *iv, int enc);
+ int BIO_get_cipher_status(BIO *b)
+ int BIO_get_cipher_ctx(BIO *b, EVP_CIPHER_CTX **pctx)
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_cipher() returns the cipher BIO method. This is a filter
+BIO that encrypts any data written through it, and decrypts any data
+read from it. It is a BIO wrapper for the cipher routines
+EVP_CipherInit(), EVP_CipherUpdate() and EVP_CipherFinal().
+
+Cipher BIOs do not support BIO_gets() or BIO_puts().
+
+BIO_flush() on an encryption BIO that is being written through is
+used to signal that no more data is to be encrypted: this is used
+to flush and possibly pad the final block through the BIO.
+
+BIO_set_cipher() sets the cipher of BIO B<b> to B<cipher> using key B<key>
+and IV B<iv>. B<enc> should be set to 1 for encryption and zero for
+decryption.
+
+When reading from an encryption BIO the final block is automatically
+decrypted and checked when EOF is detected. BIO_get_cipher_status()
+is a BIO_ctrl() macro which can be called to determine whether the
+decryption operation was successful.
+
+BIO_get_cipher_ctx() is a BIO_ctrl() macro which retrieves the internal
+BIO cipher context. The retrieved context can be used in conjunction
+with the standard cipher routines to set it up. This is useful when
+BIO_set_cipher() is not flexible enough for the applications needs.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+When encrypting BIO_flush() B<must> be called to flush the final block
+through the BIO. If it is not then the final block will fail a subsequent
+decrypt.
+
+When decrypting an error on the final block is signaled by a zero
+return value from the read operation. A successful decrypt followed
+by EOF will also return zero for the final read. BIO_get_cipher_status()
+should be called to determine if the decrypt was successful.
+
+As always, if BIO_gets() or BIO_puts() support is needed then it can
+be achieved by preceding the cipher BIO with a buffering BIO.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_cipher() returns the cipher BIO method.
+
+BIO_set_cipher() does not return a value.
+
+BIO_get_cipher_status() returns 1 for a successful decrypt and 0
+for failure.
+
+BIO_get_cipher_ctx() currently always returns 1.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_md.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_md.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7074202a5676
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_md.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_f_md, BIO_set_md, BIO_get_md, BIO_get_md_ctx - message digest BIO filter
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment multiple includes
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+ #include <openssl/evp.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_md(void);
+ int BIO_set_md(BIO *b, EVP_MD *md);
+ int BIO_get_md(BIO *b, EVP_MD **mdp);
+ int BIO_get_md_ctx(BIO *b, EVP_MD_CTX **mdcp);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_md() returns the message digest BIO method. This is a filter
+BIO that digests any data passed through it, it is a BIO wrapper
+for the digest routines EVP_DigestInit(), EVP_DigestUpdate()
+and EVP_DigestFinal().
+
+Any data written or read through a digest BIO using BIO_read_ex() and
+BIO_write_ex() is digested.
+
+BIO_gets(), if its B<size> parameter is large enough finishes the
+digest calculation and returns the digest value. BIO_puts() is
+not supported.
+
+BIO_reset() reinitialises a digest BIO.
+
+BIO_set_md() sets the message digest of BIO B<b> to B<md>: this
+must be called to initialize a digest BIO before any data is
+passed through it. It is a BIO_ctrl() macro.
+
+BIO_get_md() places the a pointer to the digest BIOs digest method
+in B<mdp>, it is a BIO_ctrl() macro.
+
+BIO_get_md_ctx() returns the digest BIOs context into B<mdcp>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The context returned by BIO_get_md_ctx() can be used in calls
+to EVP_DigestFinal() and also the signature routines EVP_SignFinal()
+and EVP_VerifyFinal().
+
+The context returned by BIO_get_md_ctx() is an internal context
+structure. Changes made to this context will affect the digest
+BIO itself and the context pointer will become invalid when the digest
+BIO is freed.
+
+After the digest has been retrieved from a digest BIO it must be
+reinitialized by calling BIO_reset(), or BIO_set_md() before any more
+data is passed through it.
+
+If an application needs to call BIO_gets() or BIO_puts() through
+a chain containing digest BIOs then this can be done by prepending
+a buffering BIO.
+
+Calling BIO_get_md_ctx() will return the context and initialize the BIO
+state. This allows applications to initialize the context externally
+if the standard calls such as BIO_set_md() are not sufficiently flexible.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_md() returns the digest BIO method.
+
+BIO_set_md(), BIO_get_md() and BIO_md_ctx() return 1 for success and
+0 for failure.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+The following example creates a BIO chain containing an SHA1 and MD5
+digest BIO and passes the string "Hello World" through it. Error
+checking has been omitted for clarity.
+
+ BIO *bio, *mdtmp;
+ char message[] = "Hello World";
+
+ bio = BIO_new(BIO_s_null());
+ mdtmp = BIO_new(BIO_f_md());
+ BIO_set_md(mdtmp, EVP_sha1());
+ /*
+  * For BIO_push() we want to append the sink BIO and keep a note of
+  * the start of the chain.
+  */
+ bio = BIO_push(mdtmp, bio);
+ mdtmp = BIO_new(BIO_f_md());
+ BIO_set_md(mdtmp, EVP_md5());
+ bio = BIO_push(mdtmp, bio);
+ /* Note: mdtmp can now be discarded */
+ BIO_write(bio, message, strlen(message));
+
+The next example digests data by reading through a chain instead:
+
+ BIO *bio, *mdtmp;
+ char buf[1024];
+ int rdlen;
+
+ bio = BIO_new_file(file, "rb");
+ mdtmp = BIO_new(BIO_f_md());
+ BIO_set_md(mdtmp, EVP_sha1());
+ bio = BIO_push(mdtmp, bio);
+ mdtmp = BIO_new(BIO_f_md());
+ BIO_set_md(mdtmp, EVP_md5());
+ bio = BIO_push(mdtmp, bio);
+ do {
+     rdlen = BIO_read(bio, buf, sizeof(buf));
+     /* Might want to do something with the data here */
+ } while (rdlen > 0);
+
+This next example retrieves the message digests from a BIO chain and
+outputs them. This could be used with the examples above.
+
+ BIO *mdtmp;
+ unsigned char mdbuf[EVP_MAX_MD_SIZE];
+ int mdlen;
+ int i;
+
+ mdtmp = bio;   /* Assume bio has previously been set up */
+ do {
+     EVP_MD *md;
+
+     mdtmp = BIO_find_type(mdtmp, BIO_TYPE_MD);
+     if (!mdtmp)
+         break;
+     BIO_get_md(mdtmp, &md);
+     printf("%s digest", OBJ_nid2sn(EVP_MD_type(md)));
+     mdlen = BIO_gets(mdtmp, mdbuf, EVP_MAX_MD_SIZE);
+     for (i = 0; i < mdlen; i++) printf(":%02X", mdbuf[i]);
+     printf("\n");
+     mdtmp = BIO_next(mdtmp);
+ } while (mdtmp);
+
+ BIO_free_all(bio);
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The lack of support for BIO_puts() and the non standard behaviour of
+BIO_gets() could be regarded as anomalous. It could be argued that BIO_gets()
+and BIO_puts() should be passed to the next BIO in the chain and digest
+the data passed through and that digests should be retrieved using a
+separate BIO_ctrl() call.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+Before OpenSSL 1.0.0., the call to BIO_get_md_ctx() would only work if the
+BIO was initialized first.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_null.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_null.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..53069b497a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_null.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_f_null - null filter
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_null(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_null() returns the null filter BIO method. This is a filter BIO
+that does nothing.
+
+All requests to a null filter BIO are passed through to the next BIO in
+the chain: this means that a BIO chain containing a null filter BIO
+behaves just as though the BIO was not there.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+As may be apparent a null filter BIO is not particularly useful.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_null() returns the null filter BIO method.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_ssl.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_ssl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e069594fd154
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_f_ssl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_do_handshake,
+BIO_f_ssl, BIO_set_ssl, BIO_get_ssl, BIO_set_ssl_mode,
+BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes,
+BIO_get_num_renegotiates, BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout, BIO_new_ssl,
+BIO_new_ssl_connect, BIO_new_buffer_ssl_connect, BIO_ssl_copy_session_id,
+BIO_ssl_shutdown - SSL BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment multiple includes
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+ #include <openssl/ssl.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_ssl(void);
+
+ long BIO_set_ssl(BIO *b, SSL *ssl, long c);
+ long BIO_get_ssl(BIO *b, SSL **sslp);
+ long BIO_set_ssl_mode(BIO *b, long client);
+ long BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes(BIO *b, long num);
+ long BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout(BIO *b, long seconds);
+ long BIO_get_num_renegotiates(BIO *b);
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_ssl(SSL_CTX *ctx, int client);
+ BIO *BIO_new_ssl_connect(SSL_CTX *ctx);
+ BIO *BIO_new_buffer_ssl_connect(SSL_CTX *ctx);
+ int BIO_ssl_copy_session_id(BIO *to, BIO *from);
+ void BIO_ssl_shutdown(BIO *bio);
+
+ long BIO_do_handshake(BIO *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_f_ssl() returns the SSL BIO method. This is a filter BIO which
+is a wrapper round the OpenSSL SSL routines adding a BIO "flavour" to
+SSL I/O.
+
+I/O performed on an SSL BIO communicates using the SSL protocol with
+the SSLs read and write BIOs. If an SSL connection is not established
+then an attempt is made to establish one on the first I/O call.
+
+If a BIO is appended to an SSL BIO using BIO_push() it is automatically
+used as the SSL BIOs read and write BIOs.
+
+Calling BIO_reset() on an SSL BIO closes down any current SSL connection
+by calling SSL_shutdown(). BIO_reset() is then sent to the next BIO in
+the chain: this will typically disconnect the underlying transport.
+The SSL BIO is then reset to the initial accept or connect state.
+
+If the close flag is set when an SSL BIO is freed then the internal
+SSL structure is also freed using SSL_free().
+
+BIO_set_ssl() sets the internal SSL pointer of BIO B<b> to B<ssl> using
+the close flag B<c>.
+
+BIO_get_ssl() retrieves the SSL pointer of BIO B<b>, it can then be
+manipulated using the standard SSL library functions.
+
+BIO_set_ssl_mode() sets the SSL BIO mode to B<client>. If B<client>
+is 1 client mode is set. If B<client> is 0 server mode is set.
+
+BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes() sets the renegotiate byte count
+to B<num>. When set after every B<num> bytes of I/O (read and write)
+the SSL session is automatically renegotiated. B<num> must be at
+least 512 bytes.
+
+BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout() sets the renegotiate timeout to
+B<seconds>. When the renegotiate timeout elapses the session is
+automatically renegotiated.
+
+BIO_get_num_renegotiates() returns the total number of session
+renegotiations due to I/O or timeout.
+
+BIO_new_ssl() allocates an SSL BIO using SSL_CTX B<ctx> and using
+client mode if B<client> is non zero.
+
+BIO_new_ssl_connect() creates a new BIO chain consisting of an
+SSL BIO (using B<ctx>) followed by a connect BIO.
+
+BIO_new_buffer_ssl_connect() creates a new BIO chain consisting
+of a buffering BIO, an SSL BIO (using B<ctx>) and a connect
+BIO.
+
+BIO_ssl_copy_session_id() copies an SSL session id between
+BIO chains B<from> and B<to>. It does this by locating the
+SSL BIOs in each chain and calling SSL_copy_session_id() on
+the internal SSL pointer.
+
+BIO_ssl_shutdown() closes down an SSL connection on BIO
+chain B<bio>. It does this by locating the SSL BIO in the
+chain and calling SSL_shutdown() on its internal SSL
+pointer.
+
+BIO_do_handshake() attempts to complete an SSL handshake on the
+supplied BIO and establish the SSL connection. It returns 1
+if the connection was established successfully. A zero or negative
+value is returned if the connection could not be established, the
+call BIO_should_retry() should be used for non blocking connect BIOs
+to determine if the call should be retried. If an SSL connection has
+already been established this call has no effect.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+SSL BIOs are exceptional in that if the underlying transport
+is non blocking they can still request a retry in exceptional
+circumstances. Specifically this will happen if a session
+renegotiation takes place during a BIO_read_ex() operation, one
+case where this happens is when step up occurs.
+
+The SSL flag SSL_AUTO_RETRY can be
+set to disable this behaviour. That is when this flag is set
+an SSL BIO using a blocking transport will never request a
+retry.
+
+Since unknown BIO_ctrl() operations are sent through filter
+BIOs the servers name and port can be set using BIO_set_host()
+on the BIO returned by BIO_new_ssl_connect() without having
+to locate the connect BIO first.
+
+Applications do not have to call BIO_do_handshake() but may wish
+to do so to separate the handshake process from other I/O
+processing.
+
+BIO_set_ssl(), BIO_get_ssl(), BIO_set_ssl_mode(),
+BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes(), BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout(),
+BIO_get_num_renegotiates(), and BIO_do_handshake() are implemented as macros.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+This SSL/TLS client example, attempts to retrieve a page from an
+SSL/TLS web server. The I/O routines are identical to those of the
+unencrypted example in L<BIO_s_connect(3)>.
+
+ BIO *sbio, *out;
+ int len;
+ char tmpbuf[1024];
+ SSL_CTX *ctx;
+ SSL *ssl;
+
+ /* XXX Seed the PRNG if needed. */
+
+ ctx = SSL_CTX_new(TLS_client_method());
+
+ /* XXX Set verify paths and mode here. */
+
+ sbio = BIO_new_ssl_connect(ctx);
+ BIO_get_ssl(sbio, &ssl);
+ if (ssl == NULL) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Can't locate SSL pointer\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ /* Don't want any retries */
+ SSL_set_mode(ssl, SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY);
+
+ /* XXX We might want to do other things with ssl here */
+
+ /* An empty host part means the loopback address */
+ BIO_set_conn_hostname(sbio, ":https");
+
+ out = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ if (BIO_do_connect(sbio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error connecting to server\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+ if (BIO_do_handshake(sbio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error establishing SSL connection\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ /* XXX Could examine ssl here to get connection info */
+
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "GET / HTTP/1.0\n\n");
+ for (;;) {
+     len = BIO_read(sbio, tmpbuf, 1024);
+     if (len <= 0)
+         break;
+     BIO_write(out, tmpbuf, len);
+ }
+ BIO_free_all(sbio);
+ BIO_free(out);
+
+Here is a simple server example. It makes use of a buffering
+BIO to allow lines to be read from the SSL BIO using BIO_gets.
+It creates a pseudo web page containing the actual request from
+a client and also echoes the request to standard output.
+
+ BIO *sbio, *bbio, *acpt, *out;
+ int len;
+ char tmpbuf[1024];
+ SSL_CTX *ctx;
+ SSL *ssl;
+
+ /* XXX Seed the PRNG if needed. */
+
+ ctx = SSL_CTX_new(TLS_server_method());
+ if (!SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file(ctx, "server.pem", SSL_FILETYPE_PEM)
+         || !SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(ctx, "server.pem", SSL_FILETYPE_PEM)
+         || !SSL_CTX_check_private_key(ctx)) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error setting up SSL_CTX\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ /* XXX Other things like set verify locations, EDH temp callbacks. */
+
+ /* New SSL BIO setup as server */
+ sbio = BIO_new_ssl(ctx, 0);
+ BIO_get_ssl(sbio, &ssl);
+ if (ssl == NULL) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Can't locate SSL pointer\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ SSL_set_mode(ssl, SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY);
+ bbio = BIO_new(BIO_f_buffer());
+ sbio = BIO_push(bbio, sbio);
+ acpt = BIO_new_accept("4433");
+
+ /*
+  * By doing this when a new connection is established
+  * we automatically have sbio inserted into it. The
+  * BIO chain is now 'swallowed' by the accept BIO and
+  * will be freed when the accept BIO is freed.
+  */
+ BIO_set_accept_bios(acpt, sbio);
+ out = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+
+ /* Setup accept BIO */
+ if (BIO_do_accept(acpt) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error setting up accept BIO\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ /* We only want one connection so remove and free accept BIO */
+ sbio = BIO_pop(acpt);
+ BIO_free_all(acpt);
+
+ if (BIO_do_handshake(sbio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error in SSL handshake\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\nContent-type: text/plain\r\n\r\n");
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "\r\nConnection Established\r\nRequest headers:\r\n");
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "--------------------------------------------------\r\n");
+
+ for (;;) {
+     len = BIO_gets(sbio, tmpbuf, 1024);
+     if (len <= 0)
+         break;
+     BIO_write(sbio, tmpbuf, len);
+     BIO_write(out, tmpbuf, len);
+     /* Look for blank line signifying end of headers*/
+     if (tmpbuf[0] == '\r' || tmpbuf[0] == '\n')
+         break;
+ }
+
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "--------------------------------------------------\r\n");
+ BIO_puts(sbio, "\r\n");
+ BIO_flush(sbio);
+ BIO_free_all(sbio);
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_f_ssl() returns the SSL B<BIO_METHOD> structure.
+
+BIO_set_ssl(), BIO_get_ssl(), BIO_set_ssl_mode(), BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_bytes(),
+BIO_set_ssl_renegotiate_timeout() and BIO_get_num_renegotiates() return 1 on
+success or a value which is less than or equal to 0 if an error occurred.
+
+BIO_new_ssl(), BIO_new_ssl_connect() and BIO_new_buffer_ssl_connect() return
+a valid B<BIO> structure on success or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
+
+BIO_ssl_copy_session_id() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+BIO_do_handshake() returns 1 if the connection was established successfully.
+A zero or negative value is returned if the connection could not be established.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+In OpenSSL before 1.0.0 the BIO_pop() call was handled incorrectly,
+the I/O BIO reference count was incorrectly incremented (instead of
+decremented) and dissociated with the SSL BIO even if the SSL BIO was not
+explicitly being popped (e.g. a pop higher up the chain). Applications which
+included workarounds for this bug (e.g. freeing BIOs more than once) should
+be modified to handle this fix or they may free up an already freed BIO.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_find_type.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_find_type.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b8171942efcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_find_type.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_find_type, BIO_next, BIO_method_type - BIO chain traversal
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ BIO *BIO_find_type(BIO *b, int bio_type);
+ BIO *BIO_next(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_method_type(const BIO *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The BIO_find_type() searches for a BIO of a given type in a chain, starting
+at BIO B<b>. If B<type> is a specific type (such as B<BIO_TYPE_MEM>) then a search
+is made for a BIO of that type. If B<type> is a general type (such as
+B<BIO_TYPE_SOURCE_SINK>) then the next matching BIO of the given general type is
+searched for. BIO_find_type() returns the next matching BIO or NULL if none is
+found.
+
+The following general types are defined:
+B<BIO_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR>, B<BIO_TYPE_FILTER>, and B<BIO_TYPE_SOURCE_SINK>.
+
+For a list of the specific types, see the B<openssl/bio.h> header file.
+
+BIO_next() returns the next BIO in a chain. It can be used to traverse all BIOs
+in a chain or used in conjunction with BIO_find_type() to find all BIOs of a
+certain type.
+
+BIO_method_type() returns the type of a BIO.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_find_type() returns a matching BIO or NULL for no match.
+
+BIO_next() returns the next BIO in a chain.
+
+BIO_method_type() returns the type of the BIO B<b>.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+Traverse a chain looking for digest BIOs:
+
+ BIO *btmp;
+
+ btmp = in_bio; /* in_bio is chain to search through */
+ do {
+     btmp = BIO_find_type(btmp, BIO_TYPE_MD);
+     if (btmp == NULL)
+         break; /* Not found */
+     /* btmp is a digest BIO, do something with it ...*/
+     ...
+
+     btmp = BIO_next(btmp);
+ } while (btmp);
+
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c3137c4c5588
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_data.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_set_data, BIO_get_data, BIO_set_init, BIO_get_init, BIO_set_shutdown,
+BIO_get_shutdown - functions for managing BIO state information
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ void BIO_set_data(BIO *a, void *ptr);
+ void *BIO_get_data(BIO *a);
+ void BIO_set_init(BIO *a, int init);
+ int BIO_get_init(BIO *a);
+ void BIO_set_shutdown(BIO *a, int shut);
+ int BIO_get_shutdown(BIO *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions are mainly useful when implementing a custom BIO.
+
+The BIO_set_data() function associates the custom data pointed to by B<ptr> with
+the BIO. This data can subsequently be retrieved via a call to BIO_get_data().
+This can be used by custom BIOs for storing implementation specific information.
+
+The BIO_set_init() function sets the value of the BIO's "init" flag to indicate
+whether initialisation has been completed for this BIO or not. A non-zero value
+indicates that initialisation is complete, whilst zero indicates that it is not.
+Often initialisation will complete during initial construction of the BIO. For
+some BIOs however, initialisation may not complete until after additional steps
+have occurred (for example through calling custom ctrls). The BIO_get_init()
+function returns the value of the "init" flag.
+
+The BIO_set_shutdown() and BIO_get_shutdown() functions set and get the state of
+this BIO's shutdown (i.e. BIO_CLOSE) flag. If set then the underlying resource
+is also closed when the BIO is freed.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_get_data() returns a pointer to the implementation specific custom data
+associated with this BIO, or NULL if none has been set.
+
+BIO_get_init() returns the state of the BIO's init flag.
+
+BIO_get_shutdown() returns the stat of the BIO's shutdown (i.e. BIO_CLOSE) flag.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio>, L<BIO_meth_new>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_ex_new_index.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_ex_new_index.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e61228f1caea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_get_ex_new_index.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_get_ex_new_index, BIO_set_ex_data, BIO_get_ex_data,
+ENGINE_get_ex_new_index, ENGINE_set_ex_data, ENGINE_get_ex_data,
+UI_get_ex_new_index, UI_set_ex_data, UI_get_ex_data,
+X509_get_ex_new_index, X509_set_ex_data, X509_get_ex_data,
+X509_STORE_get_ex_new_index, X509_STORE_set_ex_data, X509_STORE_get_ex_data,
+X509_STORE_CTX_get_ex_new_index, X509_STORE_CTX_set_ex_data, X509_STORE_CTX_get_ex_data,
+DH_get_ex_new_index, DH_set_ex_data, DH_get_ex_data,
+DSA_get_ex_new_index, DSA_set_ex_data, DSA_get_ex_data,
+ECDH_get_ex_new_index, ECDH_set_ex_data, ECDH_get_ex_data,
+EC_KEY_get_ex_new_index, EC_KEY_set_ex_data, EC_KEY_get_ex_data,
+RSA_get_ex_new_index, RSA_set_ex_data, RSA_get_ex_data
+- application-specific data
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment generic
+
+ #include <openssl/x509.h>
+
+ int TYPE_get_ex_new_index(long argl, void *argp,
+                           CRYPTO_EX_new *new_func,
+                           CRYPTO_EX_dup *dup_func,
+                           CRYPTO_EX_free *free_func);
+
+ int TYPE_set_ex_data(TYPE *d, int idx, void *arg);
+
+ void *TYPE_get_ex_data(TYPE *d, int idx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+In the description here, I<TYPE> is used a placeholder
+for any of the OpenSSL datatypes listed in
+L<CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index(3)>.
+
+These functions handle application-specific data for OpenSSL data
+structures.
+
+TYPE_get_new_ex_index() is a macro that calls CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index()
+with the correct B<index> value.
+
+TYPE_set_ex_data() is a function that calls CRYPTO_set_ex_data() with
+an offset into the opaque exdata part of the TYPE object.
+
+TYPE_get_ex_data() is a function that calls CRYPTO_get_ex_data() with
+an offset into the opaque exdata part of the TYPE object.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+TYPE_get_new_ex_index() returns a new index on success or -1 on error.
+
+TYPE_set_ex_data() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+TYPE_get_ex_data() returns the application data or NULL if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index(3)>.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_meth_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_meth_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a1e72d4fc6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_meth_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_get_new_index,
+BIO_meth_new, BIO_meth_free, BIO_meth_get_read_ex, BIO_meth_set_read_ex,
+BIO_meth_get_write_ex, BIO_meth_set_write_ex, BIO_meth_get_write,
+BIO_meth_set_write, BIO_meth_get_read, BIO_meth_set_read, BIO_meth_get_puts,
+BIO_meth_set_puts, BIO_meth_get_gets, BIO_meth_set_gets, BIO_meth_get_ctrl,
+BIO_meth_set_ctrl, BIO_meth_get_create, BIO_meth_set_create,
+BIO_meth_get_destroy, BIO_meth_set_destroy, BIO_meth_get_callback_ctrl,
+BIO_meth_set_callback_ctrl - Routines to build up BIO methods
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ int BIO_get_new_index(void);
+
+ BIO_METHOD *BIO_meth_new(int type, const char *name);
+
+ void BIO_meth_free(BIO_METHOD *biom);
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_write_ex(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, const char *, size_t,
+                                                size_t *);
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_write(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, const char *, int);
+ int BIO_meth_set_write_ex(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                           int (*bwrite)(BIO *, const char *, size_t, size_t *));
+ int BIO_meth_set_write(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                        int (*write)(BIO *, const char *, int));
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_read_ex(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, char *, size_t, size_t *);
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_read(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, char *, int);
+ int BIO_meth_set_read_ex(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                          int (*bread)(BIO *, char *, size_t, size_t *));
+ int BIO_meth_set_read(BIO_METHOD *biom, int (*read)(BIO *, char *, int));
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_puts(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, const char *);
+ int BIO_meth_set_puts(BIO_METHOD *biom, int (*puts)(BIO *, const char *));
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_gets(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, char *, int);
+ int BIO_meth_set_gets(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                       int (*gets)(BIO *, char *, int));
+
+ long (*BIO_meth_get_ctrl(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, int, long, void *);
+ int BIO_meth_set_ctrl(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                       long (*ctrl)(BIO *, int, long, void *));
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_create(const BIO_METHOD *bion))(BIO *);
+ int BIO_meth_set_create(BIO_METHOD *biom, int (*create)(BIO *));
+
+ int (*BIO_meth_get_destroy(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *);
+ int BIO_meth_set_destroy(BIO_METHOD *biom, int (*destroy)(BIO *));
+
+ long (*BIO_meth_get_callback_ctrl(const BIO_METHOD *biom))(BIO *, int, BIO_info_cb *);
+ int BIO_meth_set_callback_ctrl(BIO_METHOD *biom,
+                                long (*callback_ctrl)(BIO *, int, BIO_info_cb *));
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<BIO_METHOD> type is a structure used for the implementation of new BIO
+types. It provides a set of functions used by OpenSSL for the implementation
+of the various BIO capabilities. See the L<bio> page for more information.
+
+BIO_meth_new() creates a new B<BIO_METHOD> structure. It should be given a
+unique integer B<type> and a string that represents its B<name>.
+Use BIO_get_new_index() to get the value for B<type>.
+
+The set of
+standard OpenSSL provided BIO types is provided in B<bio.h>. Some examples
+include B<BIO_TYPE_BUFFER> and B<BIO_TYPE_CIPHER>. Filter BIOs should have a
+type which have the "filter" bit set (B<BIO_TYPE_FILTER>). Source/sink BIOs
+should have the "source/sink" bit set (B<BIO_TYPE_SOURCE_SINK>). File descriptor
+based BIOs (e.g. socket, fd, connect, accept etc) should additionally have the
+"descriptor" bit set (B<BIO_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR>). See the L<BIO_find_type> page for
+more information.
+
+BIO_meth_free() destroys a B<BIO_METHOD> structure and frees up any memory
+associated with it.
+
+BIO_meth_get_write_ex() and BIO_meth_set_write_ex() get and set the function
+used for writing arbitrary length data to the BIO respectively. This function
+will be called in response to the application calling BIO_write_ex() or
+BIO_write(). The parameters for the function have the same meaning as for
+BIO_write_ex(). Older code may call BIO_meth_get_write() and
+BIO_meth_set_write() instead. Applications should not call both
+BIO_meth_set_write_ex() and BIO_meth_set_write() or call BIO_meth_get_write()
+when the function was set with BIO_meth_set_write_ex().
+
+BIO_meth_get_read_ex() and BIO_meth_set_read_ex() get and set the function used
+for reading arbitrary length data from the BIO respectively. This function will
+be called in response to the application calling BIO_read_ex() or BIO_read().
+The parameters for the function have the same meaning as for BIO_read_ex().
+Older code may call BIO_meth_get_read() and BIO_meth_set_read() instead.
+Applications should not call both BIO_meth_set_read_ex() and BIO_meth_set_read()
+or call BIO_meth_get_read() when the function was set with
+BIO_meth_set_read_ex().
+
+BIO_meth_get_puts() and BIO_meth_set_puts() get and set the function used for
+writing a NULL terminated string to the BIO respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling BIO_puts(). The parameters for
+the function have the same meaning as for BIO_puts().
+
+BIO_meth_get_gets() and BIO_meth_set_gets() get and set the function typically
+used for reading a line of data from the BIO respectively (see the L<BIO_gets(3)>
+page for more information). This function will be called in response to the
+application calling BIO_gets(). The parameters for the function have the same
+meaning as for BIO_gets().
+
+BIO_meth_get_ctrl() and BIO_meth_set_ctrl() get and set the function used for
+processing ctrl messages in the BIO respectively. See the L<BIO_ctrl> page for
+more information. This function will be called in response to the application
+calling BIO_ctrl(). The parameters for the function have the same meaning as for
+BIO_ctrl().
+
+BIO_meth_get_create() and BIO_meth_set_create() get and set the function used
+for creating a new instance of the BIO respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling BIO_new() and passing
+in a pointer to the current BIO_METHOD. The BIO_new() function will allocate the
+memory for the new BIO, and a pointer to this newly allocated structure will
+be passed as a parameter to the function.
+
+BIO_meth_get_destroy() and BIO_meth_set_destroy() get and set the function used
+for destroying an instance of a BIO respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling BIO_free(). A pointer to the BIO
+to be destroyed is passed as a parameter. The destroy function should be used
+for BIO specific clean up. The memory for the BIO itself should not be freed by
+this function.
+
+BIO_meth_get_callback_ctrl() and BIO_meth_set_callback_ctrl() get and set the
+function used for processing callback ctrl messages in the BIO respectively. See
+the L<BIO_callback_ctrl(3)> page for more information. This function will be called
+in response to the application calling BIO_callback_ctrl(). The parameters for
+the function have the same meaning as for BIO_callback_ctrl().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_get_new_index() returns the new BIO type value or -1 if an error occurred.
+
+BIO_meth_new(int type, const char *name) returns a valid B<BIO_METHOD> or NULL
+if an error occurred.
+
+The B<BIO_meth_set> functions return 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+The B<BIO_meth_get> functions return the corresponding function pointers.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio>, L<BIO_find_type>, L<BIO_ctrl>, L<BIO_read_ex>, L<BIO_new>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2712be0dab06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_new, BIO_up_ref, BIO_free, BIO_vfree, BIO_free_all
+- BIO allocation and freeing functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ BIO *  BIO_new(const BIO_METHOD *type);
+ int    BIO_up_ref(BIO *a);
+ int    BIO_free(BIO *a);
+ void   BIO_vfree(BIO *a);
+ void   BIO_free_all(BIO *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The BIO_new() function returns a new BIO using method B<type>.
+
+BIO_up_ref() increments the reference count associated with the BIO object.
+
+BIO_free() frees up a single BIO, BIO_vfree() also frees up a single BIO
+but it does not return a value.
+If B<a> is NULL nothing is done.
+Calling BIO_free() may also have some effect
+on the underlying I/O structure, for example it may close the file being
+referred to under certain circumstances. For more details see the individual
+BIO_METHOD descriptions.
+
+BIO_free_all() frees up an entire BIO chain, it does not halt if an error
+occurs freeing up an individual BIO in the chain.
+If B<a> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_new() returns a newly created BIO or NULL if the call fails.
+
+BIO_up_ref() and BIO_free() return 1 for success and 0 for failure.
+
+BIO_free_all() and BIO_vfree() do not return values.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If BIO_free() is called on a BIO chain it will only free one BIO resulting
+in a memory leak.
+
+Calling BIO_free_all() on a single BIO has the same effect as calling BIO_free()
+on it other than the discarded return value.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BIO_set() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0 as BIO type is now opaque.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+Create a memory BIO:
+
+ BIO *mem = BIO_new(BIO_s_mem());
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new_CMS.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new_CMS.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b06c224f7180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_new_CMS.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_new_CMS - CMS streaming filter BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_CMS(BIO *out, CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_new_CMS() returns a streaming filter BIO chain based on B<cms>. The output
+of the filter is written to B<out>. Any data written to the chain is
+automatically translated to a BER format CMS structure of the appropriate type.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The chain returned by this function behaves like a standard filter BIO. It
+supports non blocking I/O. Content is processed and streamed on the fly and not
+all held in memory at once: so it is possible to encode very large structures.
+After all content has been written through the chain BIO_flush() must be called
+to finalise the structure.
+
+The B<CMS_STREAM> flag must be included in the corresponding B<flags>
+parameter of the B<cms> creation function.
+
+If an application wishes to write additional data to B<out> BIOs should be
+removed from the chain using BIO_pop() and freed with BIO_free() until B<out>
+is reached. If no additional data needs to be written BIO_free_all() can be
+called to free up the whole chain.
+
+Any content written through the filter is used verbatim: no canonical
+translation is performed.
+
+It is possible to chain multiple BIOs to, for example, create a triple wrapped
+signed, enveloped, signed structure. In this case it is the applications
+responsibility to set the inner content type of any outer CMS_ContentInfo
+structures.
+
+Large numbers of small writes through the chain should be avoided as this will
+produce an output consisting of lots of OCTET STRING structures. Prepending
+a BIO_f_buffer() buffering BIO will prevent this.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+There is currently no corresponding inverse BIO: i.e. one which can decode
+a CMS structure on the fly.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_new_CMS() returns a BIO chain when successful or NULL if an error
+occurred. The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>,
+L<CMS_encrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BIO_new_CMS() was added to OpenSSL 1.0.0
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73cb6100d74e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_parse_hostserv.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_hostserv_priorities,
+BIO_parse_hostserv
+- utility routines to parse a standard host and service string
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ enum BIO_hostserv_priorities {
+     BIO_PARSE_PRIO_HOST, BIO_PARSE_PRIO_SERV
+ };
+ int BIO_parse_hostserv(const char *hostserv, char **host, char **service,
+                        enum BIO_hostserv_priorities hostserv_prio);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_parse_hostserv() will parse the information given in B<hostserv>,
+create strings with the host name and service name and give those
+back via B<host> and B<service>.  Those will need to be freed after
+they are used.  B<hostserv_prio> helps determine if B<hostserv> shall
+be interpreted primarily as a host name or a service name in ambiguous
+cases.
+
+The syntax the BIO_parse_hostserv() recognises is:
+
+ host + ':' + service
+ host + ':' + '*'
+ host + ':'
+        ':' + service
+ '*'  + ':' + service
+ host
+ service
+
+The host part can be a name or an IP address.  If it's a IPv6
+address, it MUST be enclosed in brackets, such as '[::1]'.
+
+The service part can  be a service name or its port number.
+
+The returned values will depend on the given B<hostserv> string
+and B<hostserv_prio>, as follows:
+
+ host + ':' + service  => *host = "host", *service = "service"
+ host + ':' + '*'      => *host = "host", *service = NULL
+ host + ':'            => *host = "host", *service = NULL
+        ':' + service  => *host = NULL, *service = "service"
+  '*' + ':' + service  => *host = NULL, *service = "service"
+
+ in case no ':' is present in the string, the result depends on
+ hostserv_prio, as follows:
+
+ when hostserv_prio == BIO_PARSE_PRIO_HOST
+ host                 => *host = "host", *service untouched
+
+ when hostserv_prio == BIO_PARSE_PRIO_SERV
+ service              => *host untouched, *service = "service"
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_parse_hostserv() returns 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_ADDRINFO(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_printf.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_printf.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8045b645cbf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_printf.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_printf, BIO_vprintf, BIO_snprintf, BIO_vsnprintf
+- formatted output to a BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ int BIO_printf(BIO *bio, const char *format, ...)
+ int BIO_vprintf(BIO *bio, const char *format, va_list args)
+
+ int BIO_snprintf(char *buf, size_t n, const char *format, ...)
+ int BIO_vsnprintf(char *buf, size_t n, const char *format, va_list args)
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_printf() is similar to the standard C printf() function, except that
+the output is sent to the specified BIO, B<bio>, rather than standard
+output.  All common format specifiers are supported.
+
+BIO_vprintf() is similar to the vprintf() function found on many platforms,
+the output is sent to the specified BIO, B<bio>, rather than standard
+output.  All common format specifiers are supported. The argument
+list B<args> is a stdarg argument list.
+
+BIO_snprintf() is for platforms that do not have the common snprintf()
+function. It is like sprintf() except that the size parameter, B<n>,
+specifies the size of the output buffer.
+
+BIO_vsnprintf() is to BIO_snprintf() as BIO_vprintf() is to BIO_printf().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+All functions return the number of bytes written, or -1 on error.
+For BIO_snprintf() and BIO_vsnprintf() this includes when the output
+buffer is too small.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_push.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_push.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ce56db9836ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_push.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_push, BIO_pop, BIO_set_next - add and remove BIOs from a chain
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ BIO *BIO_push(BIO *b, BIO *append);
+ BIO *BIO_pop(BIO *b);
+ void BIO_set_next(BIO *b, BIO *next);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The BIO_push() function appends the BIO B<append> to B<b>, it returns
+B<b>.
+
+BIO_pop() removes the BIO B<b> from a chain and returns the next BIO
+in the chain, or NULL if there is no next BIO. The removed BIO then
+becomes a single BIO with no association with the original chain,
+it can thus be freed or attached to a different chain.
+
+BIO_set_next() replaces the existing next BIO in a chain with the BIO pointed to
+by B<next>. The new chain may include some of the same BIOs from the old chain
+or it may be completely different.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The names of these functions are perhaps a little misleading. BIO_push()
+joins two BIO chains whereas BIO_pop() deletes a single BIO from a chain,
+the deleted BIO does not need to be at the end of a chain.
+
+The process of calling BIO_push() and BIO_pop() on a BIO may have additional
+consequences (a control call is made to the affected BIOs) any effects will
+be noted in the descriptions of individual BIOs.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+For these examples suppose B<md1> and B<md2> are digest BIOs, B<b64> is
+a base64 BIO and B<f> is a file BIO.
+
+If the call:
+
+ BIO_push(b64, f);
+
+is made then the new chain will be B<b64-f>. After making the calls
+
+ BIO_push(md2, b64);
+ BIO_push(md1, md2);
+
+the new chain is B<md1-md2-b64-f>. Data written to B<md1> will be digested
+by B<md1> and B<md2>, B<base64> encoded and written to B<f>.
+
+It should be noted that reading causes data to pass in the reverse
+direction, that is data is read from B<f>, base64 B<decoded> and digested
+by B<md1> and B<md2>. If the call:
+
+ BIO_pop(md2);
+
+The call will return B<b64> and the new chain will be B<md1-b64-f> data can
+be written to B<md1> as before.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_push() returns the end of the chain, B<b>.
+
+BIO_pop() returns the next BIO in the chain, or NULL if there is no next
+BIO.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The BIO_set_next() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..270ab533e543
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_read.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_read_ex, BIO_write_ex, BIO_read, BIO_write, BIO_gets, BIO_puts
+- BIO I/O functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ int BIO_read_ex(BIO *b, void *data, size_t dlen, size_t *readbytes);
+ int BIO_write_ex(BIO *b, const void *data, size_t dlen, size_t *written);
+
+ int BIO_read(BIO *b, void *data, int dlen);
+ int BIO_gets(BIO *b, char *buf, int size);
+ int BIO_write(BIO *b, const void *data, int dlen);
+ int BIO_puts(BIO *b, const char *buf);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_read_ex() attempts to read B<dlen> bytes from BIO B<b> and places the data
+in B<data>. If any bytes were successfully read then the number of bytes read is
+stored in B<*readbytes>.
+
+BIO_write_ex() attempts to write B<dlen> bytes from B<data> to BIO B<b>. If
+successful then the number of bytes written is stored in B<*written>.
+
+BIO_read() attempts to read B<len> bytes from BIO B<b> and places
+the data in B<buf>.
+
+BIO_gets() performs the BIOs "gets" operation and places the data
+in B<buf>. Usually this operation will attempt to read a line of data
+from the BIO of maximum length B<size-1>. There are exceptions to this,
+however; for example, BIO_gets() on a digest BIO will calculate and
+return the digest and other BIOs may not support BIO_gets() at all.
+The returned string is always NUL-terminated and the '\n' is preserved
+if present in the input data.
+
+BIO_write() attempts to write B<len> bytes from B<buf> to BIO B<b>.
+
+BIO_puts() attempts to write a NUL-terminated string B<buf> to BIO B<b>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_read_ex() and BIO_write_ex() return 1 if data was successfully read or
+written, and 0 otherwise.
+
+All other functions return either the amount of data successfully read or
+written (if the return value is positive) or that no data was successfully
+read or written if the result is 0 or -1. If the return value is -2 then
+the operation is not implemented in the specific BIO type.  The trailing
+NUL is not included in the length returned by BIO_gets().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+A 0 or -1 return is not necessarily an indication of an error. In
+particular when the source/sink is non-blocking or of a certain type
+it may merely be an indication that no data is currently available and that
+the application should retry the operation later.
+
+One technique sometimes used with blocking sockets is to use a system call
+(such as select(), poll() or equivalent) to determine when data is available
+and then call read() to read the data. The equivalent with BIOs (that is call
+select() on the underlying I/O structure and then call BIO_read() to
+read the data) should B<not> be used because a single call to BIO_read()
+can cause several reads (and writes in the case of SSL BIOs) on the underlying
+I/O structure and may block as a result. Instead select() (or equivalent)
+should be combined with non blocking I/O so successive reads will request
+a retry instead of blocking.
+
+See L<BIO_should_retry(3)> for details of how to
+determine the cause of a retry and other I/O issues.
+
+If the BIO_gets() function is not supported by a BIO then it possible to
+work around this by adding a buffering BIO L<BIO_f_buffer(3)>
+to the chain.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_should_retry(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BIO_gets() on 1.1.0 and older when called on BIO_fd() based BIO does not
+keep the '\n' at the end of the line in the buffer.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..45b864e5e64d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_accept.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_accept, BIO_set_accept_name, BIO_set_accept_port, BIO_get_accept_name,
+BIO_get_accept_port, BIO_new_accept, BIO_set_nbio_accept, BIO_set_accept_bios,
+BIO_get_peer_name, BIO_get_peer_port,
+BIO_get_accept_ip_family, BIO_set_accept_ip_family,
+BIO_set_bind_mode, BIO_get_bind_mode, BIO_do_accept - accept BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_accept(void);
+
+ long BIO_set_accept_name(BIO *b, char *name);
+ char *BIO_get_accept_name(BIO *b);
+
+ long BIO_set_accept_port(BIO *b, char *port);
+ char *BIO_get_accept_port(BIO *b);
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_accept(char *host_port);
+
+ long BIO_set_nbio_accept(BIO *b, int n);
+ long BIO_set_accept_bios(BIO *b, char *bio);
+
+ char *BIO_get_peer_name(BIO *b);
+ char *BIO_get_peer_port(BIO *b);
+ long BIO_get_accept_ip_family(BIO *b);
+ long BIO_set_accept_ip_family(BIO *b, long family);
+
+ long BIO_set_bind_mode(BIO *b, long mode);
+ long BIO_get_bind_mode(BIO *b);
+
+ int BIO_do_accept(BIO *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_accept() returns the accept BIO method. This is a wrapper
+round the platform's TCP/IP socket accept routines.
+
+Using accept BIOs, TCP/IP connections can be accepted and data
+transferred using only BIO routines. In this way any platform
+specific operations are hidden by the BIO abstraction.
+
+Read and write operations on an accept BIO will perform I/O
+on the underlying connection. If no connection is established
+and the port (see below) is set up properly then the BIO
+waits for an incoming connection.
+
+Accept BIOs support BIO_puts() but not BIO_gets().
+
+If the close flag is set on an accept BIO then any active
+connection on that chain is shutdown and the socket closed when
+the BIO is freed.
+
+Calling BIO_reset() on an accept BIO will close any active
+connection and reset the BIO into a state where it awaits another
+incoming connection.
+
+BIO_get_fd() and BIO_set_fd() can be called to retrieve or set
+the accept socket. See L<BIO_s_fd(3)>
+
+BIO_set_accept_name() uses the string B<name> to set the accept
+name. The name is represented as a string of the form "host:port",
+where "host" is the interface to use and "port" is the port.
+The host can be "*" or empty which is interpreted as meaning
+any interface.  If the host is an IPv6 address, it has to be
+enclosed in brackets, for example "[::1]:https".  "port" has the
+same syntax as the port specified in BIO_set_conn_port() for
+connect BIOs, that is it can be a numerical port string or a
+string to lookup using getservbyname() and a string table.
+
+BIO_set_accept_port() uses the string B<port> to set the accept
+port.  "port" has the same syntax as the port specified in
+BIO_set_conn_port() for connect BIOs, that is it can be a numerical
+port string or a string to lookup using getservbyname() and a string
+table.
+
+BIO_new_accept() combines BIO_new() and BIO_set_accept_name() into
+a single call: that is it creates a new accept BIO with port
+B<host_port>.
+
+BIO_set_nbio_accept() sets the accept socket to blocking mode
+(the default) if B<n> is 0 or non blocking mode if B<n> is 1.
+
+BIO_set_accept_bios() can be used to set a chain of BIOs which
+will be duplicated and prepended to the chain when an incoming
+connection is received. This is useful if, for example, a
+buffering or SSL BIO is required for each connection. The
+chain of BIOs must not be freed after this call, they will
+be automatically freed when the accept BIO is freed.
+
+BIO_set_bind_mode() and BIO_get_bind_mode() set and retrieve
+the current bind mode. If B<BIO_BIND_NORMAL> (the default) is set
+then another socket cannot be bound to the same port. If
+B<BIO_BIND_REUSEADDR> is set then other sockets can bind to the
+same port. If B<BIO_BIND_REUSEADDR_IF_UNUSED> is set then and
+attempt is first made to use BIO_BIN_NORMAL, if this fails
+and the port is not in use then a second attempt is made
+using B<BIO_BIND_REUSEADDR>.
+
+BIO_do_accept() serves two functions. When it is first
+called, after the accept BIO has been setup, it will attempt
+to create the accept socket and bind an address to it. Second
+and subsequent calls to BIO_do_accept() will await an incoming
+connection, or request a retry in non blocking mode.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+When an accept BIO is at the end of a chain it will await an
+incoming connection before processing I/O calls. When an accept
+BIO is not at then end of a chain it passes I/O calls to the next
+BIO in the chain.
+
+When a connection is established a new socket BIO is created for
+the connection and appended to the chain. That is the chain is now
+accept->socket. This effectively means that attempting I/O on
+an initial accept socket will await an incoming connection then
+perform I/O on it.
+
+If any additional BIOs have been set using BIO_set_accept_bios()
+then they are placed between the socket and the accept BIO,
+that is the chain will be accept->otherbios->socket.
+
+If a server wishes to process multiple connections (as is normally
+the case) then the accept BIO must be made available for further
+incoming connections. This can be done by waiting for a connection and
+then calling:
+
+ connection = BIO_pop(accept);
+
+After this call B<connection> will contain a BIO for the recently
+established connection and B<accept> will now be a single BIO
+again which can be used to await further incoming connections.
+If no further connections will be accepted the B<accept> can
+be freed using BIO_free().
+
+If only a single connection will be processed it is possible to
+perform I/O using the accept BIO itself. This is often undesirable
+however because the accept BIO will still accept additional incoming
+connections. This can be resolved by using BIO_pop() (see above)
+and freeing up the accept BIO after the initial connection.
+
+If the underlying accept socket is non-blocking and BIO_do_accept() is
+called to await an incoming connection it is possible for
+BIO_should_io_special() with the reason BIO_RR_ACCEPT. If this happens
+then it is an indication that an accept attempt would block: the application
+should take appropriate action to wait until the underlying socket has
+accepted a connection and retry the call.
+
+BIO_set_accept_name(), BIO_get_accept_name(), BIO_set_accept_port(),
+BIO_get_accept_port(), BIO_set_nbio_accept(), BIO_set_accept_bios(),
+BIO_get_peer_name(), BIO_get_peer_port(),
+BIO_get_accept_ip_family(), BIO_set_accept_ip_family(),
+BIO_set_bind_mode(), BIO_get_bind_mode() and BIO_do_accept() are macros.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_do_accept(),
+BIO_set_accept_name(), BIO_set_accept_port(), BIO_set_nbio_accept(),
+BIO_set_accept_bios(), BIO_set_accept_ip_family(), and BIO_set_bind_mode()
+return 1 for success and 0 or -1 for failure.
+
+BIO_get_accept_name() returns the accept name or NULL on error.
+BIO_get_peer_name() returns the peer name or NULL on error.
+
+BIO_get_accept_port() returns the accept port as a string or NULL on error.
+BIO_get_peer_port() returns the peer port as a string or NULL on error.
+BIO_get_accept_ip_family() returns the IP family or -1 on error.
+
+BIO_get_bind_mode() returns the set of B<BIO_BIND> flags, or -1 on failure.
+
+BIO_new_accept() returns a BIO or NULL on error.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+This example accepts two connections on port 4444, sends messages
+down each and finally closes both down.
+
+ BIO *abio, *cbio, *cbio2;
+
+ /* First call to BIO_accept() sets up accept BIO */
+ abio = BIO_new_accept("4444");
+ if (BIO_do_accept(abio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error setting up accept\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+ /* Wait for incoming connection */
+ if (BIO_do_accept(abio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error accepting connection\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+ fprintf(stderr, "Connection 1 established\n");
+
+ /* Retrieve BIO for connection */
+ cbio = BIO_pop(abio);
+ BIO_puts(cbio, "Connection 1: Sending out Data on initial connection\n");
+ fprintf(stderr, "Sent out data on connection 1\n");
+
+ /* Wait for another connection */
+ if (BIO_do_accept(abio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error accepting connection\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+ fprintf(stderr, "Connection 2 established\n");
+
+ /* Close accept BIO to refuse further connections */
+ cbio2 = BIO_pop(abio);
+ BIO_free(abio);
+ BIO_puts(cbio2, "Connection 2: Sending out Data on second\n");
+ fprintf(stderr, "Sent out data on connection 2\n");
+
+ BIO_puts(cbio, "Connection 1: Second connection established\n");
+
+ /* Close the two established connections */
+ BIO_free(cbio);
+ BIO_free(cbio2);
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dfafa351e480
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_bio.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_bio, BIO_make_bio_pair, BIO_destroy_bio_pair, BIO_shutdown_wr,
+BIO_set_write_buf_size, BIO_get_write_buf_size, BIO_new_bio_pair,
+BIO_get_write_guarantee, BIO_ctrl_get_write_guarantee, BIO_get_read_request,
+BIO_ctrl_get_read_request, BIO_ctrl_reset_read_request - BIO pair BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_bio(void);
+
+ int BIO_make_bio_pair(BIO *b1, BIO *b2);
+ int BIO_destroy_bio_pair(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_shutdown_wr(BIO *b);
+
+ int BIO_set_write_buf_size(BIO *b, long size);
+ size_t BIO_get_write_buf_size(BIO *b, long size);
+
+ int BIO_new_bio_pair(BIO **bio1, size_t writebuf1, BIO **bio2, size_t writebuf2);
+
+ int BIO_get_write_guarantee(BIO *b);
+ size_t BIO_ctrl_get_write_guarantee(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_get_read_request(BIO *b);
+ size_t BIO_ctrl_get_read_request(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_ctrl_reset_read_request(BIO *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_bio() returns the method for a BIO pair. A BIO pair is a pair of source/sink
+BIOs where data written to either half of the pair is buffered and can be read from
+the other half. Both halves must usually by handled by the same application thread
+since no locking is done on the internal data structures.
+
+Since BIO chains typically end in a source/sink BIO it is possible to make this
+one half of a BIO pair and have all the data processed by the chain under application
+control.
+
+One typical use of BIO pairs is to place TLS/SSL I/O under application control, this
+can be used when the application wishes to use a non standard transport for
+TLS/SSL or the normal socket routines are inappropriate.
+
+Calls to BIO_read_ex() will read data from the buffer or request a retry if no
+data is available.
+
+Calls to BIO_write_ex() will place data in the buffer or request a retry if the
+buffer is full.
+
+The standard calls BIO_ctrl_pending() and BIO_ctrl_wpending() can be used to
+determine the amount of pending data in the read or write buffer.
+
+BIO_reset() clears any data in the write buffer.
+
+BIO_make_bio_pair() joins two separate BIOs into a connected pair.
+
+BIO_destroy_pair() destroys the association between two connected BIOs. Freeing
+up any half of the pair will automatically destroy the association.
+
+BIO_shutdown_wr() is used to close down a BIO B<b>. After this call no further
+writes on BIO B<b> are allowed (they will return an error). Reads on the other
+half of the pair will return any pending data or EOF when all pending data has
+been read.
+
+BIO_set_write_buf_size() sets the write buffer size of BIO B<b> to B<size>.
+If the size is not initialized a default value is used. This is currently
+17K, sufficient for a maximum size TLS record.
+
+BIO_get_write_buf_size() returns the size of the write buffer.
+
+BIO_new_bio_pair() combines the calls to BIO_new(), BIO_make_bio_pair() and
+BIO_set_write_buf_size() to create a connected pair of BIOs B<bio1>, B<bio2>
+with write buffer sizes B<writebuf1> and B<writebuf2>. If either size is
+zero then the default size is used.  BIO_new_bio_pair() does not check whether
+B<bio1> or B<bio2> do point to some other BIO, the values are overwritten,
+BIO_free() is not called.
+
+BIO_get_write_guarantee() and BIO_ctrl_get_write_guarantee() return the maximum
+length of data that can be currently written to the BIO. Writes larger than this
+value will return a value from BIO_write_ex() less than the amount requested or
+if the buffer is full request a retry. BIO_ctrl_get_write_guarantee() is a
+function whereas BIO_get_write_guarantee() is a macro.
+
+BIO_get_read_request() and BIO_ctrl_get_read_request() return the
+amount of data requested, or the buffer size if it is less, if the
+last read attempt at the other half of the BIO pair failed due to an
+empty buffer.  This can be used to determine how much data should be
+written to the BIO so the next read will succeed: this is most useful
+in TLS/SSL applications where the amount of data read is usually
+meaningful rather than just a buffer size. After a successful read
+this call will return zero.  It also will return zero once new data
+has been written satisfying the read request or part of it.
+Note that BIO_get_read_request() never returns an amount larger
+than that returned by BIO_get_write_guarantee().
+
+BIO_ctrl_reset_read_request() can also be used to reset the value returned by
+BIO_get_read_request() to zero.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Both halves of a BIO pair should be freed. That is even if one half is implicit
+freed due to a BIO_free_all() or SSL_free() call the other half needs to be freed.
+
+When used in bidirectional applications (such as TLS/SSL) care should be taken to
+flush any data in the write buffer. This can be done by calling BIO_pending()
+on the other half of the pair and, if any data is pending, reading it and sending
+it to the underlying transport. This must be done before any normal processing
+(such as calling select() ) due to a request and BIO_should_read() being true.
+
+To see why this is important consider a case where a request is sent using
+BIO_write_ex() and a response read with BIO_read_ex(), this can occur during an
+TLS/SSL handshake for example. BIO_write_ex() will succeed and place data in the
+write buffer. BIO_read_ex() will initially fail and BIO_should_read() will be
+true. If the application then waits for data to be available on the underlying
+transport before flushing the write buffer it will never succeed because the
+request was never sent!
+
+BIO_eof() is true if no data is in the peer BIO and the peer BIO has been
+shutdown.
+
+BIO_make_bio_pair(), BIO_destroy_bio_pair(), BIO_shutdown_wr(),
+BIO_set_write_buf_size(), BIO_get_write_buf_size(),
+BIO_get_write_guarantee(), and BIO_get_read_request() are implemented
+as macros.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_new_bio_pair() returns 1 on success, with the new BIOs available in
+B<bio1> and B<bio2>, or 0 on failure, with NULL pointers stored into the
+locations for B<bio1> and B<bio2>. Check the error stack for more information.
+
+[XXXXX: More return values need to be added here]
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+The BIO pair can be used to have full control over the network access of an
+application. The application can call select() on the socket as required
+without having to go through the SSL-interface.
+
+ BIO *internal_bio, *network_bio;
+
+ ...
+ BIO_new_bio_pair(&internal_bio, 0, &network_bio, 0);
+ SSL_set_bio(ssl, internal_bio, internal_bio);
+ SSL_operations(); /* e.g SSL_read and SSL_write */
+ ...
+
+ application |   TLS-engine
+    |        |
+    +----------> SSL_operations()
+             |     /\    ||
+             |     ||    \/
+             |   BIO-pair (internal_bio)
+             |   BIO-pair (network_bio)
+             |     ||     /\
+             |     \/     ||
+    +-----------< BIO_operations()
+    |        |
+    |        |
+   socket
+
+  ...
+  SSL_free(ssl);                /* implicitly frees internal_bio */
+  BIO_free(network_bio);
+  ...
+
+As the BIO pair will only buffer the data and never directly access the
+connection, it behaves non-blocking and will return as soon as the write
+buffer is full or the read buffer is drained. Then the application has to
+flush the write buffer and/or fill the read buffer.
+
+Use the BIO_ctrl_pending(), to find out whether data is buffered in the BIO
+and must be transferred to the network. Use BIO_ctrl_get_read_request() to
+find out, how many bytes must be written into the buffer before the
+SSL_operation() can successfully be continued.
+
+=head1 WARNING
+
+As the data is buffered, SSL_operation() may return with an ERROR_SSL_WANT_READ
+condition, but there is still data in the write buffer. An application must
+not rely on the error value of SSL_operation() but must assure that the
+write buffer is always flushed first. Otherwise a deadlock may occur as
+the peer might be waiting for the data before being able to continue.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<SSL_set_bio(3)>, L<ssl(7)>, L<bio(7)>,
+L<BIO_should_retry(3)>, L<BIO_read_ex(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d5cc553f2508
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_connect.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_set_conn_address, BIO_get_conn_address,
+BIO_s_connect, BIO_new_connect, BIO_set_conn_hostname, BIO_set_conn_port,
+BIO_set_conn_ip_family, BIO_get_conn_ip_family,
+BIO_get_conn_hostname, BIO_get_conn_port,
+BIO_set_nbio, BIO_do_connect - connect BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD * BIO_s_connect(void);
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_connect(char *name);
+
+ long BIO_set_conn_hostname(BIO *b, char *name);
+ long BIO_set_conn_port(BIO *b, char *port);
+ long BIO_set_conn_address(BIO *b, BIO_ADDR *addr);
+ long BIO_set_conn_ip_family(BIO *b, long family);
+ const char *BIO_get_conn_hostname(BIO *b);
+ const char *BIO_get_conn_port(BIO *b);
+ const BIO_ADDR *BIO_get_conn_address(BIO *b);
+ const long BIO_get_conn_ip_family(BIO *b);
+
+ long BIO_set_nbio(BIO *b, long n);
+
+ int BIO_do_connect(BIO *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_connect() returns the connect BIO method. This is a wrapper
+round the platform's TCP/IP socket connection routines.
+
+Using connect BIOs, TCP/IP connections can be made and data
+transferred using only BIO routines. In this way any platform
+specific operations are hidden by the BIO abstraction.
+
+Read and write operations on a connect BIO will perform I/O
+on the underlying connection. If no connection is established
+and the port and hostname (see below) is set up properly then
+a connection is established first.
+
+Connect BIOs support BIO_puts() but not BIO_gets().
+
+If the close flag is set on a connect BIO then any active
+connection is shutdown and the socket closed when the BIO
+is freed.
+
+Calling BIO_reset() on a connect BIO will close any active
+connection and reset the BIO into a state where it can connect
+to the same host again.
+
+BIO_get_fd() places the underlying socket in B<c> if it is not NULL,
+it also returns the socket . If B<c> is not NULL it should be of
+type (int *).
+
+BIO_set_conn_hostname() uses the string B<name> to set the hostname.
+The hostname can be an IP address; if the address is an IPv6 one, it
+must be enclosed with brackets. The hostname can also include the
+port in the form hostname:port.
+
+BIO_set_conn_port() sets the port to B<port>. B<port> can be the
+numerical form or a string such as "http". A string will be looked
+up first using getservbyname() on the host platform but if that
+fails a standard table of port names will be used. This internal
+list is http, telnet, socks, https, ssl, ftp, and gopher.
+
+BIO_set_conn_address() sets the address and port information using
+a BIO_ADDR(3ssl).
+
+BIO_set_conn_ip_family() sets the IP family.
+
+BIO_get_conn_hostname() returns the hostname of the connect BIO or
+NULL if the BIO is initialized but no hostname is set.
+This return value is an internal pointer which should not be modified.
+
+BIO_get_conn_port() returns the port as a string.
+This return value is an internal pointer which should not be modified.
+
+BIO_get_conn_address() returns the address information as a BIO_ADDR.
+This return value is an internal pointer which should not be modified.
+
+BIO_get_conn_ip_family() returns the IP family of the connect BIO.
+
+BIO_set_nbio() sets the non blocking I/O flag to B<n>. If B<n> is
+zero then blocking I/O is set. If B<n> is 1 then non blocking I/O
+is set. Blocking I/O is the default. The call to BIO_set_nbio()
+should be made before the connection is established because
+non blocking I/O is set during the connect process.
+
+BIO_new_connect() combines BIO_new() and BIO_set_conn_hostname() into
+a single call: that is it creates a new connect BIO with B<name>.
+
+BIO_do_connect() attempts to connect the supplied BIO. It returns 1
+if the connection was established successfully. A zero or negative
+value is returned if the connection could not be established, the
+call BIO_should_retry() should be used for non blocking connect BIOs
+to determine if the call should be retried.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If blocking I/O is set then a non positive return value from any
+I/O call is caused by an error condition, although a zero return
+will normally mean that the connection was closed.
+
+If the port name is supplied as part of the host name then this will
+override any value set with BIO_set_conn_port(). This may be undesirable
+if the application does not wish to allow connection to arbitrary
+ports. This can be avoided by checking for the presence of the ':'
+character in the passed hostname and either indicating an error or
+truncating the string at that point.
+
+The values returned by BIO_get_conn_hostname(), BIO_get_conn_address(),
+and BIO_get_conn_port() are updated when a connection attempt is made.
+Before any connection attempt the values returned are those set by the
+application itself.
+
+Applications do not have to call BIO_do_connect() but may wish to do
+so to separate the connection process from other I/O processing.
+
+If non blocking I/O is set then retries will be requested as appropriate.
+
+It addition to BIO_should_read() and BIO_should_write() it is also
+possible for BIO_should_io_special() to be true during the initial
+connection process with the reason BIO_RR_CONNECT. If this is returned
+then this is an indication that a connection attempt would block,
+the application should then take appropriate action to wait until
+the underlying socket has connected and retry the call.
+
+BIO_set_conn_hostname(), BIO_set_conn_port(), BIO_get_conn_hostname(),
+BIO_set_conn_address(), BIO_get_conn_port(), BIO_get_conn_address(),
+BIO_set_conn_ip_family(), BIO_get_conn_ip_family(),
+BIO_set_nbio(), and BIO_do_connect() are macros.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_connect() returns the connect BIO method.
+
+BIO_get_fd() returns the socket or -1 if the BIO has not
+been initialized.
+
+BIO_set_conn_address(), BIO_set_conn_port(), and BIO_set_conn_ip_family()
+always return 1.
+
+BIO_set_conn_hostname() returns 1 on success and 0 on failure.
+
+BIO_get_conn_address() returns the address information or NULL if none
+was set.
+
+BIO_get_conn_hostname() returns the connected hostname or NULL if
+none was set.
+
+BIO_get_conn_ip_family() returns the address family or -1 if none was set.
+
+BIO_get_conn_port() returns a string representing the connected
+port or NULL if not set.
+
+BIO_set_nbio() always returns 1.
+
+BIO_do_connect() returns 1 if the connection was successfully
+established and 0 or -1 if the connection failed.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+This is example connects to a webserver on the local host and attempts
+to retrieve a page and copy the result to standard output.
+
+
+ BIO *cbio, *out;
+ int len;
+ char tmpbuf[1024];
+
+ cbio = BIO_new_connect("localhost:http");
+ out = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ if (BIO_do_connect(cbio) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error connecting to server\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+ BIO_puts(cbio, "GET / HTTP/1.0\n\n");
+ for (;;) {
+     len = BIO_read(cbio, tmpbuf, 1024);
+     if (len <= 0)
+         break;
+     BIO_write(out, tmpbuf, len);
+ }
+ BIO_free(cbio);
+ BIO_free(out);
+
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_ADDR(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BIO_set_conn_int_port(), BIO_get_conn_int_port(), BIO_set_conn_ip(), and BIO_get_conn_ip()
+were removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+Use BIO_set_conn_address() and BIO_get_conn_address() instead.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_fd.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_fd.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ebf563cf64d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_fd.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_fd, BIO_set_fd, BIO_get_fd, BIO_new_fd - file descriptor BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_fd(void);
+
+ int BIO_set_fd(BIO *b, int fd, int c);
+ int BIO_get_fd(BIO *b, int *c);
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_fd(int fd, int close_flag);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_fd() returns the file descriptor BIO method. This is a wrapper
+round the platforms file descriptor routines such as read() and write().
+
+BIO_read_ex() and BIO_write_ex() read or write the underlying descriptor.
+BIO_puts() is supported but BIO_gets() is not.
+
+If the close flag is set then close() is called on the underlying
+file descriptor when the BIO is freed.
+
+BIO_reset() attempts to change the file pointer to the start of file
+such as by using B<lseek(fd, 0, 0)>.
+
+BIO_seek() sets the file pointer to position B<ofs> from start of file
+such as by using B<lseek(fd, ofs, 0)>.
+
+BIO_tell() returns the current file position such as by calling
+B<lseek(fd, 0, 1)>.
+
+BIO_set_fd() sets the file descriptor of BIO B<b> to B<fd> and the close
+flag to B<c>.
+
+BIO_get_fd() places the file descriptor in B<c> if it is not NULL, it also
+returns the file descriptor.
+
+BIO_new_fd() returns a file descriptor BIO using B<fd> and B<close_flag>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The behaviour of BIO_read_ex() and BIO_write_ex() depends on the behavior of the
+platforms read() and write() calls on the descriptor. If the underlying
+file descriptor is in a non blocking mode then the BIO will behave in the
+manner described in the L<BIO_read_ex(3)> and L<BIO_should_retry(3)>
+manual pages.
+
+File descriptor BIOs should not be used for socket I/O. Use socket BIOs
+instead.
+
+BIO_set_fd() and BIO_get_fd() are implemented as macros.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_fd() returns the file descriptor BIO method.
+
+BIO_set_fd() always returns 1.
+
+BIO_get_fd() returns the file descriptor or -1 if the BIO has not
+been initialized.
+
+BIO_new_fd() returns the newly allocated BIO or NULL is an error
+occurred.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+This is a file descriptor BIO version of "Hello World":
+
+ BIO *out;
+
+ out = BIO_new_fd(fileno(stdout), BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ BIO_printf(out, "Hello World\n");
+ BIO_free(out);
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_seek(3)>, L<BIO_tell(3)>,
+L<BIO_reset(3)>, L<BIO_read_ex(3)>,
+L<BIO_write_ex(3)>, L<BIO_puts(3)>,
+L<BIO_gets(3)>, L<BIO_printf(3)>,
+L<BIO_set_close(3)>, L<BIO_get_close(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..23cdc9b684a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_file.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_file, BIO_new_file, BIO_new_fp, BIO_set_fp, BIO_get_fp,
+BIO_read_filename, BIO_write_filename, BIO_append_filename,
+BIO_rw_filename - FILE bio
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_file(void);
+ BIO *BIO_new_file(const char *filename, const char *mode);
+ BIO *BIO_new_fp(FILE *stream, int flags);
+
+ BIO_set_fp(BIO *b, FILE *fp, int flags);
+ BIO_get_fp(BIO *b, FILE **fpp);
+
+ int BIO_read_filename(BIO *b, char *name)
+ int BIO_write_filename(BIO *b, char *name)
+ int BIO_append_filename(BIO *b, char *name)
+ int BIO_rw_filename(BIO *b, char *name)
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_file() returns the BIO file method. As its name implies it
+is a wrapper round the stdio FILE structure and it is a
+source/sink BIO.
+
+Calls to BIO_read_ex() and BIO_write_ex() read and write data to the
+underlying stream. BIO_gets() and BIO_puts() are supported on file BIOs.
+
+BIO_flush() on a file BIO calls the fflush() function on the wrapped
+stream.
+
+BIO_reset() attempts to change the file pointer to the start of file
+using fseek(stream, 0, 0).
+
+BIO_seek() sets the file pointer to position B<ofs> from start of file
+using fseek(stream, ofs, 0).
+
+BIO_eof() calls feof().
+
+Setting the BIO_CLOSE flag calls fclose() on the stream when the BIO
+is freed.
+
+BIO_new_file() creates a new file BIO with mode B<mode> the meaning
+of B<mode> is the same as the stdio function fopen(). The BIO_CLOSE
+flag is set on the returned BIO.
+
+BIO_new_fp() creates a file BIO wrapping B<stream>. Flags can be:
+BIO_CLOSE, BIO_NOCLOSE (the close flag) BIO_FP_TEXT (sets the underlying
+stream to text mode, default is binary: this only has any effect under
+Win32).
+
+BIO_set_fp() sets the fp of a file BIO to B<fp>. B<flags> has the same
+meaning as in BIO_new_fp(), it is a macro.
+
+BIO_get_fp() retrieves the fp of a file BIO, it is a macro.
+
+BIO_seek() is a macro that sets the position pointer to B<offset> bytes
+from the start of file.
+
+BIO_tell() returns the value of the position pointer.
+
+BIO_read_filename(), BIO_write_filename(), BIO_append_filename() and
+BIO_rw_filename() set the file BIO B<b> to use file B<name> for
+reading, writing, append or read write respectively.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+When wrapping stdout, stdin or stderr the underlying stream should not
+normally be closed so the BIO_NOCLOSE flag should be set.
+
+Because the file BIO calls the underlying stdio functions any quirks
+in stdio behaviour will be mirrored by the corresponding BIO.
+
+On Windows BIO_new_files reserves for the filename argument to be
+UTF-8 encoded. In other words if you have to make it work in multi-
+lingual environment, encode file names in UTF-8.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+File BIO "hello world":
+
+ BIO *bio_out;
+
+ bio_out = BIO_new_fp(stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE);
+ BIO_printf(bio_out, "Hello World\n");
+
+Alternative technique:
+
+ BIO *bio_out;
+
+ bio_out = BIO_new(BIO_s_file());
+ if (bio_out == NULL)
+     /* Error */
+ if (!BIO_set_fp(bio_out, stdout, BIO_NOCLOSE))
+     /* Error */
+ BIO_printf(bio_out, "Hello World\n");
+
+Write to a file:
+
+ BIO *out;
+
+ out = BIO_new_file("filename.txt", "w");
+ if (!out)
+     /* Error */
+ BIO_printf(out, "Hello World\n");
+ BIO_free(out);
+
+Alternative technique:
+
+ BIO *out;
+
+ out = BIO_new(BIO_s_file());
+ if (out == NULL)
+     /* Error */
+ if (!BIO_write_filename(out, "filename.txt"))
+     /* Error */
+ BIO_printf(out, "Hello World\n");
+ BIO_free(out);
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_file() returns the file BIO method.
+
+BIO_new_file() and BIO_new_fp() return a file BIO or NULL if an error
+occurred.
+
+BIO_set_fp() and BIO_get_fp() return 1 for success or 0 for failure
+(although the current implementation never return 0).
+
+BIO_seek() returns the same value as the underlying fseek() function:
+0 for success or -1 for failure.
+
+BIO_tell() returns the current file position.
+
+BIO_read_filename(), BIO_write_filename(), BIO_append_filename() and
+BIO_rw_filename() return 1 for success or 0 for failure.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+BIO_reset() and BIO_seek() are implemented using fseek() on the underlying
+stream. The return value for fseek() is 0 for success or -1 if an error
+occurred this differs from other types of BIO which will typically return
+1 for success and a non positive value if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BIO_seek(3)>, L<BIO_tell(3)>,
+L<BIO_reset(3)>, L<BIO_flush(3)>,
+L<BIO_read_ex(3)>,
+L<BIO_write_ex(3)>, L<BIO_puts(3)>,
+L<BIO_gets(3)>, L<BIO_printf(3)>,
+L<BIO_set_close(3)>, L<BIO_get_close(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_mem.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_mem.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..050d7786a6cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_mem.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_secmem,
+BIO_s_mem, BIO_set_mem_eof_return, BIO_get_mem_data, BIO_set_mem_buf,
+BIO_get_mem_ptr, BIO_new_mem_buf - memory BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_mem(void);
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_secmem(void);
+
+ BIO_set_mem_eof_return(BIO *b, int v)
+ long BIO_get_mem_data(BIO *b, char **pp)
+ BIO_set_mem_buf(BIO *b, BUF_MEM *bm, int c)
+ BIO_get_mem_ptr(BIO *b, BUF_MEM **pp)
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_mem_buf(const void *buf, int len);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_mem() returns the memory BIO method function.
+
+A memory BIO is a source/sink BIO which uses memory for its I/O. Data
+written to a memory BIO is stored in a BUF_MEM structure which is extended
+as appropriate to accommodate the stored data.
+
+BIO_s_secmem() is like BIO_s_mem() except that the secure heap is used
+for buffer storage.
+
+Any data written to a memory BIO can be recalled by reading from it.
+Unless the memory BIO is read only any data read from it is deleted from
+the BIO.
+
+Memory BIOs support BIO_gets() and BIO_puts().
+
+If the BIO_CLOSE flag is set when a memory BIO is freed then the underlying
+BUF_MEM structure is also freed.
+
+Calling BIO_reset() on a read write memory BIO clears any data in it if the
+flag BIO_FLAGS_NONCLEAR_RST is not set. On a read only BIO or if the flag
+BIO_FLAGS_NONCLEAR_RST is set it restores the BIO to its original state and
+the data can be read again.
+
+BIO_eof() is true if no data is in the BIO.
+
+BIO_ctrl_pending() returns the number of bytes currently stored.
+
+BIO_set_mem_eof_return() sets the behaviour of memory BIO B<b> when it is
+empty. If the B<v> is zero then an empty memory BIO will return EOF (that is
+it will return zero and BIO_should_retry(b) will be false. If B<v> is non
+zero then it will return B<v> when it is empty and it will set the read retry
+flag (that is BIO_read_retry(b) is true). To avoid ambiguity with a normal
+positive return value B<v> should be set to a negative value, typically -1.
+
+BIO_get_mem_data() sets *B<pp> to a pointer to the start of the memory BIOs data
+and returns the total amount of data available. It is implemented as a macro.
+
+BIO_set_mem_buf() sets the internal BUF_MEM structure to B<bm> and sets the
+close flag to B<c>, that is B<c> should be either BIO_CLOSE or BIO_NOCLOSE.
+It is a macro.
+
+BIO_get_mem_ptr() places the underlying BUF_MEM structure in *B<pp>. It is
+a macro.
+
+BIO_new_mem_buf() creates a memory BIO using B<len> bytes of data at B<buf>,
+if B<len> is -1 then the B<buf> is assumed to be nul terminated and its
+length is determined by B<strlen>. The BIO is set to a read only state and
+as a result cannot be written to. This is useful when some data needs to be
+made available from a static area of memory in the form of a BIO. The
+supplied data is read directly from the supplied buffer: it is B<not> copied
+first, so the supplied area of memory must be unchanged until the BIO is freed.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Writes to memory BIOs will always succeed if memory is available: that is
+their size can grow indefinitely.
+
+Every read from a read write memory BIO will remove the data just read with
+an internal copy operation, if a BIO contains a lot of data and it is
+read in small chunks the operation can be very slow. The use of a read only
+memory BIO avoids this problem. If the BIO must be read write then adding
+a buffering BIO to the chain will speed up the process.
+
+Calling BIO_set_mem_buf() on a BIO created with BIO_new_secmem() will
+give undefined results, including perhaps a program crash.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+There should be an option to set the maximum size of a memory BIO.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+Create a memory BIO and write some data to it:
+
+ BIO *mem = BIO_new(BIO_s_mem());
+
+ BIO_puts(mem, "Hello World\n");
+
+Create a read only memory BIO:
+
+ char data[] = "Hello World";
+ BIO *mem = BIO_new_mem_buf(data, -1);
+
+Extract the BUF_MEM structure from a memory BIO and then free up the BIO:
+
+ BUF_MEM *bptr;
+
+ BIO_get_mem_ptr(mem, &bptr);
+ BIO_set_close(mem, BIO_NOCLOSE); /* So BIO_free() leaves BUF_MEM alone */
+ BIO_free(mem);
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_mem() and BIO_s_secmem() return a valid memory B<BIO_METHOD> structure.
+
+BIO_set_mem_eof_return(), BIO_get_mem_data(), BIO_set_mem_buf() and BIO_get_mem_ptr()
+return 1 on success or a value which is less than or equal to 0 if an error occurred.
+
+BIO_new_mem_buf() returns a valid B<BIO> structure on success or NULL on error.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_null.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_null.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dd39423db1d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_null.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_null - null data sink
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_null(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_null() returns the null sink BIO method. Data written to
+the null sink is discarded, reads return EOF.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+A null sink BIO behaves in a similar manner to the Unix /dev/null
+device.
+
+A null bio can be placed on the end of a chain to discard any data
+passed through it.
+
+A null sink is useful if, for example, an application wishes to digest some
+data by writing through a digest bio but not send the digested data anywhere.
+Since a BIO chain must normally include a source/sink BIO this can be achieved
+by adding a null sink BIO to the end of the chain
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_null() returns the null sink BIO method.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_socket.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_socket.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..781ff247b25d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_s_socket.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_s_socket, BIO_new_socket - socket BIO
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ const BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_socket(void);
+
+ BIO *BIO_new_socket(int sock, int close_flag);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_s_socket() returns the socket BIO method. This is a wrapper
+round the platform's socket routines.
+
+BIO_read_ex() and BIO_write_ex() read or write the underlying socket.
+BIO_puts() is supported but BIO_gets() is not.
+
+If the close flag is set then the socket is shut down and closed
+when the BIO is freed.
+
+BIO_new_socket() returns a socket BIO using B<sock> and B<close_flag>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Socket BIOs also support any relevant functionality of file descriptor
+BIOs.
+
+The reason for having separate file descriptor and socket BIOs is that on some
+platforms sockets are not file descriptors and use distinct I/O routines,
+Windows is one such platform. Any code mixing the two will not work on
+all platforms.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_s_socket() returns the socket BIO method.
+
+BIO_new_socket() returns the newly allocated BIO or NULL is an error
+occurred.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0a9b6edb656a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_set_callback.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_set_callback_ex, BIO_get_callback_ex, BIO_set_callback, BIO_get_callback,
+BIO_set_callback_arg, BIO_get_callback_arg, BIO_debug_callback,
+BIO_callback_fn_ex, BIO_callback_fn
+- BIO callback functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ typedef long (*BIO_callback_fn_ex)(BIO *b, int oper, const char *argp,
+                                    size_t len, int argi,
+                                    long argl, int ret, size_t *processed);
+ typedef long (*BIO_callback_fn)(BIO *b, int oper, const char *argp, int argi,
+                                 long argl, long ret);
+
+ void BIO_set_callback_ex(BIO *b, BIO_callback_fn_ex callback);
+ BIO_callback_fn_ex BIO_get_callback_ex(const BIO *b);
+
+ void BIO_set_callback(BIO *b, BIO_callback_fn cb);
+ BIO_callback_fn BIO_get_callback(BIO *b);
+ void BIO_set_callback_arg(BIO *b, char *arg);
+ char *BIO_get_callback_arg(const BIO *b);
+
+ long BIO_debug_callback(BIO *bio, int cmd, const char *argp, int argi,
+                         long argl, long ret);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BIO_set_callback_ex() and BIO_get_callback_ex() set and retrieve the BIO
+callback. The callback is called during most high level BIO operations. It can
+be used for debugging purposes to trace operations on a BIO or to modify its
+operation.
+
+BIO_set_callback() and BIO_get_callback() set and retrieve the old format BIO
+callback. New code should not use these functions, but they are retained for
+backwards compatibility. Any callback set via BIO_set_callback_ex() will get
+called in preference to any set by BIO_set_callback().
+
+BIO_set_callback_arg() and BIO_get_callback_arg() are macros which can be
+used to set and retrieve an argument for use in the callback.
+
+BIO_debug_callback() is a standard debugging callback which prints
+out information relating to each BIO operation. If the callback
+argument is set it is interpreted as a BIO to send the information
+to, otherwise stderr is used.
+
+BIO_callback_fn_ex() is the type of the callback function and BIO_callback_fn()
+is the type of the old format callback function. The meaning of each argument
+is described below:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<b>
+
+The BIO the callback is attached to is passed in B<b>.
+
+=item B<oper>
+
+B<oper> is set to the operation being performed. For some operations
+the callback is called twice, once before and once after the actual
+operation, the latter case has B<oper> or'ed with BIO_CB_RETURN.
+
+=item B<len>
+
+The length of the data requested to be read or written. This is only useful if
+B<oper> is BIO_CB_READ, BIO_CB_WRITE or BIO_CB_GETS.
+
+=item B<argp> B<argi> B<argl>
+
+The meaning of the arguments B<argp>, B<argi> and B<argl> depends on
+the value of B<oper>, that is the operation being performed.
+
+=item B<processed>
+
+B<processed> is a pointer to a location which will be updated with the amount of
+data that was actually read or written. Only used for BIO_CB_READ, BIO_CB_WRITE,
+BIO_CB_GETS and BIO_CB_PUTS.
+
+=item B<ret>
+
+B<ret> is the return value that would be returned to the
+application if no callback were present. The actual value returned
+is the return value of the callback itself. In the case of callbacks
+called before the actual BIO operation 1 is placed in B<ret>, if
+the return value is not positive it will be immediately returned to
+the application and the BIO operation will not be performed.
+
+=back
+
+The callback should normally simply return B<ret> when it has
+finished processing, unless it specifically wishes to modify the
+value returned to the application.
+
+=head1 CALLBACK OPERATIONS
+
+In the notes below, B<callback> defers to the actual callback
+function that is called.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<BIO_free(b)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_FREE, NULL, 0, 0, 0L, 1L, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_FREE, NULL, 0L, 0L, 1L)
+
+is called before the free operation.
+
+=item B<BIO_read_ex(b, data, dlen, readbytes)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_READ, data, dlen, 0, 0L, 1L, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_READ, data, dlen, 0L, 1L)
+
+is called before the read and
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_READ | BIO_CB_RETURN, data, dlen, 0, 0L, retvalue,
+             &readbytes)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_READ|BIO_CB_RETURN, data, dlen, 0L, retvalue)
+
+after.
+
+=item B<BIO_write(b, data, dlen, written)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_WRITE, data, dlen, 0, 0L, 1L, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_WRITE, datat, dlen, 0L, 1L)
+
+is called before the write and
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_WRITE | BIO_CB_RETURN, data, dlen, 0, 0L, retvalue,
+             &written)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_WRITE|BIO_CB_RETURN, data, dlen, 0L, retvalue)
+
+after.
+
+=item B<BIO_gets(b, buf, size)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_GETS, buf, size, 0, 0L, 1, NULL, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_GETS, buf, size, 0L, 1L)
+
+is called before the operation and
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_GETS | BIO_CB_RETURN, buf, size, 0, 0L, retvalue,
+             &readbytes)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_GETS|BIO_CB_RETURN, buf, size, 0L, retvalue)
+
+after.
+
+=item B<BIO_puts(b, buf)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_PUTS, buf, 0, 0, 0L, 1L, NULL);
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_PUTS, buf, 0, 0L, 1L)
+
+is called before the operation and
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_PUTS | BIO_CB_RETURN, buf, 0, 0, 0L, retvalue, &written)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_PUTS|BIO_CB_RETURN, buf, 0, 0L, retvalue)
+
+after.
+
+=item B<BIO_ctrl(BIO *b, int cmd, long larg, void *parg)>
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_CTRL, parg, 0, cmd, larg, 1L, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_CTRL, parg, cmd, larg, 1L)
+
+is called before the call and
+
+ callback_ex(b, BIO_CB_CTRL | BIO_CB_RETURN, parg, 0, cmd, larg, ret, NULL)
+
+or
+
+ callback(b, BIO_CB_CTRL|BIO_CB_RETURN, parg, cmd, larg, ret)
+
+after.
+
+Note: B<cmd> == B<BIO_CTRL_SET_CALLBACK> is special, because B<parg> is not the
+argument of type B<BIO_info_cb> itself.  In this case B<parg> is a pointer to
+the actual call parameter, see B<BIO_callback_ctrl>.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+The BIO_debug_callback() function is a good example, its source is
+in crypto/bio/bio_cb.c
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_get_callback_ex() and BIO_get_callback() return the callback function
+previously set by a call to BIO_set_callback_ex() and BIO_set_callback()
+respectively.
+
+BIO_get_callback_arg() returns a B<char> pointer to the value previously set
+via a call to BIO_set_callback_arg().
+
+BIO_debug_callback() returns 1 or B<ret> if it's called after specific BIO
+operations.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_should_retry.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_should_retry.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a9ce8ccbbe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BIO_should_retry.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BIO_should_read, BIO_should_write,
+BIO_should_io_special, BIO_retry_type, BIO_should_retry,
+BIO_get_retry_BIO, BIO_get_retry_reason, BIO_set_retry_reason - BIO retry
+functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bio.h>
+
+ int BIO_should_read(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_should_write(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_should_io_special(iBIO *b);
+ int BIO_retry_type(BIO *b);
+ int BIO_should_retry(BIO *b);
+
+ BIO *BIO_get_retry_BIO(BIO *bio, int *reason);
+ int BIO_get_retry_reason(BIO *bio);
+ void BIO_set_retry_reason(BIO *bio, int reason);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions determine why a BIO is not able to read or write data.
+They will typically be called after a failed BIO_read_ex() or BIO_write_ex()
+call.
+
+BIO_should_retry() is true if the call that produced this condition
+should then be retried at a later time.
+
+If BIO_should_retry() is false then the cause is an error condition.
+
+BIO_should_read() is true if the cause of the condition is that the BIO
+has insufficient data to return. Check for readability and/or retry the
+last operation.
+
+BIO_should_write() is true if the cause of the condition is that the BIO
+has pending data to write. Check for writability and/or retry the
+last operation.
+
+BIO_should_io_special() is true if some "special" condition, that is a
+reason other than reading or writing is the cause of the condition.
+
+BIO_retry_type() returns a mask of the cause of a retry condition
+consisting of the values B<BIO_FLAGS_READ>, B<BIO_FLAGS_WRITE>,
+B<BIO_FLAGS_IO_SPECIAL> though current BIO types will only set one of
+these.
+
+BIO_get_retry_BIO() determines the precise reason for the special
+condition, it returns the BIO that caused this condition and if
+B<reason> is not NULL it contains the reason code. The meaning of
+the reason code and the action that should be taken depends on
+the type of BIO that resulted in this condition.
+
+BIO_get_retry_reason() returns the reason for a special condition if
+passed the relevant BIO, for example as returned by BIO_get_retry_BIO().
+
+BIO_set_retry_reason() sets the retry reason for a special condition for a given
+BIO. This would usually only be called by BIO implementations.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+BIO_should_read(), BIO_should_write(), BIO_should_io_special(),
+BIO_retry_type(), and BIO_should_retry(), are implemented as macros.
+
+If BIO_should_retry() returns false then the precise "error condition"
+depends on the BIO type that caused it and the return code of the BIO
+operation. For example if a call to BIO_read_ex() on a socket BIO returns
+0 and BIO_should_retry() is false then the cause will be that the
+connection closed. A similar condition on a file BIO will mean that it
+has reached EOF. Some BIO types may place additional information on
+the error queue. For more details see the individual BIO type manual
+pages.
+
+If the underlying I/O structure is in a blocking mode almost all current
+BIO types will not request a retry, because the underlying I/O
+calls will not. If the application knows that the BIO type will never
+signal a retry then it need not call BIO_should_retry() after a failed
+BIO I/O call. This is typically done with file BIOs.
+
+SSL BIOs are the only current exception to this rule: they can request a
+retry even if the underlying I/O structure is blocking, if a handshake
+occurs during a call to BIO_read(). An application can retry the failed
+call immediately or avoid this situation by setting SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY
+on the underlying SSL structure.
+
+While an application may retry a failed non blocking call immediately
+this is likely to be very inefficient because the call will fail
+repeatedly until data can be processed or is available. An application
+will normally wait until the necessary condition is satisfied. How
+this is done depends on the underlying I/O structure.
+
+For example if the cause is ultimately a socket and BIO_should_read()
+is true then a call to select() may be made to wait until data is
+available and then retry the BIO operation. By combining the retry
+conditions of several non blocking BIOs in a single select() call
+it is possible to service several BIOs in a single thread, though
+the performance may be poor if SSL BIOs are present because long delays
+can occur during the initial handshake process.
+
+It is possible for a BIO to block indefinitely if the underlying I/O
+structure cannot process or return any data. This depends on the behaviour of
+the platforms I/O functions. This is often not desirable: one solution
+is to use non blocking I/O and use a timeout on the select() (or
+equivalent) call.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The OpenSSL ASN1 functions cannot gracefully deal with non blocking I/O:
+that is they cannot retry after a partial read or write. This is usually
+worked around by only passing the relevant data to ASN1 functions when
+the entire structure can be read or written.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BIO_should_read(), BIO_should_write(), BIO_should_io_special(), and
+BIO_should_retry() return either 1 or 0 based on the actual conditions
+of the B<BIO>.
+
+BIO_retry_type() returns a flag combination presenting the cause of a retry
+condition or false if there is no retry condition.
+
+BIO_get_retry_BIO() returns a valid B<BIO> structure.
+
+BIO_get_retry_reason() returns the reason for a special condition.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The BIO_get_retry_reason() and BIO_set_retry_reason() functions were added in
+OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_BLINDING_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_BLINDING_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..68b3cbaf815c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_BLINDING_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_BLINDING_new, BN_BLINDING_free, BN_BLINDING_update, BN_BLINDING_convert,
+BN_BLINDING_invert, BN_BLINDING_convert_ex, BN_BLINDING_invert_ex,
+BN_BLINDING_is_current_thread, BN_BLINDING_set_current_thread,
+BN_BLINDING_lock, BN_BLINDING_unlock, BN_BLINDING_get_flags,
+BN_BLINDING_set_flags, BN_BLINDING_create_param - blinding related BIGNUM functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BN_BLINDING *BN_BLINDING_new(const BIGNUM *A, const BIGNUM *Ai,
+                              BIGNUM *mod);
+ void BN_BLINDING_free(BN_BLINDING *b);
+ int BN_BLINDING_update(BN_BLINDING *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int BN_BLINDING_convert(BIGNUM *n, BN_BLINDING *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int BN_BLINDING_invert(BIGNUM *n, BN_BLINDING *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int BN_BLINDING_convert_ex(BIGNUM *n, BIGNUM *r, BN_BLINDING *b,
+                            BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int BN_BLINDING_invert_ex(BIGNUM *n, const BIGNUM *r, BN_BLINDING *b,
+                           BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int BN_BLINDING_is_current_thread(BN_BLINDING *b);
+ void BN_BLINDING_set_current_thread(BN_BLINDING *b);
+ int BN_BLINDING_lock(BN_BLINDING *b);
+ int BN_BLINDING_unlock(BN_BLINDING *b);
+ unsigned long BN_BLINDING_get_flags(const BN_BLINDING *);
+ void BN_BLINDING_set_flags(BN_BLINDING *, unsigned long);
+ BN_BLINDING *BN_BLINDING_create_param(BN_BLINDING *b,
+                                       const BIGNUM *e, BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx,
+                                       int (*bn_mod_exp)(BIGNUM *r,
+                                                         const BIGNUM *a,
+                                                         const BIGNUM *p,
+                                                         const BIGNUM *m,
+                                                         BN_CTX *ctx,
+                                                         BN_MONT_CTX *m_ctx),
+                                       BN_MONT_CTX *m_ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_BLINDING_new() allocates a new B<BN_BLINDING> structure and copies
+the B<A> and B<Ai> values into the newly created B<BN_BLINDING> object.
+
+BN_BLINDING_free() frees the B<BN_BLINDING> structure.
+If B<b> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+BN_BLINDING_update() updates the B<BN_BLINDING> parameters by squaring
+the B<A> and B<Ai> or, after specific number of uses and if the
+necessary parameters are set, by re-creating the blinding parameters.
+
+BN_BLINDING_convert_ex() multiplies B<n> with the blinding factor B<A>.
+If B<r> is not NULL a copy the inverse blinding factor B<Ai> will be
+returned in B<r> (this is useful if a B<RSA> object is shared among
+several threads). BN_BLINDING_invert_ex() multiplies B<n> with the
+inverse blinding factor B<Ai>. If B<r> is not NULL it will be used as
+the inverse blinding.
+
+BN_BLINDING_convert() and BN_BLINDING_invert() are wrapper
+functions for BN_BLINDING_convert_ex() and BN_BLINDING_invert_ex()
+with B<r> set to NULL.
+
+BN_BLINDING_is_current_thread() returns whether the B<BN_BLINDING>
+structure is owned by the current thread. This is to help users
+provide proper locking if needed for multi-threaded use.
+
+BN_BLINDING_set_current_thread() sets the current thread as the
+owner of the B<BN_BLINDING> structure.
+
+BN_BLINDING_lock() locks the B<BN_BLINDING> structure.
+
+BN_BLINDING_unlock() unlocks the B<BN_BLINDING> structure.
+
+BN_BLINDING_get_flags() returns the BN_BLINDING flags. Currently
+there are two supported flags: B<BN_BLINDING_NO_UPDATE> and
+B<BN_BLINDING_NO_RECREATE>. B<BN_BLINDING_NO_UPDATE> inhibits the
+automatic update of the B<BN_BLINDING> parameters after each use
+and B<BN_BLINDING_NO_RECREATE> inhibits the automatic re-creation
+of the B<BN_BLINDING> parameters after a fixed number of uses (currently
+32). In newly allocated B<BN_BLINDING> objects no flags are set.
+BN_BLINDING_set_flags() sets the B<BN_BLINDING> parameters flags.
+
+BN_BLINDING_create_param() creates new B<BN_BLINDING> parameters
+using the exponent B<e> and the modulus B<m>. B<bn_mod_exp> and
+B<m_ctx> can be used to pass special functions for exponentiation
+(normally BN_mod_exp_mont() and B<BN_MONT_CTX>).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_BLINDING_new() returns the newly allocated B<BN_BLINDING> structure
+or NULL in case of an error.
+
+BN_BLINDING_update(), BN_BLINDING_convert(), BN_BLINDING_invert(),
+BN_BLINDING_convert_ex() and BN_BLINDING_invert_ex() return 1 on
+success and 0 if an error occurred.
+
+BN_BLINDING_is_current_thread() returns 1 if the current thread owns
+the B<BN_BLINDING> object, 0 otherwise.
+
+BN_BLINDING_set_current_thread() doesn't return anything.
+
+BN_BLINDING_lock(), BN_BLINDING_unlock() return 1 if the operation
+succeeded or 0 on error.
+
+BN_BLINDING_get_flags() returns the currently set B<BN_BLINDING> flags
+(a B<unsigned long> value).
+
+BN_BLINDING_create_param() returns the newly created B<BN_BLINDING>
+parameters or NULL on error.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_BLINDING_thread_id() was first introduced in OpenSSL 1.0.0, and it
+deprecates BN_BLINDING_set_thread_id() and BN_BLINDING_get_thread_id().
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2005-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7fba72e1082a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_CTX_new, BN_CTX_secure_new, BN_CTX_free - allocate and free BN_CTX structures
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BN_CTX *BN_CTX_new(void);
+
+ BN_CTX *BN_CTX_secure_new(void);
+
+ void BN_CTX_free(BN_CTX *c);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A B<BN_CTX> is a structure that holds B<BIGNUM> temporary variables used by
+library functions. Since dynamic memory allocation to create B<BIGNUM>s
+is rather expensive when used in conjunction with repeated subroutine
+calls, the B<BN_CTX> structure is used.
+
+BN_CTX_new() allocates and initializes a B<BN_CTX> structure.
+BN_CTX_secure_new() allocates and initializes a B<BN_CTX> structure
+but uses the secure heap (see L<CRYPTO_secure_malloc(3)>) to hold the
+B<BIGNUM>s.
+
+BN_CTX_free() frees the components of the B<BN_CTX> and the structure itself.
+Since BN_CTX_start() is required in order to obtain B<BIGNUM>s from the
+B<BN_CTX>, in most cases BN_CTX_end() must be called before the B<BN_CTX> may
+be freed by BN_CTX_free().  If B<c> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+A given B<BN_CTX> must only be used by a single thread of execution.  No
+locking is performed, and the internal pool allocator will not properly handle
+multiple threads of execution.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_CTX_new() and BN_CTX_secure_new() return a pointer to the B<BN_CTX>.
+If the allocation fails,
+they return B<NULL> and sets an error code that can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+BN_CTX_free() has no return values.
+
+=head1 REMOVED FUNCTIONALITY
+
+ void BN_CTX_init(BN_CTX *c);
+
+BN_CTX_init() is no longer available as of OpenSSL 1.1.0. Applications should
+replace use of BN_CTX_init with BN_CTX_new instead:
+
+ BN_CTX *ctx;
+ ctx = BN_CTX_new();
+ if (!ctx)
+     /* error */
+ ...
+ BN_CTX_free(ctx);
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>,
+L<BN_CTX_start(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_CTX_init() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_start.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_start.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..372da506d9d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_CTX_start.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_CTX_start, BN_CTX_get, BN_CTX_end - use temporary BIGNUM variables
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ void BN_CTX_start(BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_CTX_get(BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ void BN_CTX_end(BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions are used to obtain temporary B<BIGNUM> variables from
+a B<BN_CTX> (which can been created by using L<BN_CTX_new(3)>)
+in order to save the overhead of repeatedly creating and
+freeing B<BIGNUM>s in functions that are called from inside a loop.
+
+A function must call BN_CTX_start() first. Then, BN_CTX_get() may be
+called repeatedly to obtain temporary B<BIGNUM>s. All BN_CTX_get()
+calls must be made before calling any other functions that use the
+B<ctx> as an argument.
+
+Finally, BN_CTX_end() must be called before returning from the function.
+When BN_CTX_end() is called, the B<BIGNUM> pointers obtained from
+BN_CTX_get() become invalid.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_CTX_start() and BN_CTX_end() return no values.
+
+BN_CTX_get() returns a pointer to the B<BIGNUM>, or B<NULL> on error.
+Once BN_CTX_get() has failed, the subsequent calls will return B<NULL>
+as well, so it is sufficient to check the return value of the last
+BN_CTX_get() call. In case of an error, an error code is set, which
+can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BN_CTX_new(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f0e49556d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_add, BN_sub, BN_mul, BN_sqr, BN_div, BN_mod, BN_nnmod, BN_mod_add,
+BN_mod_sub, BN_mod_mul, BN_mod_sqr, BN_exp, BN_mod_exp, BN_gcd -
+arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_add(BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *b);
+
+ int BN_sub(BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *b);
+
+ int BN_mul(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_sqr(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_div(BIGNUM *dv, BIGNUM *rem, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *d,
+            BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod(BIGNUM *rem, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_nnmod(BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_add(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, const BIGNUM *m,
+                BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_sub(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, const BIGNUM *m,
+                BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_mul(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, const BIGNUM *m,
+                BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_sqr(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_exp(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *p, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_exp(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *p,
+                const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_gcd(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_add() adds I<a> and I<b> and places the result in I<r> (C<r=a+b>).
+I<r> may be the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or I<b>.
+
+BN_sub() subtracts I<b> from I<a> and places the result in I<r> (C<r=a-b>).
+I<r> may be the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or I<b>.
+
+BN_mul() multiplies I<a> and I<b> and places the result in I<r> (C<r=a*b>).
+I<r> may be the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or I<b>.
+For multiplication by powers of 2, use L<BN_lshift(3)>.
+
+BN_sqr() takes the square of I<a> and places the result in I<r>
+(C<r=a^2>). I<r> and I<a> may be the same B<BIGNUM>.
+This function is faster than BN_mul(r,a,a).
+
+BN_div() divides I<a> by I<d> and places the result in I<dv> and the
+remainder in I<rem> (C<dv=a/d, rem=a%d>). Either of I<dv> and I<rem> may
+be B<NULL>, in which case the respective value is not returned.
+The result is rounded towards zero; thus if I<a> is negative, the
+remainder will be zero or negative.
+For division by powers of 2, use BN_rshift(3).
+
+BN_mod() corresponds to BN_div() with I<dv> set to B<NULL>.
+
+BN_nnmod() reduces I<a> modulo I<m> and places the non-negative
+remainder in I<r>.
+
+BN_mod_add() adds I<a> to I<b> modulo I<m> and places the non-negative
+result in I<r>.
+
+BN_mod_sub() subtracts I<b> from I<a> modulo I<m> and places the
+non-negative result in I<r>.
+
+BN_mod_mul() multiplies I<a> by I<b> and finds the non-negative
+remainder respective to modulus I<m> (C<r=(a*b) mod m>). I<r> may be
+the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or I<b>. For more efficient algorithms for
+repeated computations using the same modulus, see
+L<BN_mod_mul_montgomery(3)> and
+L<BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(3)>.
+
+BN_mod_sqr() takes the square of I<a> modulo B<m> and places the
+result in I<r>.
+
+BN_exp() raises I<a> to the I<p>-th power and places the result in I<r>
+(C<r=a^p>). This function is faster than repeated applications of
+BN_mul().
+
+BN_mod_exp() computes I<a> to the I<p>-th power modulo I<m> (C<r=a^p %
+m>). This function uses less time and space than BN_exp(). Do not call this
+function when B<m> is even and any of the parameters have the
+B<BN_FLG_CONSTTIME> flag set.
+
+BN_gcd() computes the greatest common divisor of I<a> and I<b> and
+places the result in I<r>. I<r> may be the same B<BIGNUM> as I<a> or
+I<b>.
+
+For all functions, I<ctx> is a previously allocated B<BN_CTX> used for
+temporary variables; see L<BN_CTX_new(3)>.
+
+Unless noted otherwise, the result B<BIGNUM> must be different from
+the arguments.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+For all functions, 1 is returned for success, 0 on error. The return
+value should always be checked (e.g., C<if (!BN_add(r,a,b)) goto err;>).
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_CTX_new(3)>,
+L<BN_add_word(3)>, L<BN_set_bit(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add_word.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add_word.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6c69bc485f2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_add_word.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_add_word, BN_sub_word, BN_mul_word, BN_div_word, BN_mod_word - arithmetic
+functions on BIGNUMs with integers
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_add_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+
+ int BN_sub_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+
+ int BN_mul_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+
+ BN_ULONG BN_div_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+
+ BN_ULONG BN_mod_word(const BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions perform arithmetic operations on BIGNUMs with unsigned
+integers. They are much more efficient than the normal BIGNUM
+arithmetic operations.
+
+BN_add_word() adds B<w> to B<a> (C<a+=w>).
+
+BN_sub_word() subtracts B<w> from B<a> (C<a-=w>).
+
+BN_mul_word() multiplies B<a> and B<w> (C<a*=w>).
+
+BN_div_word() divides B<a> by B<w> (C<a/=w>) and returns the remainder.
+
+BN_mod_word() returns the remainder of B<a> divided by B<w> (C<a%w>).
+
+For BN_div_word() and BN_mod_word(), B<w> must not be 0.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_add_word(), BN_sub_word() and BN_mul_word() return 1 for success, 0
+on error. The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+BN_mod_word() and BN_div_word() return B<a>%B<w> on success and
+B<(BN_ULONG)-1> if an error occurred.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3cbc8cb665c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_bn2bin.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_bn2binpad,
+BN_bn2bin, BN_bin2bn, BN_bn2lebinpad, BN_lebin2bn, BN_bn2hex, BN_bn2dec,
+BN_hex2bn, BN_dec2bn, BN_print, BN_print_fp, BN_bn2mpi,
+BN_mpi2bn - format conversions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_bn2bin(const BIGNUM *a, unsigned char *to);
+ int BN_bn2binpad(const BIGNUM *a, unsigned char *to, int tolen);
+ BIGNUM *BN_bin2bn(const unsigned char *s, int len, BIGNUM *ret);
+
+ int BN_bn2lebinpad(const BIGNUM *a, unsigned char *to, int tolen);
+ BIGNUM *BN_lebin2bn(const unsigned char *s, int len, BIGNUM *ret);
+
+ char *BN_bn2hex(const BIGNUM *a);
+ char *BN_bn2dec(const BIGNUM *a);
+ int BN_hex2bn(BIGNUM **a, const char *str);
+ int BN_dec2bn(BIGNUM **a, const char *str);
+
+ int BN_print(BIO *fp, const BIGNUM *a);
+ int BN_print_fp(FILE *fp, const BIGNUM *a);
+
+ int BN_bn2mpi(const BIGNUM *a, unsigned char *to);
+ BIGNUM *BN_mpi2bn(unsigned char *s, int len, BIGNUM *ret);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_bn2bin() converts the absolute value of B<a> into big-endian form
+and stores it at B<to>. B<to> must point to BN_num_bytes(B<a>) bytes of
+memory.
+
+BN_bn2binpad() also converts the absolute value of B<a> into big-endian form
+and stores it at B<to>. B<tolen> indicates the length of the output buffer
+B<to>. The result is padded with zeroes if necessary. If B<tolen> is less than
+BN_num_bytes(B<a>) an error is returned.
+
+BN_bin2bn() converts the positive integer in big-endian form of length
+B<len> at B<s> into a B<BIGNUM> and places it in B<ret>. If B<ret> is
+NULL, a new B<BIGNUM> is created.
+
+BN_bn2lebinpad() and BN_lebin2bn() are identical to BN_bn2binpad() and
+BN_bin2bn() except the buffer is in little-endian format.
+
+BN_bn2hex() and BN_bn2dec() return printable strings containing the
+hexadecimal and decimal encoding of B<a> respectively. For negative
+numbers, the string is prefaced with a leading '-'. The string must be
+freed later using OPENSSL_free().
+
+BN_hex2bn() takes as many characters as possible from the string B<str>,
+including the leading character '-' which means negative, to form a valid
+hexadecimal number representation and converts them to a B<BIGNUM> and
+stores it in **B<a>. If *B<a> is NULL, a new B<BIGNUM> is created. If
+B<a> is NULL, it only computes the length of valid representation.
+A "negative zero" is converted to zero.
+BN_dec2bn() is the same using the decimal system.
+
+BN_print() and BN_print_fp() write the hexadecimal encoding of B<a>,
+with a leading '-' for negative numbers, to the B<BIO> or B<FILE>
+B<fp>.
+
+BN_bn2mpi() and BN_mpi2bn() convert B<BIGNUM>s from and to a format
+that consists of the number's length in bytes represented as a 4-byte
+big-endian number, and the number itself in big-endian format, where
+the most significant bit signals a negative number (the representation
+of numbers with the MSB set is prefixed with null byte).
+
+BN_bn2mpi() stores the representation of B<a> at B<to>, where B<to>
+must be large enough to hold the result. The size can be determined by
+calling BN_bn2mpi(B<a>, NULL).
+
+BN_mpi2bn() converts the B<len> bytes long representation at B<s> to
+a B<BIGNUM> and stores it at B<ret>, or in a newly allocated B<BIGNUM>
+if B<ret> is NULL.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_bn2bin() returns the length of the big-endian number placed at B<to>.
+BN_bin2bn() returns the B<BIGNUM>, NULL on error.
+
+BN_bn2binpad() returns the number of bytes written or -1 if the supplied
+buffer is too small.
+
+BN_bn2hex() and BN_bn2dec() return a null-terminated string, or NULL
+on error. BN_hex2bn() and BN_dec2bn() return the number of characters
+used in parsing, or 0 on error, in which
+case no new B<BIGNUM> will be created.
+
+BN_print_fp() and BN_print() return 1 on success, 0 on write errors.
+
+BN_bn2mpi() returns the length of the representation. BN_mpi2bn()
+returns the B<BIGNUM>, and NULL on error.
+
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_zero(3)>,
+L<ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN(3)>,
+L<BN_num_bytes(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_cmp.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_cmp.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..95d162ff2957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_cmp.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_cmp, BN_ucmp, BN_is_zero, BN_is_one, BN_is_word, BN_is_odd - BIGNUM comparison and test functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_cmp(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b);
+ int BN_ucmp(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b);
+
+ int BN_is_zero(BIGNUM *a);
+ int BN_is_one(BIGNUM *a);
+ int BN_is_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+ int BN_is_odd(BIGNUM *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_cmp() compares the numbers B<a> and B<b>. BN_ucmp() compares their
+absolute values.
+
+BN_is_zero(), BN_is_one() and BN_is_word() test if B<a> equals 0, 1,
+or B<w> respectively. BN_is_odd() tests if a is odd.
+
+BN_is_zero(), BN_is_one(), BN_is_word() and BN_is_odd() are macros.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_cmp() returns -1 if B<a> E<lt> B<b>, 0 if B<a> == B<b> and 1 if
+B<a> E<gt> B<b>. BN_ucmp() is the same using the absolute values
+of B<a> and B<b>.
+
+BN_is_zero(), BN_is_one() BN_is_word() and BN_is_odd() return 1 if
+the condition is true, 0 otherwise.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_copy.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_copy.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46de54428663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_copy.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_copy, BN_dup, BN_with_flags - copy BIGNUMs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_copy(BIGNUM *to, const BIGNUM *from);
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_dup(const BIGNUM *from);
+
+ void BN_with_flags(BIGNUM *dest, const BIGNUM *b, int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_copy() copies B<from> to B<to>. BN_dup() creates a new B<BIGNUM>
+containing the value B<from>.
+
+BN_with_flags creates a B<temporary> shallow copy of B<b> in B<dest>. It places
+significant restrictions on the copied data. Applications that do no adhere to
+these restrictions may encounter unexpected side effects or crashes. For that
+reason use of this function is discouraged. Any flags provided in B<flags> will
+be set in B<dest> in addition to any flags already set in B<b>. For example this
+might commonly be used to create a temporary copy of a BIGNUM with the
+B<BN_FLG_CONSTTIME> flag set for constant time operations. The temporary copy in
+B<dest> will share some internal state with B<b>. For this reason the following
+restrictions apply to the use of B<dest>:
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+B<dest> should be a newly allocated BIGNUM obtained via a call to BN_new(). It
+should not have been used for other purposes or initialised in any way.
+
+=item *
+
+B<dest> must only be used in "read-only" operations, i.e. typically those
+functions where the relevant parameter is declared "const".
+
+=item *
+
+B<dest> must be used and freed before any further subsequent use of B<b>
+
+=back
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_copy() returns B<to> on success, NULL on error. BN_dup() returns
+the new B<BIGNUM>, and NULL on error. The error codes can be obtained
+by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b505841832ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_generate_prime.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_generate_prime_ex, BN_is_prime_ex, BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex, BN_GENCB_call,
+BN_GENCB_new, BN_GENCB_free, BN_GENCB_set_old, BN_GENCB_set, BN_GENCB_get_arg,
+BN_generate_prime, BN_is_prime, BN_is_prime_fasttest - generate primes and test
+for primality
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_generate_prime_ex(BIGNUM *ret, int bits, int safe, const BIGNUM *add,
+                          const BIGNUM *rem, BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+ int BN_is_prime_ex(const BIGNUM *p, int nchecks, BN_CTX *ctx, BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+ int BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex(const BIGNUM *p, int nchecks, BN_CTX *ctx,
+                             int do_trial_division, BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+ int BN_GENCB_call(BN_GENCB *cb, int a, int b);
+
+ BN_GENCB *BN_GENCB_new(void);
+
+ void BN_GENCB_free(BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+ void BN_GENCB_set_old(BN_GENCB *gencb,
+                       void (*callback)(int, int, void *), void *cb_arg);
+
+ void BN_GENCB_set(BN_GENCB *gencb,
+                   int (*callback)(int, int, BN_GENCB *), void *cb_arg);
+
+ void *BN_GENCB_get_arg(BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+Deprecated:
+
+ #if OPENSSL_API_COMPAT < 0x00908000L
+ BIGNUM *BN_generate_prime(BIGNUM *ret, int num, int safe, BIGNUM *add,
+                           BIGNUM *rem, void (*callback)(int, int, void *),
+                           void *cb_arg);
+
+ int BN_is_prime(const BIGNUM *a, int checks,
+                 void (*callback)(int, int, void *), BN_CTX *ctx, void *cb_arg);
+
+ int BN_is_prime_fasttest(const BIGNUM *a, int checks,
+                          void (*callback)(int, int, void *), BN_CTX *ctx,
+                          void *cb_arg, int do_trial_division);
+ #endif
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_generate_prime_ex() generates a pseudo-random prime number of
+at least bit length B<bits>.
+If B<ret> is not B<NULL>, it will be used to store the number.
+
+If B<cb> is not B<NULL>, it is used as follows:
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 0, i)> is called after generating the i-th
+potential prime number.
+
+=item *
+
+While the number is being tested for primality,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, j)> is called as described below.
+
+=item *
+
+When a prime has been found, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 2, i)> is called.
+
+=item *
+
+The callers of BN_generate_prime_ex() may call B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, i, j)> with
+other values as described in their respective man pages; see L</SEE ALSO>.
+
+=back
+
+The prime may have to fulfill additional requirements for use in
+Diffie-Hellman key exchange:
+
+If B<add> is not B<NULL>, the prime will fulfill the condition p % B<add>
+== B<rem> (p % B<add> == 1 if B<rem> == B<NULL>) in order to suit a given
+generator.
+
+If B<safe> is true, it will be a safe prime (i.e. a prime p so
+that (p-1)/2 is also prime).
+
+The PRNG must be seeded prior to calling BN_generate_prime_ex().
+The prime number generation has a negligible error probability.
+
+BN_is_prime_ex() and BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex() test if the number B<p> is
+prime.  The following tests are performed until one of them shows that
+B<p> is composite; if B<p> passes all these tests, it is considered
+prime.
+
+BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex(), when called with B<do_trial_division == 1>,
+first attempts trial division by a number of small primes;
+if no divisors are found by this test and B<cb> is not B<NULL>,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, -1)> is called.
+If B<do_trial_division == 0>, this test is skipped.
+
+Both BN_is_prime_ex() and BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex() perform a Miller-Rabin
+probabilistic primality test with B<nchecks> iterations. If
+B<nchecks == BN_prime_checks>, a number of iterations is used that
+yields a false positive rate of at most 2^-64 for random input.
+The error rate depends on the size of the prime and goes down for bigger primes.
+The rate is 2^-80 starting at 308 bits, 2^-112 at 852 bits, 2^-128 at 1080 bits,
+2^-192 at 3747 bits and 2^-256 at 6394 bits.
+
+When the source of the prime is not random or not trusted, the number
+of checks needs to be much higher to reach the same level of assurance:
+It should equal half of the targeted security level in bits (rounded up to the
+next integer if necessary).
+For instance, to reach the 128 bit security level, B<nchecks> should be set to
+64.
+
+If B<cb> is not B<NULL>, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, j)> is called
+after the j-th iteration (j = 0, 1, ...). B<ctx> is a
+pre-allocated B<BN_CTX> (to save the overhead of allocating and
+freeing the structure in a loop), or B<NULL>.
+
+BN_GENCB_call() calls the callback function held in the B<BN_GENCB> structure
+and passes the ints B<a> and B<b> as arguments. There are two types of
+B<BN_GENCB> structure that are supported: "new" style and "old" style. New
+programs should prefer the "new" style, whilst the "old" style is provided
+for backwards compatibility purposes.
+
+A B<BN_GENCB> structure should be created through a call to BN_GENCB_new(),
+and freed through a call to BN_GENCB_free().
+
+For "new" style callbacks a BN_GENCB structure should be initialised with a
+call to BN_GENCB_set(), where B<gencb> is a B<BN_GENCB *>, B<callback> is of
+type B<int (*callback)(int, int, BN_GENCB *)> and B<cb_arg> is a B<void *>.
+"Old" style callbacks are the same except they are initialised with a call
+to BN_GENCB_set_old() and B<callback> is of type
+B<void (*callback)(int, int, void *)>.
+
+A callback is invoked through a call to B<BN_GENCB_call>. This will check
+the type of the callback and will invoke B<callback(a, b, gencb)> for new
+style callbacks or B<callback(a, b, cb_arg)> for old style.
+
+It is possible to obtain the argument associated with a BN_GENCB structure
+(set via a call to BN_GENCB_set or BN_GENCB_set_old) using BN_GENCB_get_arg.
+
+BN_generate_prime() (deprecated) works in the same way as
+BN_generate_prime_ex() but expects an old-style callback function
+directly in the B<callback> parameter, and an argument to pass to it in
+the B<cb_arg>. BN_is_prime() and BN_is_prime_fasttest()
+can similarly be compared to BN_is_prime_ex() and
+BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex(), respectively.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_generate_prime_ex() return 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+BN_is_prime_ex(), BN_is_prime_fasttest_ex(), BN_is_prime() and
+BN_is_prime_fasttest() return 0 if the number is composite, 1 if it is
+prime with an error probability of less than 0.25^B<nchecks>, and
+-1 on error.
+
+BN_generate_prime() returns the prime number on success, B<NULL> otherwise.
+
+BN_GENCB_new returns a pointer to a BN_GENCB structure on success, or B<NULL>
+otherwise.
+
+BN_GENCB_get_arg returns the argument previously associated with a BN_GENCB
+structure.
+
+Callback functions should return 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 REMOVED FUNCTIONALITY
+
+As of OpenSSL 1.1.0 it is no longer possible to create a BN_GENCB structure
+directly, as in:
+
+ BN_GENCB callback;
+
+Instead applications should create a BN_GENCB structure using BN_GENCB_new:
+
+ BN_GENCB *callback;
+ callback = BN_GENCB_new();
+ if (!callback)
+     /* error */
+ ...
+ BN_GENCB_free(callback);
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_generate_parameters(3)>, L<DSA_generate_parameters(3)>,
+L<RSA_generate_key(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_GENCB_new(), BN_GENCB_free(),
+and BN_GENCB_get_arg() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_inverse.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_inverse.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c09aacbe589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_inverse.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_mod_inverse - compute inverse modulo n
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *n,
+                        BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_mod_inverse() computes the inverse of B<a> modulo B<n>
+places the result in B<r> (C<(a*r)%n==1>). If B<r> is NULL,
+a new B<BIGNUM> is created.
+
+B<ctx> is a previously allocated B<BN_CTX> used for temporary
+variables. B<r> may be the same B<BIGNUM> as B<a> or B<n>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_mod_inverse() returns the B<BIGNUM> containing the inverse, and
+NULL on error. The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4dfcb21d9a15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_montgomery.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_mod_mul_montgomery, BN_MONT_CTX_new,
+BN_MONT_CTX_free, BN_MONT_CTX_set, BN_MONT_CTX_copy,
+BN_from_montgomery, BN_to_montgomery - Montgomery multiplication
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BN_MONT_CTX *BN_MONT_CTX_new(void);
+ void BN_MONT_CTX_free(BN_MONT_CTX *mont);
+
+ int BN_MONT_CTX_set(BN_MONT_CTX *mont, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ BN_MONT_CTX *BN_MONT_CTX_copy(BN_MONT_CTX *to, BN_MONT_CTX *from);
+
+ int BN_mod_mul_montgomery(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b,
+                           BN_MONT_CTX *mont, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_from_montgomery(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BN_MONT_CTX *mont,
+                        BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_to_montgomery(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BN_MONT_CTX *mont,
+                      BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+These functions implement Montgomery multiplication. They are used
+automatically when L<BN_mod_exp(3)> is called with suitable input,
+but they may be useful when several operations are to be performed
+using the same modulus.
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_new() allocates and initializes a B<BN_MONT_CTX> structure.
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_set() sets up the I<mont> structure from the modulus I<m>
+by precomputing its inverse and a value R.
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_copy() copies the B<BN_MONT_CTX> I<from> to I<to>.
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_free() frees the components of the B<BN_MONT_CTX>, and, if
+it was created by BN_MONT_CTX_new(), also the structure itself.
+If B<mont> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+BN_mod_mul_montgomery() computes Mont(I<a>,I<b>):=I<a>*I<b>*R^-1 and places
+the result in I<r>.
+
+BN_from_montgomery() performs the Montgomery reduction I<r> = I<a>*R^-1.
+
+BN_to_montgomery() computes Mont(I<a>,R^2), i.e. I<a>*R.
+Note that I<a> must be non-negative and smaller than the modulus.
+
+For all functions, I<ctx> is a previously allocated B<BN_CTX> used for
+temporary variables.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_new() returns the newly allocated B<BN_MONT_CTX>, and NULL
+on error.
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_free() has no return value.
+
+For the other functions, 1 is returned for success, 0 on error.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 WARNING
+
+The inputs must be reduced modulo B<m>, otherwise the result will be
+outside the expected range.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>,
+L<BN_CTX_new(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_MONT_CTX_init() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_reciprocal.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_reciprocal.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07f93baf60f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_mod_mul_reciprocal.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_mod_mul_reciprocal, BN_div_recp, BN_RECP_CTX_new,
+BN_RECP_CTX_free, BN_RECP_CTX_set - modular multiplication using
+reciprocal
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BN_RECP_CTX *BN_RECP_CTX_new(void);
+ void BN_RECP_CTX_free(BN_RECP_CTX *recp);
+
+ int BN_RECP_CTX_set(BN_RECP_CTX *recp, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_div_recp(BIGNUM *dv, BIGNUM *rem, BIGNUM *a, BN_RECP_CTX *recp,
+                 BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b,
+                           BN_RECP_CTX *recp, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_mod_mul_reciprocal() can be used to perform an efficient
+L<BN_mod_mul(3)> operation when the operation will be performed
+repeatedly with the same modulus. It computes B<r>=(B<a>*B<b>)%B<m>
+using B<recp>=1/B<m>, which is set as described below.  B<ctx> is a
+previously allocated B<BN_CTX> used for temporary variables.
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_new() allocates and initializes a B<BN_RECP> structure.
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_free() frees the components of the B<BN_RECP>, and, if it
+was created by BN_RECP_CTX_new(), also the structure itself.
+If B<recp> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_set() stores B<m> in B<recp> and sets it up for computing
+1/B<m> and shifting it left by BN_num_bits(B<m>)+1 to make it an
+integer. The result and the number of bits it was shifted left will
+later be stored in B<recp>.
+
+BN_div_recp() divides B<a> by B<m> using B<recp>. It places the quotient
+in B<dv> and the remainder in B<rem>.
+
+The B<BN_RECP_CTX> structure cannot be shared between threads.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_new() returns the newly allocated B<BN_RECP_CTX>, and NULL
+on error.
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_free() has no return value.
+
+For the other functions, 1 is returned for success, 0 on error.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>,
+L<BN_CTX_new(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_RECP_CTX_init() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..08aae5e91915
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_new, BN_secure_new, BN_clear, BN_free, BN_clear_free - allocate and free BIGNUMs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_new(void);
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_secure_new(void);
+
+ void BN_clear(BIGNUM *a);
+
+ void BN_free(BIGNUM *a);
+
+ void BN_clear_free(BIGNUM *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_new() allocates and initializes a B<BIGNUM> structure.
+BN_secure_new() does the same except that the secure heap
+OPENSSL_secure_malloc(3) is used to store the value.
+
+BN_clear() is used to destroy sensitive data such as keys when they
+are no longer needed. It erases the memory used by B<a> and sets it
+to the value 0.
+
+BN_free() frees the components of the B<BIGNUM>, and if it was created
+by BN_new(), also the structure itself. BN_clear_free() additionally
+overwrites the data before the memory is returned to the system.
+If B<a> is NULL, nothing is done.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_new() and BN_secure_new()
+return a pointer to the B<BIGNUM> initialised to the value 0.
+If the allocation fails,
+they return B<NULL> and set an error code that can be obtained
+by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+BN_clear(), BN_free() and BN_clear_free() have no return values.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_init() was removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0; use BN_new() instead.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_num_bytes.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_num_bytes.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9e0465de5473
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_num_bytes.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_num_bits, BN_num_bytes, BN_num_bits_word - get BIGNUM size
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_num_bytes(const BIGNUM *a);
+
+ int BN_num_bits(const BIGNUM *a);
+
+ int BN_num_bits_word(BN_ULONG w);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_num_bytes() returns the size of a B<BIGNUM> in bytes.
+
+BN_num_bits_word() returns the number of significant bits in a word.
+If we take 0x00000432 as an example, it returns 11, not 16, not 32.
+Basically, except for a zero, it returns I<floor(log2(w))+1>.
+
+BN_num_bits() returns the number of significant bits in a B<BIGNUM>,
+following the same principle as BN_num_bits_word().
+
+BN_num_bytes() is a macro.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+The size.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Some have tried using BN_num_bits() on individual numbers in RSA keys,
+DH keys and DSA keys, and found that they don't always come up with
+the number of bits they expected (something like 512, 1024, 2048,
+...).  This is because generating a number with some specific number
+of bits doesn't always set the highest bits, thereby making the number
+of I<significant> bits a little lower.  If you want to know the "key
+size" of such a key, either use functions like RSA_size(), DH_size()
+and DSA_size(), or use BN_num_bytes() and multiply with 8 (although
+there's no real guarantee that will match the "key size", just a lot
+more probability).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_size(3)>, L<DSA_size(3)>,
+L<RSA_size(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_rand.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_rand.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eb0a6b13862f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_rand.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_rand, BN_priv_rand, BN_pseudo_rand,
+BN_rand_range, BN_priv_rand_range, BN_pseudo_rand_range
+- generate pseudo-random number
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_rand(BIGNUM *rnd, int bits, int top, int bottom);
+
+ int BN_priv_rand(BIGNUM *rnd, int bits, int top, int bottom);
+
+ int BN_pseudo_rand(BIGNUM *rnd, int bits, int top, int bottom);
+
+ int BN_rand_range(BIGNUM *rnd, BIGNUM *range);
+
+ int BN_priv_rand_range(BIGNUM *rnd, BIGNUM *range);
+
+ int BN_pseudo_rand_range(BIGNUM *rnd, BIGNUM *range);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_rand() generates a cryptographically strong pseudo-random number of
+B<bits> in length and stores it in B<rnd>.
+If B<bits> is less than zero, or too small to
+accommodate the requirements specified by the B<top> and B<bottom>
+parameters, an error is returned.
+The B<top> parameters specifies
+requirements on the most significant bit of the generated number.
+If it is B<BN_RAND_TOP_ANY>, there is no constraint.
+If it is B<BN_RAND_TOP_ONE>, the top bit must be one.
+If it is B<BN_RAND_TOP_TWO>, the two most significant bits of
+the number will be set to 1, so that the product of two such random
+numbers will always have 2*B<bits> length.
+If B<bottom> is B<BN_RAND_BOTTOM_ODD>, the number will be odd; if it
+is B<BN_RAND_BOTTOM_ANY> it can be odd or even.
+If B<bits> is 1 then B<top> cannot also be B<BN_RAND_FLG_TOPTWO>.
+
+BN_rand_range() generates a cryptographically strong pseudo-random
+number B<rnd> in the range 0 E<lt>= B<rnd> E<lt> B<range>.
+
+BN_priv_rand() and BN_priv_rand_range() have the same semantics as
+BN_rand() and BN_rand_range() respectively.  They are intended to be
+used for generating values that should remain private, and mirror the
+same difference between L<RAND_bytes(3)> and L<RAND_priv_bytes(3)>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Always check the error return value of these functions and do not take
+randomness for granted: an error occurs if the CSPRNG has not been
+seeded with enough randomness to ensure an unpredictable byte sequence.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+The functions return 1 on success, 0 on error.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+Starting with OpenSSL release 1.1.0, BN_pseudo_rand() has been identical
+to BN_rand() and BN_pseudo_rand_range() has been identical to
+BN_rand_range().
+The "pseudo" functions should not be used and may be deprecated in
+a future release.
+
+=item *
+
+BN_priv_rand() and BN_priv_rand_range() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<RAND_add(3)>,
+L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<RAND_priv_bytes(3)>,
+L<RAND(7)>,
+L<RAND_DRBG(7)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_security_bits.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_security_bits.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1aed85a71a9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_security_bits.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_security_bits - returns bits of security based on given numbers
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_security_bits(int L, int N);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_security_bits() returns the number of bits of security provided by a
+specific algorithm and a particular key size. The bits of security is
+defined in NIST SP800-57. Currently, BN_security_bits() support two types
+of asymmetric algorithms: the FFC (Finite Field Cryptography) and IFC
+(Integer Factorization Cryptography). For FFC, e.g., DSA and DH, both
+parameters B<L> and B<N> are used to decide the bits of security, where
+B<L> is the size of the public key and B<N> is the size of the private
+key. For IFC, e.g., RSA, only B<L> is used and it's commonly considered
+to be the key size (modulus).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Number of security bits.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+ECC (Elliptic Curve Cryptography) is not covered by the BN_security_bits()
+function. The symmetric algorithms are not covered neither.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BN_security_bits() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_security_bits(3)>, L<DSA_security_bits(3)>, L<RSA_security_bits(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..af02983c8fb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_set_bit.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_set_bit, BN_clear_bit, BN_is_bit_set, BN_mask_bits, BN_lshift,
+BN_lshift1, BN_rshift, BN_rshift1 - bit operations on BIGNUMs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ int BN_set_bit(BIGNUM *a, int n);
+ int BN_clear_bit(BIGNUM *a, int n);
+
+ int BN_is_bit_set(const BIGNUM *a, int n);
+
+ int BN_mask_bits(BIGNUM *a, int n);
+
+ int BN_lshift(BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a, int n);
+ int BN_lshift1(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a);
+
+ int BN_rshift(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, int n);
+ int BN_rshift1(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_set_bit() sets bit B<n> in B<a> to 1 (C<a|=(1E<lt>E<lt>n)>). The
+number is expanded if necessary.
+
+BN_clear_bit() sets bit B<n> in B<a> to 0 (C<a&=~(1E<lt>E<lt>n)>). An
+error occurs if B<a> is shorter than B<n> bits.
+
+BN_is_bit_set() tests if bit B<n> in B<a> is set.
+
+BN_mask_bits() truncates B<a> to an B<n> bit number
+(C<a&=~((~0)E<gt>E<gt>n)>).  An error occurs if B<a> already is
+shorter than B<n> bits.
+
+BN_lshift() shifts B<a> left by B<n> bits and places the result in
+B<r> (C<r=a*2^n>). Note that B<n> must be non-negative. BN_lshift1() shifts
+B<a> left by one and places the result in B<r> (C<r=2*a>).
+
+BN_rshift() shifts B<a> right by B<n> bits and places the result in
+B<r> (C<r=a/2^n>). Note that B<n> must be non-negative. BN_rshift1() shifts
+B<a> right by one and places the result in B<r> (C<r=a/2>).
+
+For the shift functions, B<r> and B<a> may be the same variable.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_is_bit_set() returns 1 if the bit is set, 0 otherwise.
+
+All other functions return 1 for success, 0 on error. The error codes
+can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BN_num_bytes(3)>, L<BN_add(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_swap.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_swap.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d097a3e1cc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_swap.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_swap - exchange BIGNUMs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ void BN_swap(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+BN_swap() exchanges the values of I<a> and I<b>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_swap() does not return a value.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_zero.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_zero.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d7744bf2ae6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BN_zero.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BN_zero, BN_one, BN_value_one, BN_set_word, BN_get_word - BIGNUM assignment
+operations
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/bn.h>
+
+ void BN_zero(BIGNUM *a);
+ int BN_one(BIGNUM *a);
+
+ const BIGNUM *BN_value_one(void);
+
+ int BN_set_word(BIGNUM *a, BN_ULONG w);
+ unsigned BN_ULONG BN_get_word(BIGNUM *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+B<BN_ULONG> is a macro that will be an unsigned integral type optimized
+for the most efficient implementation on the local platform.
+
+BN_zero(), BN_one() and BN_set_word() set B<a> to the values 0, 1 and
+B<w> respectively.  BN_zero() and BN_one() are macros.
+
+BN_value_one() returns a B<BIGNUM> constant of value 1. This constant
+is useful for use in comparisons and assignment.
+
+BN_get_word() returns B<a>, if it can be represented as a B<BN_ULONG>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BN_get_word() returns the value B<a>, or all-bits-set if B<a> cannot
+be represented as a single integer.
+
+BN_one() and BN_set_word() return 1 on success, 0 otherwise.
+BN_value_one() returns the constant.
+BN_zero() never fails and returns no value.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+If a B<BIGNUM> is equal to the value of all-bits-set, it will collide
+with the error condition returned by BN_get_word() which uses that
+as an error value.
+
+B<BN_ULONG> should probably be a typedef.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<BN_bn2bin(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+In OpenSSL 0.9.8, BN_zero() was changed to not return a value; previous
+versions returned an int.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BUF_MEM_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BUF_MEM_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..61922502a3f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/BUF_MEM_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+BUF_MEM_new, BUF_MEM_new_ex, BUF_MEM_free, BUF_MEM_grow,
+BUF_MEM_grow_clean, BUF_reverse
+- simple character array structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/buffer.h>
+
+ BUF_MEM *BUF_MEM_new(void);
+
+ BUF_MEM *BUF_MEM_new_ex(unsigned long flags);
+
+ void BUF_MEM_free(BUF_MEM *a);
+
+ int BUF_MEM_grow(BUF_MEM *str, int len);
+ size_t BUF_MEM_grow_clean(BUF_MEM *str, size_t len);
+
+ void BUF_reverse(unsigned char *out, const unsigned char *in, size_t size);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The buffer library handles simple character arrays. Buffers are used for
+various purposes in the library, most notably memory BIOs.
+
+BUF_MEM_new() allocates a new buffer of zero size.
+
+BUF_MEM_new_ex() allocates a buffer with the specified flags.
+The flag B<BUF_MEM_FLAG_SECURE> specifies that the B<data> pointer
+should be allocated on the secure heap; see L<CRYPTO_secure_malloc(3)>.
+
+BUF_MEM_free() frees up an already existing buffer. The data is zeroed
+before freeing up in case the buffer contains sensitive data.
+
+BUF_MEM_grow() changes the size of an already existing buffer to
+B<len>. Any data already in the buffer is preserved if it increases in
+size.
+
+BUF_MEM_grow_clean() is similar to BUF_MEM_grow() but it sets any free'd
+or additionally-allocated memory to zero.
+
+BUF_reverse() reverses B<size> bytes at B<in> into B<out>.  If B<in>
+is NULL, the array is reversed in-place.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+BUF_MEM_new() returns the buffer or NULL on error.
+
+BUF_MEM_free() has no return value.
+
+BUF_MEM_grow() and BUF_MEM_grow_clean() return
+zero on error or the new size (i.e., B<len>).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<bio(7)>,
+L<CRYPTO_secure_malloc(3)>.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+BUF_MEM_new_ex() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add0_cert.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add0_cert.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9fbbe9d86048
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add0_cert.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_add0_cert, CMS_add1_cert, CMS_get1_certs, CMS_add0_crl, CMS_add1_crl, CMS_get1_crls
+- CMS certificate and CRL utility functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_add0_cert(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, X509 *cert);
+ int CMS_add1_cert(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, X509 *cert);
+ STACK_OF(X509) *CMS_get1_certs(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+ int CMS_add0_crl(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, X509_CRL *crl);
+ int CMS_add1_crl(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, X509_CRL *crl);
+ STACK_OF(X509_CRL) *CMS_get1_crls(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_add0_cert() and CMS_add1_cert() add certificate B<cert> to B<cms>.
+must be of type signed data or enveloped data.
+
+CMS_get1_certs() returns all certificates in B<cms>.
+
+CMS_add0_crl() and CMS_add1_crl() add CRL B<crl> to B<cms>. CMS_get1_crls()
+returns any CRLs in B<cms>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The CMS_ContentInfo structure B<cms> must be of type signed data or enveloped
+data or an error will be returned.
+
+For signed data certificates and CRLs are added to the B<certificates> and
+B<crls> fields of SignedData structure. For enveloped data they are added to
+B<OriginatorInfo>.
+
+As the B<0> implies CMS_add0_cert() adds B<cert> internally to B<cms> and it
+must not be freed up after the call as opposed to CMS_add1_cert() where B<cert>
+must be freed up.
+
+The same certificate or CRL must not be added to the same cms structure more
+than once.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_add0_cert(), CMS_add1_cert() and CMS_add0_crl() and CMS_add1_crl() return
+1 for success and 0 for failure.
+
+CMS_get1_certs() and CMS_get1_crls() return the STACK of certificates or CRLs
+or NULL if there are none or an error occurs. The only error which will occur
+in practice is if the B<cms> type is invalid.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<CMS_sign(3)>,
+L<CMS_encrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_recipient_cert.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_recipient_cert.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56399f92895b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_recipient_cert.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_add1_recipient_cert, CMS_add0_recipient_key - add recipients to a CMS enveloped data structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_RecipientInfo *CMS_add1_recipient_cert(CMS_ContentInfo *cms,
+                                            X509 *recip, unsigned int flags);
+
+ CMS_RecipientInfo *CMS_add0_recipient_key(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, int nid,
+                                           unsigned char *key, size_t keylen,
+                                           unsigned char *id, size_t idlen,
+                                           ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME *date,
+                                           ASN1_OBJECT *otherTypeId,
+                                           ASN1_TYPE *otherType);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_add1_recipient_cert() adds recipient B<recip> to CMS_ContentInfo enveloped
+data structure B<cms> as a KeyTransRecipientInfo structure.
+
+CMS_add0_recipient_key() adds symmetric key B<key> of length B<keylen> using
+wrapping algorithm B<nid>, identifier B<id> of length B<idlen> and optional
+values B<date>, B<otherTypeId> and B<otherType> to CMS_ContentInfo enveloped
+data structure B<cms> as a KEKRecipientInfo structure.
+
+The CMS_ContentInfo structure should be obtained from an initial call to
+CMS_encrypt() with the flag B<CMS_PARTIAL> set.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The main purpose of this function is to provide finer control over a CMS
+enveloped data structure where the simpler CMS_encrypt() function defaults are
+not appropriate. For example if one or more KEKRecipientInfo structures
+need to be added. New attributes can also be added using the returned
+CMS_RecipientInfo structure and the CMS attribute utility functions.
+
+OpenSSL will by default identify recipient certificates using issuer name
+and serial number. If B<CMS_USE_KEYID> is set it will use the subject key
+identifier value instead. An error occurs if all recipient certificates do not
+have a subject key identifier extension.
+
+Currently only AES based key wrapping algorithms are supported for B<nid>,
+specifically: NID_id_aes128_wrap, NID_id_aes192_wrap and NID_id_aes256_wrap.
+If B<nid> is set to B<NID_undef> then an AES wrap algorithm will be used
+consistent with B<keylen>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_add1_recipient_cert() and CMS_add0_recipient_key() return an internal
+pointer to the CMS_RecipientInfo structure just added or NULL if an error
+occurs.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_decrypt(3)>,
+L<CMS_final(3)>,
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_signer.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_signer.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..48d0154e41c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_add1_signer.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_add1_signer, CMS_SignerInfo_sign - add a signer to a CMS_ContentInfo signed data structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_SignerInfo *CMS_add1_signer(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, X509 *signcert,
+                                 EVP_PKEY *pkey, const EVP_MD *md,
+                                 unsigned int flags);
+
+ int CMS_SignerInfo_sign(CMS_SignerInfo *si);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_add1_signer() adds a signer with certificate B<signcert> and private
+key B<pkey> using message digest B<md> to CMS_ContentInfo SignedData
+structure B<cms>.
+
+The CMS_ContentInfo structure should be obtained from an initial call to
+CMS_sign() with the flag B<CMS_PARTIAL> set or in the case or re-signing a
+valid CMS_ContentInfo SignedData structure.
+
+If the B<md> parameter is B<NULL> then the default digest for the public
+key algorithm will be used.
+
+Unless the B<CMS_REUSE_DIGEST> flag is set the returned CMS_ContentInfo
+structure is not complete and must be finalized either by streaming (if
+applicable) or a call to CMS_final().
+
+The CMS_SignerInfo_sign() function will explicitly sign a CMS_SignerInfo
+structure, its main use is when B<CMS_REUSE_DIGEST> and B<CMS_PARTIAL> flags
+are both set.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The main purpose of CMS_add1_signer() is to provide finer control
+over a CMS signed data structure where the simpler CMS_sign() function defaults
+are not appropriate. For example if multiple signers or non default digest
+algorithms are needed. New attributes can also be added using the returned
+CMS_SignerInfo structure and the CMS attribute utility functions or the
+CMS signed receipt request functions.
+
+Any of the following flags (ored together) can be passed in the B<flags>
+parameter.
+
+If B<CMS_REUSE_DIGEST> is set then an attempt is made to copy the content
+digest value from the CMS_ContentInfo structure: to add a signer to an existing
+structure.  An error occurs if a matching digest value cannot be found to copy.
+The returned CMS_ContentInfo structure will be valid and finalized when this
+flag is set.
+
+If B<CMS_PARTIAL> is set in addition to B<CMS_REUSE_DIGEST> then the
+CMS_SignerInfo structure will not be finalized so additional attributes
+can be added. In this case an explicit call to CMS_SignerInfo_sign() is
+needed to finalize it.
+
+If B<CMS_NOCERTS> is set the signer's certificate will not be included in the
+CMS_ContentInfo structure, the signer's certificate must still be supplied in
+the B<signcert> parameter though. This can reduce the size of the signature if
+the signers certificate can be obtained by other means: for example a
+previously signed message.
+
+The SignedData structure includes several CMS signedAttributes including the
+signing time, the CMS content type and the supported list of ciphers in an
+SMIMECapabilities attribute. If B<CMS_NOATTR> is set then no signedAttributes
+will be used. If B<CMS_NOSMIMECAP> is set then just the SMIMECapabilities are
+omitted.
+
+OpenSSL will by default identify signing certificates using issuer name
+and serial number. If B<CMS_USE_KEYID> is set it will use the subject key
+identifier value instead. An error occurs if the signing certificate does not
+have a subject key identifier extension.
+
+If present the SMIMECapabilities attribute indicates support for the following
+algorithms in preference order: 256 bit AES, Gost R3411-94, Gost 28147-89, 192
+bit AES, 128 bit AES, triple DES, 128 bit RC2, 64 bit RC2, DES and 40 bit RC2.
+If any of these algorithms is not available then it will not be included: for example the GOST algorithms will not be included if the GOST ENGINE is
+not loaded.
+
+CMS_add1_signer() returns an internal pointer to the CMS_SignerInfo
+structure just added, this can be used to set additional attributes
+before it is finalized.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_add1_signer() returns an internal pointer to the CMS_SignerInfo
+structure just added or NULL if an error occurs.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>,
+L<CMS_final(3)>,
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2014-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_compress.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_compress.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e40510831fce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_compress.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_compress - create a CMS CompressedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_ContentInfo *CMS_compress(BIO *in, int comp_nid, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_compress() creates and returns a CMS CompressedData structure. B<comp_nid>
+is the compression algorithm to use or B<NID_undef> to use the default
+algorithm (zlib compression). B<in> is the content to be compressed.
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The only currently supported compression algorithm is zlib using the NID
+NID_zlib_compression.
+
+If zlib support is not compiled into OpenSSL then CMS_compress() will return
+an error.
+
+If the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are
+prepended to the data.
+
+Normally the supplied content is translated into MIME canonical format (as
+required by the S/MIME specifications) if B<CMS_BINARY> is set no translation
+occurs. This option should be used if the supplied data is in binary format
+otherwise the translation will corrupt it. If B<CMS_BINARY> is set then
+B<CMS_TEXT> is ignored.
+
+If the B<CMS_STREAM> flag is set a partial B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+returned suitable for streaming I/O: no data is read from the BIO B<in>.
+
+The compressed data is included in the CMS_ContentInfo structure, unless
+B<CMS_DETACHED> is set in which case it is omitted. This is rarely used in
+practice and is not supported by SMIME_write_CMS().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If the flag B<CMS_STREAM> is set the returned B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+B<not> complete and outputting its contents via a function that does not
+properly finalize the B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure will give unpredictable
+results.
+
+Several functions including SMIME_write_CMS(), i2d_CMS_bio_stream(),
+PEM_write_bio_CMS_stream() finalize the structure. Alternatively finalization
+can be performed by obtaining the streaming ASN1 B<BIO> directly using
+BIO_new_CMS().
+
+Additional compression parameters such as the zlib compression level cannot
+currently be set.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_compress() returns either a CMS_ContentInfo structure or NULL if an error
+occurred. The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_uncompress(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<CMS_STREAM> flag was added in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_decrypt.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_decrypt.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b9f2c28447c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_decrypt.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_decrypt - decrypt content from a CMS envelopedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_decrypt(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, EVP_PKEY *pkey, X509 *cert,
+                 BIO *dcont, BIO *out, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_decrypt() extracts and decrypts the content from a CMS EnvelopedData
+structure. B<pkey> is the private key of the recipient, B<cert> is the
+recipient's certificate, B<out> is a BIO to write the content to and
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+The B<dcont> parameter is used in the rare case where the encrypted content
+is detached. It will normally be set to NULL.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Although the recipients certificate is not needed to decrypt the data it is
+needed to locate the appropriate (of possible several) recipients in the CMS
+structure.
+
+If B<cert> is set to NULL all possible recipients are tried. This case however
+is problematic. To thwart the MMA attack (Bleichenbacher's attack on
+PKCS #1 v1.5 RSA padding) all recipients are tried whether they succeed or
+not. If no recipient succeeds then a random symmetric key is used to decrypt
+the content: this will typically output garbage and may (but is not guaranteed
+to) ultimately return a padding error only. If CMS_decrypt() just returned an
+error when all recipient encrypted keys failed to decrypt an attacker could
+use this in a timing attack. If the special flag B<CMS_DEBUG_DECRYPT> is set
+then the above behaviour is modified and an error B<is> returned if no
+recipient encrypted key can be decrypted B<without> generating a random
+content encryption key. Applications should use this flag with
+B<extreme caution> especially in automated gateways as it can leave them
+open to attack.
+
+It is possible to determine the correct recipient key by other means (for
+example looking them up in a database) and setting them in the CMS structure
+in advance using the CMS utility functions such as CMS_set1_pkey(). In this
+case both B<cert> and B<pkey> should be set to NULL.
+
+To process KEKRecipientInfo types CMS_set1_key() or CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_key()
+and CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt() should be called before CMS_decrypt() and
+B<cert> and B<pkey> set to NULL.
+
+The following flags can be passed in the B<flags> parameter.
+
+If the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are deleted
+from the content. If the content is not of type B<text/plain> then an error is
+returned.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_decrypt() returns either 1 for success or 0 for failure.
+The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3)
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The lack of single pass processing and the need to hold all data in memory as
+mentioned in CMS_verify() also applies to CMS_decrypt().
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_encrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_encrypt.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_encrypt.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2fc8084bf441
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_encrypt.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_encrypt - create a CMS envelopedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_ContentInfo *CMS_encrypt(STACK_OF(X509) *certs, BIO *in,
+                              const EVP_CIPHER *cipher, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_encrypt() creates and returns a CMS EnvelopedData structure. B<certs>
+is a list of recipient certificates. B<in> is the content to be encrypted.
+B<cipher> is the symmetric cipher to use. B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Only certificates carrying RSA, Diffie-Hellman or EC keys are supported by this
+function.
+
+EVP_des_ede3_cbc() (triple DES) is the algorithm of choice for S/MIME use
+because most clients will support it.
+
+The algorithm passed in the B<cipher> parameter must support ASN1 encoding of
+its parameters.
+
+Many browsers implement a "sign and encrypt" option which is simply an S/MIME
+envelopedData containing an S/MIME signed message. This can be readily produced
+by storing the S/MIME signed message in a memory BIO and passing it to
+CMS_encrypt().
+
+The following flags can be passed in the B<flags> parameter.
+
+If the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are
+prepended to the data.
+
+Normally the supplied content is translated into MIME canonical format (as
+required by the S/MIME specifications) if B<CMS_BINARY> is set no translation
+occurs. This option should be used if the supplied data is in binary format
+otherwise the translation will corrupt it. If B<CMS_BINARY> is set then
+B<CMS_TEXT> is ignored.
+
+OpenSSL will by default identify recipient certificates using issuer name
+and serial number. If B<CMS_USE_KEYID> is set it will use the subject key
+identifier value instead. An error occurs if all recipient certificates do not
+have a subject key identifier extension.
+
+If the B<CMS_STREAM> flag is set a partial B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+returned suitable for streaming I/O: no data is read from the BIO B<in>.
+
+If the B<CMS_PARTIAL> flag is set a partial B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+returned to which additional recipients and attributes can be added before
+finalization.
+
+The data being encrypted is included in the CMS_ContentInfo structure, unless
+B<CMS_DETACHED> is set in which case it is omitted. This is rarely used in
+practice and is not supported by SMIME_write_CMS().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If the flag B<CMS_STREAM> is set the returned B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+B<not> complete and outputting its contents via a function that does not
+properly finalize the B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure will give unpredictable
+results.
+
+Several functions including SMIME_write_CMS(), i2d_CMS_bio_stream(),
+PEM_write_bio_CMS_stream() finalize the structure. Alternatively finalization
+can be performed by obtaining the streaming ASN1 B<BIO> directly using
+BIO_new_CMS().
+
+The recipients specified in B<certs> use a CMS KeyTransRecipientInfo info
+structure. KEKRecipientInfo is also supported using the flag B<CMS_PARTIAL>
+and CMS_add0_recipient_key().
+
+The parameter B<certs> may be NULL if B<CMS_PARTIAL> is set and recipients
+added later using CMS_add1_recipient_cert() or CMS_add0_recipient_key().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_encrypt() returns either a CMS_ContentInfo structure or NULL if an error
+occurred. The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_decrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<CMS_STREAM> flag was first supported in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_final.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_final.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..264fe7bc3b1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_final.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_final - finalise a CMS_ContentInfo structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_final(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, BIO *data, BIO *dcont, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_final() finalises the structure B<cms>. It's purpose is to perform any
+operations necessary on B<cms> (digest computation for example) and set the
+appropriate fields. The parameter B<data> contains the content to be
+processed. The B<dcont> parameter contains a BIO to write content to after
+processing: this is only used with detached data and will usually be set to
+NULL.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+This function will normally be called when the B<CMS_PARTIAL> flag is used. It
+should only be used when streaming is not performed because the streaming
+I/O functions perform finalisation operations internally.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_final() returns 1 for success or 0 for failure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>,
+L<CMS_encrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_RecipientInfos.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_RecipientInfos.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ba4a60ad05ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_RecipientInfos.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_get0_RecipientInfos, CMS_RecipientInfo_type,
+CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_get0_signer_id, CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_cert_cmp,
+CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_pkey, CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_get0_id,
+CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_id_cmp, CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_key,
+CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt, CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt
+- CMS envelopedData RecipientInfo routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ STACK_OF(CMS_RecipientInfo) *CMS_get0_RecipientInfos(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_type(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri);
+
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_get0_signer_id(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri,
+                                           ASN1_OCTET_STRING **keyid,
+                                           X509_NAME **issuer,
+                                           ASN1_INTEGER **sno);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_cert_cmp(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri, X509 *cert);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_pkey(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri, EVP_PKEY *pkey);
+
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_get0_id(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri, X509_ALGOR **palg,
+                                     ASN1_OCTET_STRING **pid,
+                                     ASN1_GENERALIZEDTIME **pdate,
+                                     ASN1_OBJECT **potherid,
+                                     ASN1_TYPE **pothertype);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_id_cmp(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri,
+                                    const unsigned char *id, size_t idlen);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_key(CMS_RecipientInfo *ri,
+                                unsigned char *key, size_t keylen);
+
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, CMS_RecipientInfo *ri);
+ int CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, CMS_RecipientInfo *ri);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The function CMS_get0_RecipientInfos() returns all the CMS_RecipientInfo
+structures associated with a CMS EnvelopedData structure.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_type() returns the type of CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>.
+It will currently return CMS_RECIPINFO_TRANS, CMS_RECIPINFO_AGREE,
+CMS_RECIPINFO_KEK, CMS_RECIPINFO_PASS, or CMS_RECIPINFO_OTHER.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_get0_signer_id() retrieves the certificate recipient
+identifier associated with a specific CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>, which
+must be of type CMS_RECIPINFO_TRANS. Either the keyidentifier will be set in
+B<keyid> or B<both> issuer name and serial number in B<issuer> and B<sno>.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_cert_cmp() compares the certificate B<cert> against the
+CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>, which must be of type CMS_RECIPINFO_TRANS.
+It returns zero if the comparison is successful and non zero if not.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_pkey() associates the private key B<pkey> with
+the CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>, which must be of type
+CMS_RECIPINFO_TRANS.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_get0_id() retrieves the key information from the
+CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri> which must be of type CMS_RECIPINFO_KEK.  Any
+of the remaining parameters can be NULL if the application is not interested in
+the value of a field. Where a field is optional and absent NULL will be written
+to the corresponding parameter. The keyEncryptionAlgorithm field is written to
+B<palg>, the B<keyIdentifier> field is written to B<pid>, the B<date> field if
+present is written to B<pdate>, if the B<other> field is present the components
+B<keyAttrId> and B<keyAttr> are written to parameters B<potherid> and
+B<pothertype>.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_id_cmp() compares the ID in the B<id> and B<idlen>
+parameters against the B<keyIdentifier> CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>,
+which must be of type CMS_RECIPINFO_KEK.  It returns zero if the comparison is
+successful and non zero if not.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_key() associates the symmetric key B<key> of length
+B<keylen> with the CMS_RecipientInfo structure B<ri>, which must be of type
+CMS_RECIPINFO_KEK.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt() attempts to decrypt CMS_RecipientInfo structure
+B<ri> in structure B<cms>. A key must have been associated with the structure
+first.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt() attempts to encrypt CMS_RecipientInfo structure
+B<ri> in structure B<cms>. A key must have been associated with the structure
+first and the content encryption key must be available: for example by a
+previous call to CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The main purpose of these functions is to enable an application to lookup
+recipient keys using any appropriate technique when the simpler method
+of CMS_decrypt() is not appropriate.
+
+In typical usage and application will retrieve all CMS_RecipientInfo structures
+using CMS_get0_RecipientInfos() and check the type of each using
+CMS_RecipientInfo_type(). Depending on the type the CMS_RecipientInfo structure
+can be ignored or its key identifier data retrieved using an appropriate
+function. Then if the corresponding secret or private key can be obtained by
+any appropriate means it can then associated with the structure and
+CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt() called. If successful CMS_decrypt() can be called
+with a NULL key to decrypt the enveloped content.
+
+The CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt() can be used to add a new recipient to an
+existing enveloped data structure. Typically an application will first decrypt
+an appropriate CMS_RecipientInfo structure to make the content encrypt key
+available, it will then add a new recipient using a function such as
+CMS_add1_recipient_cert() and finally encrypt the content encryption key
+using CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_get0_RecipientInfos() returns all CMS_RecipientInfo structures, or NULL if
+an error occurs.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_get0_signer_id(), CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_pkey(),
+CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_get0_id(), CMS_RecipientInfo_set0_key() and
+CMS_RecipientInfo_decrypt() return 1 for success or 0 if an error occurs.
+CMS_RecipientInfo_encrypt() return 1 for success or 0 if an error occurs.
+
+CMS_RecipientInfo_ktri_cert_cmp() and CMS_RecipientInfo_kekri_cmp() return 0
+for a successful comparison and non zero otherwise.
+
+Any error can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_decrypt(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_SignerInfos.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_SignerInfos.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..694b614b481d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_SignerInfos.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_set1_signer_cert,
+CMS_get0_SignerInfos, CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signer_id,
+CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signature, CMS_SignerInfo_cert_cmp
+- CMS signedData signer functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ STACK_OF(CMS_SignerInfo) *CMS_get0_SignerInfos(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+ int CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signer_id(CMS_SignerInfo *si, ASN1_OCTET_STRING **keyid,
+                                   X509_NAME **issuer, ASN1_INTEGER **sno);
+ ASN1_OCTET_STRING *CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signature(CMS_SignerInfo *si);
+ int CMS_SignerInfo_cert_cmp(CMS_SignerInfo *si, X509 *cert);
+ void CMS_SignerInfo_set1_signer_cert(CMS_SignerInfo *si, X509 *signer);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The function CMS_get0_SignerInfos() returns all the CMS_SignerInfo structures
+associated with a CMS signedData structure.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signer_id() retrieves the certificate signer identifier
+associated with a specific CMS_SignerInfo structure B<si>. Either the
+keyidentifier will be set in B<keyid> or B<both> issuer name and serial number
+in B<issuer> and B<sno>.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signature() retrieves the signature associated with
+B<si> in a pointer to an ASN1_OCTET_STRING structure. This pointer returned
+corresponds to the internal signature value if B<si> so it may be read or
+modified.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_cert_cmp() compares the certificate B<cert> against the signer
+identifier B<si>. It returns zero if the comparison is successful and non zero
+if not.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_set1_signer_cert() sets the signers certificate of B<si> to
+B<signer>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The main purpose of these functions is to enable an application to lookup
+signers certificates using any appropriate technique when the simpler method
+of CMS_verify() is not appropriate.
+
+In typical usage and application will retrieve all CMS_SignerInfo structures
+using CMS_get0_SignerInfo() and retrieve the identifier information using
+CMS. It will then obtain the signer certificate by some unspecified means
+(or return and error if it cannot be found) and set it using
+CMS_SignerInfo_set1_signer_cert().
+
+Once all signer certificates have been set CMS_verify() can be used.
+
+Although CMS_get0_SignerInfos() can return NULL if an error occurs B<or> if
+there are no signers this is not a problem in practice because the only
+error which can occur is if the B<cms> structure is not of type signedData
+due to application error.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_get0_SignerInfos() returns all CMS_SignerInfo structures, or NULL there
+are no signers or an error occurs.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_get0_signer_id() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_cert_cmp() returns 0 for a successful comparison and non
+zero otherwise.
+
+CMS_SignerInfo_set1_signer_cert() does not return a value.
+
+Any error can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_verify(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_type.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_type.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cad8d3f66280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get0_type.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_get0_type, CMS_set1_eContentType, CMS_get0_eContentType, CMS_get0_content - get and set CMS content types and content
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ const ASN1_OBJECT *CMS_get0_type(const CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+ int CMS_set1_eContentType(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, const ASN1_OBJECT *oid);
+ const ASN1_OBJECT *CMS_get0_eContentType(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+ ASN1_OCTET_STRING **CMS_get0_content(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_get0_type() returns the content type of a CMS_ContentInfo structure as
+and ASN1_OBJECT pointer. An application can then decide how to process the
+CMS_ContentInfo structure based on this value.
+
+CMS_set1_eContentType() sets the embedded content type of a CMS_ContentInfo
+structure. It should be called with CMS functions with the B<CMS_PARTIAL>
+flag and B<before> the structure is finalised, otherwise the results are
+undefined.
+
+ASN1_OBJECT *CMS_get0_eContentType() returns a pointer to the embedded
+content type.
+
+CMS_get0_content() returns a pointer to the B<ASN1_OCTET_STRING> pointer
+containing the embedded content.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+As the B<0> implies CMS_get0_type(), CMS_get0_eContentType() and
+CMS_get0_content() return internal pointers which should B<not> be freed up.
+CMS_set1_eContentType() copies the supplied OID and it B<should> be freed up
+after use.
+
+The B<ASN1_OBJECT> values returned can be converted to an integer B<NID> value
+using OBJ_obj2nid(). For the currently supported content types the following
+values are returned:
+
+ NID_pkcs7_data
+ NID_pkcs7_signed
+ NID_pkcs7_digest
+ NID_id_smime_ct_compressedData:
+ NID_pkcs7_encrypted
+ NID_pkcs7_enveloped
+
+The return value of CMS_get0_content() is a pointer to the B<ASN1_OCTET_STRING>
+content pointer. That means that for example:
+
+ ASN1_OCTET_STRING **pconf = CMS_get0_content(cms);
+
+B<*pconf> could be NULL if there is no embedded content. Applications can
+access, modify or create the embedded content in a B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure
+using this function. Applications usually will not need to modify the
+embedded content as it is normally set by higher level functions.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_get0_type() and CMS_get0_eContentType() return and ASN1_OBJECT structure.
+
+CMS_set1_eContentType() returns 1 for success or 0 if an error occurred.  The
+error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30a3626e1e78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_ReceiptRequest_create0, CMS_add1_ReceiptRequest, CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest, CMS_ReceiptRequest_get0_values - CMS signed receipt request functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_ReceiptRequest *CMS_ReceiptRequest_create0(unsigned char *id, int idlen,
+                                                int allorfirst,
+                                                STACK_OF(GENERAL_NAMES) *receiptList,
+                                                STACK_OF(GENERAL_NAMES) *receiptsTo);
+ int CMS_add1_ReceiptRequest(CMS_SignerInfo *si, CMS_ReceiptRequest *rr);
+ int CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest(CMS_SignerInfo *si, CMS_ReceiptRequest **prr);
+ void CMS_ReceiptRequest_get0_values(CMS_ReceiptRequest *rr, ASN1_STRING **pcid,
+                                     int *pallorfirst,
+                                     STACK_OF(GENERAL_NAMES) **plist,
+                                     STACK_OF(GENERAL_NAMES) **prto);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_ReceiptRequest_create0() creates a signed receipt request structure. The
+B<signedContentIdentifier> field is set using B<id> and B<idlen>, or it is set
+to 32 bytes of pseudo random data if B<id> is NULL. If B<receiptList> is NULL
+the allOrFirstTier option in B<receiptsFrom> is used and set to the value of
+the B<allorfirst> parameter. If B<receiptList> is not NULL the B<receiptList>
+option in B<receiptsFrom> is used. The B<receiptsTo> parameter specifies the
+B<receiptsTo> field value.
+
+The CMS_add1_ReceiptRequest() function adds a signed receipt request B<rr>
+to SignerInfo structure B<si>.
+
+int CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest() looks for a signed receipt request in B<si>, if
+any is found it is decoded and written to B<prr>.
+
+CMS_ReceiptRequest_get0_values() retrieves the values of a receipt request.
+The signedContentIdentifier is copied to B<pcid>. If the B<allOrFirstTier>
+option of B<receiptsFrom> is used its value is copied to B<pallorfirst>
+otherwise the B<receiptList> field is copied to B<plist>. The B<receiptsTo>
+parameter is copied to B<prto>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+For more details of the meaning of the fields see RFC2634.
+
+The contents of a signed receipt should only be considered meaningful if the
+corresponding CMS_ContentInfo structure can be successfully verified using
+CMS_verify().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_ReceiptRequest_create0() returns a signed receipt request structure or
+NULL if an error occurred.
+
+CMS_add1_ReceiptRequest() returns 1 for success or 0 if an error occurred.
+
+CMS_get1_ReceiptRequest() returns 1 is a signed receipt request is found and
+decoded. It returns 0 if a signed receipt request is not present and -1 if
+it is present but malformed.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>,
+L<CMS_sign_receipt(3)>, L<CMS_verify(3)>
+L<CMS_verify_receipt(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79446b129889
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_sign - create a CMS SignedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_ContentInfo *CMS_sign(X509 *signcert, EVP_PKEY *pkey, STACK_OF(X509) *certs,
+                           BIO *data, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_sign() creates and returns a CMS SignedData structure. B<signcert> is
+the certificate to sign with, B<pkey> is the corresponding private key.
+B<certs> is an optional additional set of certificates to include in the CMS
+structure (for example any intermediate CAs in the chain). Any or all of
+these parameters can be B<NULL>, see B<NOTES> below.
+
+The data to be signed is read from BIO B<data>.
+
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Any of the following flags (ored together) can be passed in the B<flags>
+parameter.
+
+Many S/MIME clients expect the signed content to include valid MIME headers. If
+the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are prepended
+to the data.
+
+If B<CMS_NOCERTS> is set the signer's certificate will not be included in the
+CMS_ContentInfo structure, the signer's certificate must still be supplied in
+the B<signcert> parameter though. This can reduce the size of the signature if
+the signers certificate can be obtained by other means: for example a
+previously signed message.
+
+The data being signed is included in the CMS_ContentInfo structure, unless
+B<CMS_DETACHED> is set in which case it is omitted. This is used for
+CMS_ContentInfo detached signatures which are used in S/MIME plaintext signed
+messages for example.
+
+Normally the supplied content is translated into MIME canonical format (as
+required by the S/MIME specifications) if B<CMS_BINARY> is set no translation
+occurs. This option should be used if the supplied data is in binary format
+otherwise the translation will corrupt it.
+
+The SignedData structure includes several CMS signedAttributes including the
+signing time, the CMS content type and the supported list of ciphers in an
+SMIMECapabilities attribute. If B<CMS_NOATTR> is set then no signedAttributes
+will be used. If B<CMS_NOSMIMECAP> is set then just the SMIMECapabilities are
+omitted.
+
+If present the SMIMECapabilities attribute indicates support for the following
+algorithms in preference order: 256 bit AES, Gost R3411-94, Gost 28147-89, 192
+bit AES, 128 bit AES, triple DES, 128 bit RC2, 64 bit RC2, DES and 40 bit RC2.
+If any of these algorithms is not available then it will not be included: for example the GOST algorithms will not be included if the GOST ENGINE is
+not loaded.
+
+OpenSSL will by default identify signing certificates using issuer name
+and serial number. If B<CMS_USE_KEYID> is set it will use the subject key
+identifier value instead. An error occurs if the signing certificate does not
+have a subject key identifier extension.
+
+If the flags B<CMS_STREAM> is set then the returned B<CMS_ContentInfo>
+structure is just initialized ready to perform the signing operation. The
+signing is however B<not> performed and the data to be signed is not read from
+the B<data> parameter. Signing is deferred until after the data has been
+written. In this way data can be signed in a single pass.
+
+If the B<CMS_PARTIAL> flag is set a partial B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+output to which additional signers and capabilities can be added before
+finalization.
+
+If the flag B<CMS_STREAM> is set the returned B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure is
+B<not> complete and outputting its contents via a function that does not
+properly finalize the B<CMS_ContentInfo> structure will give unpredictable
+results.
+
+Several functions including SMIME_write_CMS(), i2d_CMS_bio_stream(),
+PEM_write_bio_CMS_stream() finalize the structure. Alternatively finalization
+can be performed by obtaining the streaming ASN1 B<BIO> directly using
+BIO_new_CMS().
+
+If a signer is specified it will use the default digest for the signing
+algorithm. This is B<SHA1> for both RSA and DSA keys.
+
+If B<signcert> and B<pkey> are NULL then a certificates only CMS structure is
+output.
+
+The function CMS_sign() is a basic CMS signing function whose output will be
+suitable for many purposes. For finer control of the output format the
+B<certs>, B<signcert> and B<pkey> parameters can all be B<NULL> and the
+B<CMS_PARTIAL> flag set. Then one or more signers can be added using the
+function CMS_sign_add1_signer(), non default digests can be used and custom
+attributes added. CMS_final() must then be called to finalize the
+structure if streaming is not enabled.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Some attributes such as counter signatures are not supported.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_sign() returns either a valid CMS_ContentInfo structure or NULL if an error
+occurred. The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_verify(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<CMS_STREAM> flag is only supported for detached data in OpenSSL 0.9.8,
+it is supported for embedded data in OpenSSL 1.0.0 and later.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign_receipt.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign_receipt.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d65a2081e2ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_sign_receipt.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_sign_receipt - create a CMS signed receipt
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ CMS_ContentInfo *CMS_sign_receipt(CMS_SignerInfo *si, X509 *signcert,
+                                   EVP_PKEY *pkey, STACK_OF(X509) *certs,
+                                   unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_sign_receipt() creates and returns a CMS signed receipt structure. B<si> is
+the B<CMS_SignerInfo> structure containing the signed receipt request.
+B<signcert> is the certificate to sign with, B<pkey> is the corresponding
+private key.  B<certs> is an optional additional set of certificates to include
+in the CMS structure (for example any intermediate CAs in the chain).
+
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+This functions behaves in a similar way to CMS_sign() except the flag values
+B<CMS_DETACHED>, B<CMS_BINARY>, B<CMS_NOATTR>, B<CMS_TEXT> and B<CMS_STREAM>
+are not supported since they do not make sense in the context of signed
+receipts.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_sign_receipt() returns either a valid CMS_ContentInfo structure or NULL if
+an error occurred.  The error can be obtained from ERR_get_error(3).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<CMS_verify_receipt(3)>,
+L<CMS_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_uncompress.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_uncompress.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80f9c0d168bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_uncompress.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_uncompress - uncompress a CMS CompressedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_uncompress(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, BIO *dcont, BIO *out, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_uncompress() extracts and uncompresses the content from a CMS
+CompressedData structure B<cms>. B<data> is a BIO to write the content to and
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags.
+
+The B<dcont> parameter is used in the rare case where the compressed content
+is detached. It will normally be set to NULL.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The only currently supported compression algorithm is zlib: if the structure
+indicates the use of any other algorithm an error is returned.
+
+If zlib support is not compiled into OpenSSL then CMS_uncompress() will always
+return an error.
+
+The following flags can be passed in the B<flags> parameter.
+
+If the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are deleted
+from the content. If the content is not of type B<text/plain> then an error is
+returned.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_uncompress() returns either 1 for success or 0 for failure. The error can
+be obtained from ERR_get_error(3)
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The lack of single pass processing and the need to hold all data in memory as
+mentioned in CMS_verify() also applies to CMS_decompress().
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_compress(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7187d9840ab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_verify, CMS_get0_signers - verify a CMS SignedData structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_verify(CMS_ContentInfo *cms, STACK_OF(X509) *certs, X509_STORE *store,
+                BIO *indata, BIO *out, unsigned int flags);
+
+ STACK_OF(X509) *CMS_get0_signers(CMS_ContentInfo *cms);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_verify() verifies a CMS SignedData structure. B<cms> is the CMS_ContentInfo
+structure to verify. B<certs> is a set of certificates in which to search for
+the signing certificate(s). B<store> is a trusted certificate store used for
+chain verification. B<indata> is the detached content if the content is not
+present in B<cms>. The content is written to B<out> if it is not NULL.
+
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags, which can be used to modify the verify
+operation.
+
+CMS_get0_signers() retrieves the signing certificate(s) from B<cms>, it must
+be called after a successful CMS_verify() operation.
+
+=head1 VERIFY PROCESS
+
+Normally the verify process proceeds as follows.
+
+Initially some sanity checks are performed on B<cms>. The type of B<cms> must
+be SignedData. There must be at least one signature on the data and if
+the content is detached B<indata> cannot be B<NULL>.
+
+An attempt is made to locate all the signing certificate(s), first looking in
+the B<certs> parameter (if it is not NULL) and then looking in any
+certificates contained in the B<cms> structure itself. If any signing
+certificate cannot be located the operation fails.
+
+Each signing certificate is chain verified using the B<smimesign> purpose and
+the supplied trusted certificate store. Any internal certificates in the message
+are used as untrusted CAs. If CRL checking is enabled in B<store> any internal
+CRLs are used in addition to attempting to look them up in B<store>. If any
+chain verify fails an error code is returned.
+
+Finally the signed content is read (and written to B<out> is it is not NULL)
+and the signature's checked.
+
+If all signature's verify correctly then the function is successful.
+
+Any of the following flags (ored together) can be passed in the B<flags>
+parameter to change the default verify behaviour.
+
+If B<CMS_NOINTERN> is set the certificates in the message itself are not
+searched when locating the signing certificate(s). This means that all the
+signing certificates must be in the B<certs> parameter.
+
+If B<CMS_NOCRL> is set and CRL checking is enabled in B<store> then any
+CRLs in the message itself are ignored.
+
+If the B<CMS_TEXT> flag is set MIME headers for type B<text/plain> are deleted
+from the content. If the content is not of type B<text/plain> then an error is
+returned.
+
+If B<CMS_NO_SIGNER_CERT_VERIFY> is set the signing certificates are not
+verified.
+
+If B<CMS_NO_ATTR_VERIFY> is set the signed attributes signature is not
+verified.
+
+If B<CMS_NO_CONTENT_VERIFY> is set then the content digest is not checked.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+One application of B<CMS_NOINTERN> is to only accept messages signed by
+a small number of certificates. The acceptable certificates would be passed
+in the B<certs> parameter. In this case if the signer is not one of the
+certificates supplied in B<certs> then the verify will fail because the
+signer cannot be found.
+
+In some cases the standard techniques for looking up and validating
+certificates are not appropriate: for example an application may wish to
+lookup certificates in a database or perform customised verification. This
+can be achieved by setting and verifying the signers certificates manually
+using the signed data utility functions.
+
+Care should be taken when modifying the default verify behaviour, for example
+setting B<CMS_NO_CONTENT_VERIFY> will totally disable all content verification
+and any modified content will be considered valid. This combination is however
+useful if one merely wishes to write the content to B<out> and its validity
+is not considered important.
+
+Chain verification should arguably be performed using the signing time rather
+than the current time. However since the signing time is supplied by the
+signer it cannot be trusted without additional evidence (such as a trusted
+timestamp).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_verify() returns 1 for a successful verification and zero if an error
+occurred.
+
+CMS_get0_signers() returns all signers or NULL if an error occurred.
+
+The error can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The trusted certificate store is not searched for the signing certificate,
+this is primarily due to the inadequacies of the current B<X509_STORE>
+functionality.
+
+The lack of single pass processing means that the signed content must all
+be held in memory if it is not detached.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<CMS_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify_receipt.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify_receipt.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..67735299695d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CMS_verify_receipt.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CMS_verify_receipt - verify a CMS signed receipt
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/cms.h>
+
+ int CMS_verify_receipt(CMS_ContentInfo *rcms, CMS_ContentInfo *ocms,
+                        STACK_OF(X509) *certs, X509_STORE *store,
+                        unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CMS_verify_receipt() verifies a CMS signed receipt. B<rcms> is the signed
+receipt to verify. B<ocms> is the original SignedData structure containing the
+receipt request. B<certs> is a set of certificates in which to search for the
+signing certificate. B<store> is a trusted certificate store (used for chain
+verification).
+
+B<flags> is an optional set of flags, which can be used to modify the verify
+operation.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+This functions behaves in a similar way to CMS_verify() except the flag values
+B<CMS_DETACHED>, B<CMS_BINARY>, B<CMS_TEXT> and B<CMS_STREAM> are not
+supported since they do not make sense in the context of signed receipts.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CMS_verify_receipt() returns 1 for a successful verification and zero if an
+error occurred.
+
+The error can be obtained from L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<CMS_sign_receipt(3)>,
+L<CMS_verify(3)>,
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2008-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_free.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_free.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c3debb48dce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_free.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CONF_modules_free, CONF_modules_finish, CONF_modules_unload -
+OpenSSL configuration cleanup functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/conf.h>
+
+ void CONF_modules_finish(void);
+ void CONF_modules_unload(int all);
+
+Deprecated:
+
+ #if OPENSSL_API_COMPAT < 0x10100000L
+ void CONF_modules_free(void)
+ #endif
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CONF_modules_free() closes down and frees up all memory allocated by all
+configuration modules.  Normally, in versions of OpenSSL prior to 1.1.0,
+applications called
+CONF_modules_free() at exit to tidy up any configuration performed.
+
+CONF_modules_finish() calls each configuration modules B<finish> handler
+to free up any configuration that module may have performed.
+
+CONF_modules_unload() finishes and unloads configuration modules. If
+B<all> is set to B<0> only modules loaded from DSOs will be unloads. If
+B<all> is B<1> all modules, including builtin modules will be unloaded.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+None of the functions return a value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<config(5)>, L<OPENSSL_config(3)>,
+L<CONF_modules_load_file(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+CONF_modules_free() was deprecated in OpenSSL 1.1.0; do not use it.
+For more information see L<OPENSSL_init_crypto(3)>.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2004-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_load_file.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_load_file.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ecf294a2c60d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CONF_modules_load_file.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CONF_modules_load_file, CONF_modules_load - OpenSSL configuration functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/conf.h>
+
+ int CONF_modules_load_file(const char *filename, const char *appname,
+                            unsigned long flags);
+ int CONF_modules_load(const CONF *cnf, const char *appname,
+                       unsigned long flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The function CONF_modules_load_file() configures OpenSSL using file
+B<filename> and application name B<appname>. If B<filename> is NULL
+the standard OpenSSL configuration file is used. If B<appname> is
+NULL the standard OpenSSL application name B<openssl_conf> is used.
+The behaviour can be customized using B<flags>.
+
+CONF_modules_load() is identical to CONF_modules_load_file() except it
+reads configuration information from B<cnf>.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The following B<flags> are currently recognized:
+
+B<CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_ERRORS> if set errors returned by individual
+configuration modules are ignored. If not set the first module error is
+considered fatal and no further modules are loaded.
+
+Normally any modules errors will add error information to the error queue. If
+B<CONF_MFLAGS_SILENT> is set no error information is added.
+
+If B<CONF_MFLAGS_NO_DSO> is set configuration module loading from DSOs is
+disabled.
+
+B<CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_MISSING_FILE> if set will make CONF_load_modules_file()
+ignore missing configuration files. Normally a missing configuration file
+return an error.
+
+B<CONF_MFLAGS_DEFAULT_SECTION> if set and B<appname> is not NULL will use the
+default section pointed to by B<openssl_conf> if B<appname> does not exist.
+
+By using CONF_modules_load_file() with appropriate flags an application can
+customise application configuration to best suit its needs. In some cases the
+use of a configuration file is optional and its absence is not an error: in
+this case B<CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_MISSING_FILE> would be set.
+
+Errors during configuration may also be handled differently by different
+applications. For example in some cases an error may simply print out a warning
+message and the application continue. In other cases an application might
+consider a configuration file error as fatal and exit immediately.
+
+Applications can use the CONF_modules_load() function if they wish to load a
+configuration file themselves and have finer control over how errors are
+treated.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Load a configuration file and print out any errors and exit (missing file
+considered fatal):
+
+ if (CONF_modules_load_file(NULL, NULL, 0) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "FATAL: error loading configuration file\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+Load default configuration file using the section indicated by "myapp",
+tolerate missing files, but exit on other errors:
+
+ if (CONF_modules_load_file(NULL, "myapp",
+                            CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_MISSING_FILE) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "FATAL: error loading configuration file\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+     exit(1);
+ }
+
+Load custom configuration file and section, only print warnings on error,
+missing configuration file ignored:
+
+ if (CONF_modules_load_file("/something/app.cnf", "myapp",
+                            CONF_MFLAGS_IGNORE_MISSING_FILE) <= 0) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "WARNING: error loading configuration file\n");
+     ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+ }
+
+Load and parse configuration file manually, custom error handling:
+
+ FILE *fp;
+ CONF *cnf = NULL;
+ long eline;
+
+ fp = fopen("/somepath/app.cnf", "r");
+ if (fp == NULL) {
+     fprintf(stderr, "Error opening configuration file\n");
+     /* Other missing configuration file behaviour */
+ } else {
+     cnf = NCONF_new(NULL);
+     if (NCONF_load_fp(cnf, fp, &eline) == 0) {
+         fprintf(stderr, "Error on line %ld of configuration file\n", eline);
+         ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+         /* Other malformed configuration file behaviour */
+     } else if (CONF_modules_load(cnf, "appname", 0) <= 0) {
+         fprintf(stderr, "Error configuring application\n");
+         ERR_print_errors_fp(stderr);
+         /* Other configuration error behaviour */
+     }
+     fclose(fp);
+     NCONF_free(cnf);
+ }
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+These functions return 1 for success and a zero or negative value for
+failure. If module errors are not ignored the return code will reflect the
+return value of the failing module (this will always be zero or negative).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<config(5)>, L<OPENSSL_config(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2004-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..32776131936c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once,
+CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_new, CRYPTO_THREAD_read_lock, CRYPTO_THREAD_write_lock,
+CRYPTO_THREAD_unlock, CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_free,
+CRYPTO_atomic_add - OpenSSL thread support
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/crypto.h>
+
+ CRYPTO_ONCE CRYPTO_ONCE_STATIC_INIT;
+ int CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once(CRYPTO_ONCE *once, void (*init)(void));
+
+ CRYPTO_RWLOCK *CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_new(void);
+ int CRYPTO_THREAD_read_lock(CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock);
+ int CRYPTO_THREAD_write_lock(CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock);
+ int CRYPTO_THREAD_unlock(CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock);
+ void CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_free(CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock);
+
+ int CRYPTO_atomic_add(int *val, int amount, int *ret, CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+OpenSSL can be safely used in multi-threaded applications provided that
+support for the underlying OS threading API is built-in. Currently, OpenSSL
+supports the pthread and Windows APIs. OpenSSL can also be built without
+any multi-threading support, for example on platforms that don't provide
+any threading support or that provide a threading API that is not yet
+supported by OpenSSL.
+
+The following multi-threading function are provided:
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once() can be used to perform one-time initialization.
+The B<once> argument must be a pointer to a static object of type
+B<CRYPTO_ONCE> that was statically initialized to the value
+B<CRYPTO_ONCE_STATIC_INIT>.
+The B<init> argument is a pointer to a function that performs the desired
+exactly once initialization.
+In particular, this can be used to allocate locks in a thread-safe manner,
+which can then be used with the locking functions below.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_new() allocates, initializes and returns a new read/write
+lock.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_read_lock() locks the provided B<lock> for reading.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_write_lock() locks the provided B<lock> for writing.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_unlock() unlocks the previously locked B<lock>.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_free() frees the provided B<lock>.
+
+=item *
+
+CRYPTO_atomic_add() atomically adds B<amount> to B<val> and returns the
+result of the operation in B<ret>. B<lock> will be locked, unless atomic
+operations are supported on the specific platform. Because of this, if a
+variable is modified by CRYPTO_atomic_add() then CRYPTO_atomic_add() must
+be the only way that the variable is modified.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once() returns 1 on success, or 0 on error.
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_new() returns the allocated lock, or NULL on error.
+
+CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_free() returns no value.
+
+The other functions return 1 on success, or 0 on error.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+On Windows platforms the CRYPTO_THREAD_* types and functions in the
+openssl/crypto.h header are dependent on some of the types customarily
+made available by including windows.h. The application developer is
+likely to require control over when the latter is included, commonly as
+one of the first included headers. Therefore it is defined as an
+application developer's responsibility to include windows.h prior to
+crypto.h where use of CRYPTO_THREAD_* types and functions is required.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+This example safely initializes and uses a lock.
+
+ #ifdef _WIN32
+ # include <windows.h>
+ #endif
+ #include <openssl/crypto.h>
+
+ static CRYPTO_ONCE once = CRYPTO_ONCE_STATIC_INIT;
+ static CRYPTO_RWLOCK *lock;
+
+ static void myinit(void)
+ {
+     lock = CRYPTO_THREAD_lock_new();
+ }
+
+ static int mylock(void)
+ {
+     if (!CRYPTO_THREAD_run_once(&once, void init) || lock == NULL)
+         return 0;
+     return CRYPTO_THREAD_write_lock(lock);
+ }
+
+ static int myunlock(void)
+ {
+     return CRYPTO_THREAD_unlock(lock);
+ }
+
+ int serialized(void)
+ {
+     int ret = 0;
+
+     if (mylock()) {
+         /* Your code here, do not return without releasing the lock! */
+         ret = ... ;
+     }
+     myunlock();
+     return ret;
+ }
+
+Finalization of locks is an advanced topic, not covered in this example.
+This can only be done at process exit or when a dynamically loaded library is
+no longer in use and is unloaded.
+The simplest solution is to just "leak" the lock in applications and not
+repeatedly load/unload shared libraries that allocate locks.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+You can find out if OpenSSL was configured with thread support:
+
+ #include <openssl/opensslconf.h>
+ #if defined(OPENSSL_THREADS)
+     /* thread support enabled */
+ #else
+     /* no thread support */
+ #endif
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d5a2b93a082
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CRYPTO_EX_new, CRYPTO_EX_free, CRYPTO_EX_dup,
+CRYPTO_free_ex_index, CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index, CRYPTO_set_ex_data,
+CRYPTO_get_ex_data, CRYPTO_free_ex_data, CRYPTO_new_ex_data
+- functions supporting application-specific data
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/crypto.h>
+
+ int CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index(int class_index,
+                             long argl, void *argp,
+                             CRYPTO_EX_new *new_func,
+                             CRYPTO_EX_dup *dup_func,
+                             CRYPTO_EX_free *free_func);
+
+ typedef void CRYPTO_EX_new(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
+                            int idx, long argl, void *argp);
+ typedef void CRYPTO_EX_free(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
+                             int idx, long argl, void *argp);
+ typedef int CRYPTO_EX_dup(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *to, const CRYPTO_EX_DATA *from,
+                           void *from_d, int idx, long argl, void *argp);
+
+ int CRYPTO_new_ex_data(int class_index, void *obj, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad)
+
+ int CRYPTO_set_ex_data(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *r, int idx, void *arg);
+
+ void *CRYPTO_get_ex_data(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *r, int idx);
+
+ void CRYPTO_free_ex_data(int class_index, void *obj, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *r);
+
+ int CRYPTO_free_ex_index(int class_index, int idx);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Several OpenSSL structures can have application-specific data attached to them,
+known as "exdata."
+The specific structures are:
+
+    APP
+    BIO
+    DH
+    DRBG
+    DSA
+    EC_KEY
+    ENGINE
+    RSA
+    SSL
+    SSL_CTX
+    SSL_SESSION
+    UI
+    UI_METHOD
+    X509
+    X509_STORE
+    X509_STORE_CTX
+
+Each is identified by an B<CRYPTO_EX_INDEX_xxx> define in the B<crypto.h>
+header file.  In addition, B<CRYPTO_EX_INDEX_APP> is reserved for
+applications to use this facility for their own structures.
+
+The API described here is used by OpenSSL to manipulate exdata for specific
+structures.  Since the application data can be anything at all it is passed
+and retrieved as a B<void *> type.
+
+The B<CRYPTO_EX_DATA> type is opaque.  To initialize the exdata part of
+a structure, call CRYPTO_new_ex_data(). This is only necessary for
+B<CRYPTO_EX_INDEX_APP> objects.
+
+Exdata types are identified by an B<index>, an integer guaranteed to be
+unique within structures for the lifetime of the program.  Applications
+using exdata typically call B<CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index> at startup, and
+store the result in a global variable, or write a wrapper function to
+provide lazy evaluation.  The B<class_index> should be one of the
+B<CRYPTO_EX_INDEX_xxx> values. The B<argl> and B<argp> parameters are saved
+to be passed to the callbacks but are otherwise not used.  In order to
+transparently manipulate exdata, three callbacks must be provided. The
+semantics of those callbacks are described below.
+
+When copying or releasing objects with exdata, the callback functions
+are called in increasing order of their B<index> value.
+
+If a dynamic library can be unloaded, it should call CRYPTO_free_ex_index()
+when this is done.
+This will replace the callbacks with no-ops
+so that applications don't crash.  Any existing exdata will be leaked.
+
+To set or get the exdata on an object, the appropriate type-specific
+routine must be used.  This is because the containing structure is opaque
+and the B<CRYPTO_EX_DATA> field is not accessible.  In both API's, the
+B<idx> parameter should be an already-created index value.
+
+When setting exdata, the pointer specified with a particular index is saved,
+and returned on a subsequent "get" call.  If the application is going to
+release the data, it must make sure to set a B<NULL> value at the index,
+to avoid likely double-free crashes.
+
+The function B<CRYPTO_free_ex_data> is used to free all exdata attached
+to a structure. The appropriate type-specific routine must be used.
+The B<class_index> identifies the structure type, the B<obj> is
+be the pointer to the actual structure, and B<r> is a pointer to the
+structure's exdata field.
+
+=head2 Callback Functions
+
+This section describes how the callback functions are used. Applications
+that are defining their own exdata using B<CYPRTO_EX_INDEX_APP> must
+call them as described here.
+
+When a structure is initially allocated (such as RSA_new()) then the
+new_func() is called for every defined index. There is no requirement
+that the entire parent, or containing, structure has been set up.
+The new_func() is typically used only to allocate memory to store the
+exdata, and perhaps an "initialized" flag within that memory.
+The exdata value should be set by calling CRYPTO_set_ex_data().
+
+When a structure is free'd (such as SSL_CTX_free()) then the
+free_func() is called for every defined index.  Again, the state of the
+parent structure is not guaranteed.  The free_func() may be called with a
+NULL pointer.
+
+Both new_func() and free_func() take the same parameters.
+The B<parent> is the pointer to the structure that contains the exdata.
+The B<ptr> is the current exdata item; for new_func() this will typically
+be NULL.  The B<r> parameter is a pointer to the exdata field of the object.
+The B<idx> is the index and is the value returned when the callbacks were
+initially registered via CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index() and can be used if
+the same callback handles different types of exdata.
+
+dup_func() is called when a structure is being copied.  This is only done
+for B<SSL>, B<SSL_SESSION>, B<EC_KEY> objects and B<BIO> chains via
+BIO_dup_chain().  The B<to> and B<from> parameters
+are pointers to the destination and source B<CRYPTO_EX_DATA> structures,
+respectively.  The B<from_d> parameter needs to be cast to a B<void **pptr>
+as the API has currently the wrong signature; that will be changed in a
+future version.  The B<*pptr> is a pointer to the source exdata.
+When the dup_func() returns, the value in B<*pptr> is copied to the
+destination ex_data.  If the pointer contained in B<*pptr> is not modified
+by the dup_func(), then both B<to> and B<from> will point to the same data.
+The B<idx>, B<argl> and B<argp> parameters are as described for the other
+two callbacks.  If the dup_func() returns B<0> the whole CRYPTO_dup_ex_data()
+will fail.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CRYPTO_get_ex_new_index() returns a new index or -1 on failure.
+
+CRYPTO_free_ex_index() and
+CRYPTO_set_ex_data() return 1 on success or 0 on failure.
+
+CRYPTO_get_ex_data() returns the application data or NULL on failure;
+note that NULL may be a valid value.
+
+dup_func() should return 0 for failure and 1 for success.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..36063b62e858
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id -
+Get a Certificate Transparency log from a CTLOG_STORE
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ct.h>
+
+ const CTLOG *CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id(const CTLOG_STORE *store,
+                                         const uint8_t *log_id,
+                                         size_t log_id_len);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A Signed Certificate Timestamp (SCT) identifies the Certificate Transparency
+(CT) log that issued it using the log's LogID (see RFC 6962, Section 3.2).
+Therefore, it is useful to be able to look up more information about a log
+(e.g. its public key) using this LogID.
+
+CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id() provides a way to do this. It will find a CTLOG
+in a CTLOG_STORE that has a given LogID.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+B<CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id> returns a CTLOG with the given LogID, if it
+exists in the given CTLOG_STORE, otherwise it returns NULL.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ct(7)>,
+L<CTLOG_STORE_new(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+This function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9816e328e3d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_STORE_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CTLOG_STORE_new, CTLOG_STORE_free,
+CTLOG_STORE_load_default_file, CTLOG_STORE_load_file -
+Create and populate a Certificate Transparency log list
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ct.h>
+
+ CTLOG_STORE *CTLOG_STORE_new(void);
+ void CTLOG_STORE_free(CTLOG_STORE *store);
+
+ int CTLOG_STORE_load_default_file(CTLOG_STORE *store);
+ int CTLOG_STORE_load_file(CTLOG_STORE *store, const char *file);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A CTLOG_STORE is a container for a list of CTLOGs (Certificate Transparency
+logs). The list can be loaded from one or more files and then searched by LogID
+(see RFC 6962, Section 3.2, for the definition of a LogID).
+
+CTLOG_STORE_new() creates an empty list of CT logs. This is then populated
+by CTLOG_STORE_load_default_file() or CTLOG_STORE_load_file().
+CTLOG_STORE_load_default_file() loads from the default file, which is named
+"ct_log_list.cnf" in OPENSSLDIR (see the output of L<version>). This can be
+overridden using an environment variable named "CTLOG_FILE".
+CTLOG_STORE_load_file() loads from a caller-specified file path instead.
+Both of these functions append any loaded CT logs to the CTLOG_STORE.
+
+The expected format of the file is:
+
+ enabled_logs=foo,bar
+
+ [foo]
+ description = Log 1
+ key = <base64-encoded DER SubjectPublicKeyInfo here>
+
+ [bar]
+ description = Log 2
+ key = <base64-encoded DER SubjectPublicKeyInfo here>
+
+Once a CTLOG_STORE is no longer required, it should be passed to
+CTLOG_STORE_free(). This will delete all of the CTLOGs stored within, along
+with the CTLOG_STORE itself.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If there are any invalid CT logs in a file, they are skipped and the remaining
+valid logs will still be added to the CTLOG_STORE. A CT log will be considered
+invalid if it is missing a "key" or "description" field.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Both B<CTLOG_STORE_load_default_file> and B<CTLOG_STORE_load_file> return 1 if
+all CT logs in the file are successfully parsed and loaded, 0 otherwise.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ct(7)>,
+L<CTLOG_STORE_get0_log_by_id(3)>,
+L<SSL_CTX_set_ctlog_list_file(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5570cbcd562e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CTLOG_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CTLOG_new, CTLOG_new_from_base64, CTLOG_free,
+CTLOG_get0_name, CTLOG_get0_log_id, CTLOG_get0_public_key -
+encapsulates information about a Certificate Transparency log
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ct.h>
+
+ CTLOG *CTLOG_new(EVP_PKEY *public_key, const char *name);
+ int CTLOG_new_from_base64(CTLOG ** ct_log,
+                           const char *pkey_base64, const char *name);
+ void CTLOG_free(CTLOG *log);
+ const char *CTLOG_get0_name(const CTLOG *log);
+ void CTLOG_get0_log_id(const CTLOG *log, const uint8_t **log_id,
+                        size_t *log_id_len);
+ EVP_PKEY *CTLOG_get0_public_key(const CTLOG *log);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+CTLOG_new() returns a new CTLOG that represents the Certificate Transparency
+(CT) log with the given public key. A name must also be provided that can be
+used to help users identify this log. Ownership of the public key is
+transferred.
+
+CTLOG_new_from_base64() also creates a new CTLOG, but takes the public key in
+base64-encoded DER form and sets the ct_log pointer to point to the new CTLOG.
+The base64 will be decoded and the public key parsed.
+
+Regardless of whether CTLOG_new() or CTLOG_new_from_base64() is used, it is the
+caller's responsibility to pass the CTLOG to CTLOG_free() once it is no longer
+needed. This will delete it and, if created by CTLOG_new(), the EVP_PKEY that
+was passed to it.
+
+CTLOG_get0_name() returns the name of the log, as provided when the CTLOG was
+created. Ownership of the string remains with the CTLOG.
+
+CTLOG_get0_log_id() sets *log_id to point to a string containing that log's
+LogID (see RFC 6962). It sets *log_id_len to the length of that LogID. For a
+v1 CT log, the LogID will be a SHA-256 hash (i.e. 32 bytes long). Ownership of
+the string remains with the CTLOG.
+
+CTLOG_get0_public_key() returns the public key of the CT log. Ownership of the
+EVP_PKEY remains with the CTLOG.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CTLOG_new() will return NULL if an error occurs.
+
+CTLOG_new_from_base64() will return 1 on success, 0 otherwise.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ct(7)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f068fde62684
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new, CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_free,
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_cert, CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_cert,
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_issuer, CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_issuer,
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_log_store, CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_shared_CTLOG_STORE,
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get_time, CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_time -
+Encapsulates the data required to evaluate whether SCTs meet a Certificate Transparency policy
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ct.h>
+
+ CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new(void);
+ void CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_free(CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx);
+ X509* CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_cert(const CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx);
+ int CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_cert(CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx, X509 *cert);
+ X509* CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_issuer(const CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx);
+ int CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_issuer(CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx, X509 *issuer);
+ const CTLOG_STORE *CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get0_log_store(const CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx);
+ void CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_shared_CTLOG_STORE(CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx,
+                                                CTLOG_STORE *log_store);
+ uint64_t CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_get_time(const CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx);
+ void CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_time(CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX *ctx, uint64_t time_in_ms);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A B<CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX> is used by functions that evaluate whether Signed
+Certificate Timestamps (SCTs) fulfil a Certificate Transparency (CT) policy.
+This policy may be, for example, that at least one valid SCT is available. To
+determine this, an SCT's timestamp and signature must be verified.
+This requires:
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+the public key of the log that issued the SCT
+
+=item *
+
+the certificate that the SCT was issued for
+
+=item *
+
+the issuer certificate (if the SCT was issued for a pre-certificate)
+
+=item *
+
+the current time
+
+=back
+
+The above requirements are met using the setters described below.
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new() creates an empty policy evaluation context. This
+should then be populated using:
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_cert() to provide the certificate the SCTs were issued for
+
+Increments the reference count of the certificate.
+
+=item *
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set1_issuer() to provide the issuer certificate
+
+Increments the reference count of the certificate.
+
+=item *
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_shared_CTLOG_STORE() to provide a list of logs that are trusted as sources of SCTs
+
+Holds a pointer to the CTLOG_STORE, so the CTLOG_STORE must outlive the
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX.
+
+=item *
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_set_time() to set the time SCTs should be compared with to determine if they are valid
+
+The SCT timestamp will be compared to this time to check whether the SCT was
+issued in the future. RFC6962 states that "TLS clients MUST reject SCTs whose
+timestamp is in the future". By default, this will be set to 5 minutes in the
+future (e.g. (time() + 300) * 1000), to allow for clock drift.
+
+The time should be in milliseconds since the Unix epoch.
+
+=back
+
+Each setter has a matching getter for accessing the current value.
+
+When no longer required, the B<CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX> should be passed to
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_free() to delete it.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The issuer certificate only needs to be provided if at least one of the SCTs
+was issued for a pre-certificate. This will be the case for SCTs embedded in a
+certificate (i.e. those in an X.509 extension), but may not be the case for SCTs
+found in the TLS SCT extension or OCSP response.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+CT_POLICY_EVAL_CTX_new() will return NULL if malloc fails.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ct(7)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+These functions were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DEFINE_STACK_OF.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DEFINE_STACK_OF.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..43a3214d584a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DEFINE_STACK_OF.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DEFINE_STACK_OF, DEFINE_STACK_OF_CONST, DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF,
+DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF_CONST,
+sk_TYPE_num, sk_TYPE_value, sk_TYPE_new, sk_TYPE_new_null,
+sk_TYPE_reserve, sk_TYPE_free, sk_TYPE_zero, sk_TYPE_delete,
+sk_TYPE_delete_ptr, sk_TYPE_push, sk_TYPE_unshift, sk_TYPE_pop,
+sk_TYPE_shift, sk_TYPE_pop_free, sk_TYPE_insert, sk_TYPE_set,
+sk_TYPE_find, sk_TYPE_find_ex, sk_TYPE_sort, sk_TYPE_is_sorted,
+sk_TYPE_dup, sk_TYPE_deep_copy, sk_TYPE_set_cmp_func, sk_TYPE_new_reserve
+- stack container
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+=for comment generic
+
+ #include <openssl/safestack.h>
+
+ STACK_OF(TYPE)
+ DEFINE_STACK_OF(TYPE)
+ DEFINE_STACK_OF_CONST(TYPE)
+ DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF(FUNCTYPE, TYPE)
+ DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF_CONST(FUNCTYPE, TYPE)
+
+ typedef int (*sk_TYPE_compfunc)(const TYPE *const *a, const TYPE *const *b);
+ typedef TYPE * (*sk_TYPE_copyfunc)(const TYPE *a);
+ typedef void (*sk_TYPE_freefunc)(TYPE *a);
+
+ int sk_TYPE_num(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_value(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx);
+ STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk_TYPE_new(sk_TYPE_compfunc compare);
+ STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk_TYPE_new_null(void);
+ int sk_TYPE_reserve(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int n);
+ void sk_TYPE_free(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ void sk_TYPE_zero(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_delete(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int i);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_delete_ptr(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, TYPE *ptr);
+ int sk_TYPE_push(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, const TYPE *ptr);
+ int sk_TYPE_unshift(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, const TYPE *ptr);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_pop(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_shift(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ void sk_TYPE_pop_free(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, sk_TYPE_freefunc freefunc);
+ int sk_TYPE_insert(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, TYPE *ptr, int idx);
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_set(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx, const TYPE *ptr);
+ int sk_TYPE_find(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, TYPE *ptr);
+ int sk_TYPE_find_ex(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, TYPE *ptr);
+ void sk_TYPE_sort(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ int sk_TYPE_is_sorted(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk_TYPE_dup(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk);
+ STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk_TYPE_deep_copy(const STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk,
+                                   sk_TYPE_copyfunc copyfunc,
+                                   sk_TYPE_freefunc freefunc);
+ sk_TYPE_compfunc (*sk_TYPE_set_cmp_func(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk,
+                                         sk_TYPE_compfunc compare));
+ STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk_TYPE_new_reserve(sk_TYPE_compfunc compare, int n);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Applications can create and use their own stacks by placing any of the macros
+described below in a header file. These macros define typesafe inline
+functions that wrap around the utility B<OPENSSL_sk_> API.
+In the description here, I<TYPE> is used
+as a placeholder for any of the OpenSSL datatypes, such as I<X509>.
+
+STACK_OF() returns the name for a stack of the specified B<TYPE>.
+DEFINE_STACK_OF() creates set of functions for a stack of B<TYPE>. This
+will mean that type B<TYPE> is stored in each stack, the type is referenced by
+STACK_OF(TYPE) and each function name begins with I<sk_TYPE_>. For example:
+
+ TYPE *sk_TYPE_value(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx);
+
+DEFINE_STACK_OF_CONST() is identical to DEFINE_STACK_OF() except
+each element is constant. For example:
+
+ const TYPE *sk_TYPE_value(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx);
+
+DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF() defines a stack of B<TYPE> but
+each function uses B<FUNCNAME> in the function name. For example:
+
+ TYPE *sk_FUNCNAME_value(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx);
+
+DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF_CONST() is similar except that each element is
+constant:
+
+ const TYPE *sk_FUNCNAME_value(STACK_OF(TYPE) *sk, int idx);
+
+sk_TYPE_num() returns the number of elements in B<sk> or -1 if B<sk> is
+B<NULL>.
+
+sk_TYPE_value() returns element B<idx> in B<sk>, where B<idx> starts at
+zero. If B<idx> is out of range then B<NULL> is returned.
+
+sk_TYPE_new() allocates a new empty stack using comparison function B<compare>.
+If B<compare> is B<NULL> then no comparison function is used. This function is
+equivalent to sk_TYPE_new_reserve(compare, 0).
+
+sk_TYPE_new_null() allocates a new empty stack with no comparison function. This
+function is equivalent to sk_TYPE_new_reserve(NULL, 0).
+
+sk_TYPE_reserve() allocates additional memory in the B<sk> structure
+such that the next B<n> calls to sk_TYPE_insert(), sk_TYPE_push()
+or sk_TYPE_unshift() will not fail or cause memory to be allocated
+or reallocated. If B<n> is zero, any excess space allocated in the
+B<sk> structure is freed. On error B<sk> is unchanged.
+
+sk_TYPE_new_reserve() allocates a new stack. The new stack will have additional
+memory allocated to hold B<n> elements if B<n> is positive. The next B<n> calls
+to sk_TYPE_insert(), sk_TYPE_push() or sk_TYPE_unshift() will not fail or cause
+memory to be allocated or reallocated. If B<n> is zero or less than zero, no
+memory is allocated. sk_TYPE_new_reserve() also sets the comparison function
+B<compare> to the newly created stack. If B<compare> is B<NULL> then no
+comparison function is used.
+
+sk_TYPE_set_cmp_func() sets the comparison function of B<sk> to B<compare>.
+The previous comparison function is returned or B<NULL> if there was
+no previous comparison function.
+
+sk_TYPE_free() frees up the B<sk> structure. It does B<not> free up any
+elements of B<sk>. After this call B<sk> is no longer valid.
+
+sk_TYPE_zero() sets the number of elements in B<sk> to zero. It does not free
+B<sk> so after this call B<sk> is still valid.
+
+sk_TYPE_pop_free() frees up all elements of B<sk> and B<sk> itself. The
+free function freefunc() is called on each element to free it.
+
+sk_TYPE_delete() deletes element B<i> from B<sk>. It returns the deleted
+element or B<NULL> if B<i> is out of range.
+
+sk_TYPE_delete_ptr() deletes element matching B<ptr> from B<sk>. It returns
+the deleted element or B<NULL> if no element matching B<ptr> was found.
+
+sk_TYPE_insert() inserts B<ptr> into B<sk> at position B<idx>. Any existing
+elements at or after B<idx> are moved downwards. If B<idx> is out of range
+the new element is appended to B<sk>. sk_TYPE_insert() either returns the
+number of elements in B<sk> after the new element is inserted or zero if
+an error (such as memory allocation failure) occurred.
+
+sk_TYPE_push() appends B<ptr> to B<sk> it is equivalent to:
+
+ sk_TYPE_insert(sk, ptr, -1);
+
+sk_TYPE_unshift() inserts B<ptr> at the start of B<sk> it is equivalent to:
+
+ sk_TYPE_insert(sk, ptr, 0);
+
+sk_TYPE_pop() returns and removes the last element from B<sk>.
+
+sk_TYPE_shift() returns and removes the first element from B<sk>.
+
+sk_TYPE_set() sets element B<idx> of B<sk> to B<ptr> replacing the current
+element. The new element value is returned or B<NULL> if an error occurred:
+this will only happen if B<sk> is B<NULL> or B<idx> is out of range.
+
+sk_TYPE_find() searches B<sk> for the element B<ptr>.  In the case
+where no comparison function has been specified, the function performs
+a linear search for a pointer equal to B<ptr>. The index of the first
+matching element is returned or B<-1> if there is no match. In the case
+where a comparison function has been specified, B<sk> is sorted then
+sk_TYPE_find() returns the index of a matching element or B<-1> if there
+is no match. Note that, in this case, the matching element returned is
+not guaranteed to be the first; the comparison function will usually
+compare the values pointed to rather than the pointers themselves and
+the order of elements in B<sk> could change.
+
+sk_TYPE_find_ex() operates like sk_TYPE_find() except when a comparison
+function has been specified and no matching element is found. Instead
+of returning B<-1>, sk_TYPE_find_ex() returns the index of the element
+either before or after the location where B<ptr> would be if it were
+present in B<sk>.
+
+sk_TYPE_sort() sorts B<sk> using the supplied comparison function.
+
+sk_TYPE_is_sorted() returns B<1> if B<sk> is sorted and B<0> otherwise.
+
+sk_TYPE_dup() returns a copy of B<sk>. Note the pointers in the copy
+are identical to the original.
+
+sk_TYPE_deep_copy() returns a new stack where each element has been copied.
+Copying is performed by the supplied copyfunc() and freeing by freefunc(). The
+function freefunc() is only called if an error occurs.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Care should be taken when accessing stacks in multi-threaded environments.
+Any operation which increases the size of a stack such as sk_TYPE_insert() or
+sk_push() can "grow" the size of an internal array and cause race conditions
+if the same stack is accessed in a different thread. Operations such as
+sk_find() and sk_sort() can also reorder the stack.
+
+Any comparison function supplied should use a metric suitable
+for use in a binary search operation. That is it should return zero, a
+positive or negative value if B<a> is equal to, greater than
+or less than B<b> respectively.
+
+Care should be taken when checking the return values of the functions
+sk_TYPE_find() and sk_TYPE_find_ex(). They return an index to the
+matching element. In particular B<0> indicates a matching first element.
+A failed search is indicated by a B<-1> return value.
+
+STACK_OF(), DEFINE_STACK_OF(), DEFINE_STACK_OF_CONST(), and
+DEFINE_SPECIAL_STACK_OF() are implemented as macros.
+
+The underlying utility B<OPENSSL_sk_> API should not be used directly.
+It defines these functions: OPENSSL_sk_deep_copy(),
+OPENSSL_sk_delete(), OPENSSL_sk_delete_ptr(), OPENSSL_sk_dup(),
+OPENSSL_sk_find(), OPENSSL_sk_find_ex(), OPENSSL_sk_free(),
+OPENSSL_sk_insert(), OPENSSL_sk_is_sorted(), OPENSSL_sk_new(),
+OPENSSL_sk_new_null(), OPENSSL_sk_num(), OPENSSL_sk_pop(),
+OPENSSL_sk_pop_free(), OPENSSL_sk_push(), OPENSSL_sk_reserve(),
+OPENSSL_sk_set(), OPENSSL_sk_set_cmp_func(), OPENSSL_sk_shift(),
+OPENSSL_sk_sort(), OPENSSL_sk_unshift(), OPENSSL_sk_value(),
+OPENSSL_sk_zero().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+sk_TYPE_num() returns the number of elements in the stack or B<-1> if the
+passed stack is B<NULL>.
+
+sk_TYPE_value() returns a pointer to a stack element or B<NULL> if the
+index is out of range.
+
+sk_TYPE_new(), sk_TYPE_new_null() and sk_TYPE_new_reserve() return an empty
+stack or B<NULL> if an error occurs.
+
+sk_TYPE_reserve() returns B<1> on successful allocation of the required memory
+or B<0> on error.
+
+sk_TYPE_set_cmp_func() returns the old comparison function or B<NULL> if
+there was no old comparison function.
+
+sk_TYPE_free(), sk_TYPE_zero(), sk_TYPE_pop_free() and sk_TYPE_sort() do
+not return values.
+
+sk_TYPE_pop(), sk_TYPE_shift(), sk_TYPE_delete() and sk_TYPE_delete_ptr()
+return a pointer to the deleted element or B<NULL> on error.
+
+sk_TYPE_insert(), sk_TYPE_push() and sk_TYPE_unshift() return the total
+number of elements in the stack and 0 if an error occurred.
+
+sk_TYPE_set() returns a pointer to the replacement element or B<NULL> on
+error.
+
+sk_TYPE_find() and sk_TYPE_find_ex() return an index to the found element
+or B<-1> on error.
+
+sk_TYPE_is_sorted() returns B<1> if the stack is sorted and B<0> if it is
+not.
+
+sk_TYPE_dup() and sk_TYPE_deep_copy() return a pointer to the copy of the
+stack.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+Before OpenSSL 1.1.0, this was implemented via macros and not inline functions
+and was not a public API.
+
+sk_TYPE_reserve() and sk_TYPE_new_reserve() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f543bea1ee7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DES_random_key.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,321 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DES_random_key, DES_set_key, DES_key_sched, DES_set_key_checked,
+DES_set_key_unchecked, DES_set_odd_parity, DES_is_weak_key,
+DES_ecb_encrypt, DES_ecb2_encrypt, DES_ecb3_encrypt, DES_ncbc_encrypt,
+DES_cfb_encrypt, DES_ofb_encrypt, DES_pcbc_encrypt, DES_cfb64_encrypt,
+DES_ofb64_encrypt, DES_xcbc_encrypt, DES_ede2_cbc_encrypt,
+DES_ede2_cfb64_encrypt, DES_ede2_ofb64_encrypt, DES_ede3_cbc_encrypt,
+DES_ede3_cfb64_encrypt, DES_ede3_ofb64_encrypt,
+DES_cbc_cksum, DES_quad_cksum, DES_string_to_key, DES_string_to_2keys,
+DES_fcrypt, DES_crypt - DES encryption
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/des.h>
+
+ void DES_random_key(DES_cblock *ret);
+
+ int DES_set_key(const_DES_cblock *key, DES_key_schedule *schedule);
+ int DES_key_sched(const_DES_cblock *key, DES_key_schedule *schedule);
+ int DES_set_key_checked(const_DES_cblock *key, DES_key_schedule *schedule);
+ void DES_set_key_unchecked(const_DES_cblock *key, DES_key_schedule *schedule);
+
+ void DES_set_odd_parity(DES_cblock *key);
+ int DES_is_weak_key(const_DES_cblock *key);
+
+ void DES_ecb_encrypt(const_DES_cblock *input, DES_cblock *output,
+                      DES_key_schedule *ks, int enc);
+ void DES_ecb2_encrypt(const_DES_cblock *input, DES_cblock *output,
+                       DES_key_schedule *ks1, DES_key_schedule *ks2, int enc);
+ void DES_ecb3_encrypt(const_DES_cblock *input, DES_cblock *output,
+                       DES_key_schedule *ks1, DES_key_schedule *ks2,
+                       DES_key_schedule *ks3, int enc);
+
+ void DES_ncbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *input, unsigned char *output,
+                       long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                       int enc);
+ void DES_cfb_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                      int numbits, long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule,
+                      DES_cblock *ivec, int enc);
+ void DES_ofb_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                      int numbits, long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule,
+                      DES_cblock *ivec);
+ void DES_pcbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *input, unsigned char *output,
+                       long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                       int enc);
+ void DES_cfb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                        long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                        int *num, int enc);
+ void DES_ofb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                        long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                        int *num);
+
+ void DES_xcbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *input, unsigned char *output,
+                       long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                       const_DES_cblock *inw, const_DES_cblock *outw, int enc);
+
+ void DES_ede2_cbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *input, unsigned char *output,
+                           long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                           DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_cblock *ivec, int enc);
+ void DES_ede2_cfb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                             long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                             DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_cblock *ivec,
+                             int *num, int enc);
+ void DES_ede2_ofb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                             long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                             DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_cblock *ivec, int *num);
+
+ void DES_ede3_cbc_encrypt(const unsigned char *input, unsigned char *output,
+                           long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                           DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_key_schedule *ks3,
+                           DES_cblock *ivec, int enc);
+ void DES_ede3_cfb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                             long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                             DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_key_schedule *ks3,
+                             DES_cblock *ivec, int *num, int enc);
+ void DES_ede3_ofb64_encrypt(const unsigned char *in, unsigned char *out,
+                             long length, DES_key_schedule *ks1,
+                             DES_key_schedule *ks2, DES_key_schedule *ks3,
+                             DES_cblock *ivec, int *num);
+
+ DES_LONG DES_cbc_cksum(const unsigned char *input, DES_cblock *output,
+                        long length, DES_key_schedule *schedule,
+                        const_DES_cblock *ivec);
+ DES_LONG DES_quad_cksum(const unsigned char *input, DES_cblock output[],
+                         long length, int out_count, DES_cblock *seed);
+ void DES_string_to_key(const char *str, DES_cblock *key);
+ void DES_string_to_2keys(const char *str, DES_cblock *key1, DES_cblock *key2);
+
+ char *DES_fcrypt(const char *buf, const char *salt, char *ret);
+ char *DES_crypt(const char *buf, const char *salt);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This library contains a fast implementation of the DES encryption
+algorithm.
+
+There are two phases to the use of DES encryption.  The first is the
+generation of a I<DES_key_schedule> from a key, the second is the
+actual encryption.  A DES key is of type I<DES_cblock>. This type is
+consists of 8 bytes with odd parity.  The least significant bit in
+each byte is the parity bit.  The key schedule is an expanded form of
+the key; it is used to speed the encryption process.
+
+DES_random_key() generates a random key.  The PRNG must be seeded
+prior to using this function (see L<RAND_bytes(3)>).  If the PRNG
+could not generate a secure key, 0 is returned.
+
+Before a DES key can be used, it must be converted into the
+architecture dependent I<DES_key_schedule> via the
+DES_set_key_checked() or DES_set_key_unchecked() function.
+
+DES_set_key_checked() will check that the key passed is of odd parity
+and is not a weak or semi-weak key.  If the parity is wrong, then -1
+is returned.  If the key is a weak key, then -2 is returned.  If an
+error is returned, the key schedule is not generated.
+
+DES_set_key() works like
+DES_set_key_checked() if the I<DES_check_key> flag is non-zero,
+otherwise like DES_set_key_unchecked().  These functions are available
+for compatibility; it is recommended to use a function that does not
+depend on a global variable.
+
+DES_set_odd_parity() sets the parity of the passed I<key> to odd.
+
+DES_is_weak_key() returns 1 if the passed key is a weak key, 0 if it
+is ok.
+
+The following routines mostly operate on an input and output stream of
+I<DES_cblock>s.
+
+DES_ecb_encrypt() is the basic DES encryption routine that encrypts or
+decrypts a single 8-byte I<DES_cblock> in I<electronic code book>
+(ECB) mode.  It always transforms the input data, pointed to by
+I<input>, into the output data, pointed to by the I<output> argument.
+If the I<encrypt> argument is non-zero (DES_ENCRYPT), the I<input>
+(cleartext) is encrypted in to the I<output> (ciphertext) using the
+key_schedule specified by the I<schedule> argument, previously set via
+I<DES_set_key>. If I<encrypt> is zero (DES_DECRYPT), the I<input> (now
+ciphertext) is decrypted into the I<output> (now cleartext).  Input
+and output may overlap.  DES_ecb_encrypt() does not return a value.
+
+DES_ecb3_encrypt() encrypts/decrypts the I<input> block by using
+three-key Triple-DES encryption in ECB mode.  This involves encrypting
+the input with I<ks1>, decrypting with the key schedule I<ks2>, and
+then encrypting with I<ks3>.  This routine greatly reduces the chances
+of brute force breaking of DES and has the advantage of if I<ks1>,
+I<ks2> and I<ks3> are the same, it is equivalent to just encryption
+using ECB mode and I<ks1> as the key.
+
+The macro DES_ecb2_encrypt() is provided to perform two-key Triple-DES
+encryption by using I<ks1> for the final encryption.
+
+DES_ncbc_encrypt() encrypts/decrypts using the I<cipher-block-chaining>
+(CBC) mode of DES.  If the I<encrypt> argument is non-zero, the
+routine cipher-block-chain encrypts the cleartext data pointed to by
+the I<input> argument into the ciphertext pointed to by the I<output>
+argument, using the key schedule provided by the I<schedule> argument,
+and initialization vector provided by the I<ivec> argument.  If the
+I<length> argument is not an integral multiple of eight bytes, the
+last block is copied to a temporary area and zero filled.  The output
+is always an integral multiple of eight bytes.
+
+DES_xcbc_encrypt() is RSA's DESX mode of DES.  It uses I<inw> and
+I<outw> to 'whiten' the encryption.  I<inw> and I<outw> are secret
+(unlike the iv) and are as such, part of the key.  So the key is sort
+of 24 bytes.  This is much better than CBC DES.
+
+DES_ede3_cbc_encrypt() implements outer triple CBC DES encryption with
+three keys. This means that each DES operation inside the CBC mode is
+an C<C=E(ks3,D(ks2,E(ks1,M)))>.  This mode is used by SSL.
+
+The DES_ede2_cbc_encrypt() macro implements two-key Triple-DES by
+reusing I<ks1> for the final encryption.  C<C=E(ks1,D(ks2,E(ks1,M)))>.
+This form of Triple-DES is used by the RSAREF library.
+
+DES_pcbc_encrypt() encrypt/decrypts using the propagating cipher block
+chaining mode used by Kerberos v4. Its parameters are the same as
+DES_ncbc_encrypt().
+
+DES_cfb_encrypt() encrypt/decrypts using cipher feedback mode.  This
+method takes an array of characters as input and outputs and array of
+characters.  It does not require any padding to 8 character groups.
+Note: the I<ivec> variable is changed and the new changed value needs to
+be passed to the next call to this function.  Since this function runs
+a complete DES ECB encryption per I<numbits>, this function is only
+suggested for use when sending small numbers of characters.
+
+DES_cfb64_encrypt()
+implements CFB mode of DES with 64bit feedback.  Why is this
+useful you ask?  Because this routine will allow you to encrypt an
+arbitrary number of bytes, no 8 byte padding.  Each call to this
+routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec
+and num.  num contains 'how far' we are though ivec.  If this does
+not make much sense, read more about cfb mode of DES :-).
+
+DES_ede3_cfb64_encrypt() and DES_ede2_cfb64_encrypt() is the same as
+DES_cfb64_encrypt() except that Triple-DES is used.
+
+DES_ofb_encrypt() encrypts using output feedback mode.  This method
+takes an array of characters as input and outputs and array of
+characters.  It does not require any padding to 8 character groups.
+Note: the I<ivec> variable is changed and the new changed value needs to
+be passed to the next call to this function.  Since this function runs
+a complete DES ECB encryption per numbits, this function is only
+suggested for use when sending small numbers of characters.
+
+DES_ofb64_encrypt() is the same as DES_cfb64_encrypt() using Output
+Feed Back mode.
+
+DES_ede3_ofb64_encrypt() and DES_ede2_ofb64_encrypt() is the same as
+DES_ofb64_encrypt(), using Triple-DES.
+
+The following functions are included in the DES library for
+compatibility with the MIT Kerberos library.
+
+DES_cbc_cksum() produces an 8 byte checksum based on the input stream
+(via CBC encryption).  The last 4 bytes of the checksum are returned
+and the complete 8 bytes are placed in I<output>. This function is
+used by Kerberos v4.  Other applications should use
+L<EVP_DigestInit(3)> etc. instead.
+
+DES_quad_cksum() is a Kerberos v4 function.  It returns a 4 byte
+checksum from the input bytes.  The algorithm can be iterated over the
+input, depending on I<out_count>, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times.  If I<output> is
+non-NULL, the 8 bytes generated by each pass are written into
+I<output>.
+
+The following are DES-based transformations:
+
+DES_fcrypt() is a fast version of the Unix crypt(3) function.  This
+version takes only a small amount of space relative to other fast
+crypt() implementations.  This is different to the normal crypt in
+that the third parameter is the buffer that the return value is
+written into.  It needs to be at least 14 bytes long.  This function
+is thread safe, unlike the normal crypt.
+
+DES_crypt() is a faster replacement for the normal system crypt().
+This function calls DES_fcrypt() with a static array passed as the
+third parameter.  This mostly emulates the normal non-thread-safe semantics
+of crypt(3).
+The B<salt> must be two ASCII characters.
+
+The values returned by DES_fcrypt() and DES_crypt() are terminated by NUL
+character.
+
+DES_enc_write() writes I<len> bytes to file descriptor I<fd> from
+buffer I<buf>. The data is encrypted via I<pcbc_encrypt> (default)
+using I<sched> for the key and I<iv> as a starting vector.  The actual
+data send down I<fd> consists of 4 bytes (in network byte order)
+containing the length of the following encrypted data.  The encrypted
+data then follows, padded with random data out to a multiple of 8
+bytes.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+DES_cbc_encrypt() does not modify B<ivec>; use DES_ncbc_encrypt()
+instead.
+
+DES_cfb_encrypt() and DES_ofb_encrypt() operates on input of 8 bits.
+What this means is that if you set numbits to 12, and length to 2, the
+first 12 bits will come from the 1st input byte and the low half of
+the second input byte.  The second 12 bits will have the low 8 bits
+taken from the 3rd input byte and the top 4 bits taken from the 4th
+input byte.  The same holds for output.  This function has been
+implemented this way because most people will be using a multiple of 8
+and because once you get into pulling bytes input bytes apart things
+get ugly!
+
+DES_string_to_key() is available for backward compatibility with the
+MIT library.  New applications should use a cryptographic hash function.
+The same applies for DES_string_to_2key().
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The B<des> library was written to be source code compatible with
+the MIT Kerberos library.
+
+Applications should use the higher level functions
+L<EVP_EncryptInit(3)> etc. instead of calling these
+functions directly.
+
+Single-key DES is insecure due to its short key size.  ECB mode is
+not suitable for most applications; see L<des_modes(7)>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DES_set_key(), DES_key_sched(), DES_set_key_checked() and DES_is_weak_key()
+return 0 on success or negative values on error.
+
+DES_cbc_cksum() and DES_quad_cksum() return 4-byte integer representing the
+last 4 bytes of the checksum of the input.
+
+DES_fcrypt() returns a pointer to the caller-provided buffer and DES_crypt() -
+to a static buffer on success; otherwise they return NULL.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The requirement that the B<salt> parameter to DES_crypt() and DES_fcrypt()
+be two ASCII characters was first enforced in
+OpenSSL 1.1.0.  Previous versions tried to use the letter uppercase B<A>
+if both character were not present, and could crash when given non-ASCII
+on some platforms.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<des_modes(7)>,
+L<EVP_EncryptInit(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_key.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_key.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..297e7fbf47b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_key.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_generate_key, DH_compute_key - perform Diffie-Hellman key exchange
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ int DH_generate_key(DH *dh);
+
+ int DH_compute_key(unsigned char *key, BIGNUM *pub_key, DH *dh);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_generate_key() performs the first step of a Diffie-Hellman key
+exchange by generating private and public DH values. By calling
+DH_compute_key(), these are combined with the other party's public
+value to compute the shared key.
+
+DH_generate_key() expects B<dh> to contain the shared parameters
+B<dh-E<gt>p> and B<dh-E<gt>g>. It generates a random private DH value
+unless B<dh-E<gt>priv_key> is already set, and computes the
+corresponding public value B<dh-E<gt>pub_key>, which can then be
+published.
+
+DH_compute_key() computes the shared secret from the private DH value
+in B<dh> and the other party's public value in B<pub_key> and stores
+it in B<key>. B<key> must point to B<DH_size(dh)> bytes of memory.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_generate_key() returns 1 on success, 0 otherwise.
+
+DH_compute_key() returns the size of the shared secret on success, -1
+on error.
+
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>, L<DH_size(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_parameters.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_parameters.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3c847104327a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_generate_parameters.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_generate_parameters_ex, DH_generate_parameters,
+DH_check, DH_check_params,
+DH_check_ex, DH_check_params_ex, DH_check_pub_key_ex
+- generate and check Diffie-Hellman
+parameters
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ int DH_generate_parameters_ex(DH *dh, int prime_len, int generator, BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+ int DH_check(DH *dh, int *codes);
+ int DH_check_params(DH *dh, int *codes);
+
+ int DH_check_ex(const DH *dh);
+ int DH_check_params_ex(const DH *dh);
+ int DH_check_pub_key_ex(const DH *dh, const BIGNUM *pub_key);
+
+Deprecated:
+
+ #if OPENSSL_API_COMPAT < 0x00908000L
+ DH *DH_generate_parameters(int prime_len, int generator,
+                            void (*callback)(int, int, void *), void *cb_arg);
+ #endif
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_generate_parameters_ex() generates Diffie-Hellman parameters that can
+be shared among a group of users, and stores them in the provided B<DH>
+structure. The pseudo-random number generator must be
+seeded before calling it.
+The parameters generated by DH_generate_parameters_ex() should not be used in
+signature schemes.
+
+B<prime_len> is the length in bits of the safe prime to be generated.
+B<generator> is a small number E<gt> 1, typically 2 or 5.
+
+A callback function may be used to provide feedback about the progress
+of the key generation. If B<cb> is not B<NULL>, it will be
+called as described in L<BN_generate_prime(3)> while a random prime
+number is generated, and when a prime has been found, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 3, 0)>
+is called. See L<BN_generate_prime_ex(3)> for information on
+the BN_GENCB_call() function.
+
+DH_generate_parameters() is similar to DH_generate_prime_ex() but
+expects an old-style callback function; see
+L<BN_generate_prime(3)> for information on the old-style callback.
+
+DH_check_params() confirms that the B<p> and B<g> are likely enough to
+be valid.
+This is a lightweight check, if a more thorough check is needed, use
+DH_check().
+The value of B<*codes> is updated with any problems found.
+If B<*codes> is zero then no problems were found, otherwise the
+following bits may be set:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item DH_CHECK_P_NOT_PRIME
+
+The parameter B<p> has been determined to not being an odd prime.
+Note that the lack of this bit doesn't guarantee that B<p> is a
+prime.
+
+=item DH_NOT_SUITABLE_GENERATOR
+
+The generator B<g> is not suitable.
+Note that the lack of this bit doesn't guarantee that B<g> is
+suitable, unless B<p> is known to be a strong prime.
+
+=back
+
+DH_check() confirms that the Diffie-Hellman parameters B<dh> are valid. The
+value of B<*codes> is updated with any problems found. If B<*codes> is zero then
+no problems were found, otherwise the following bits may be set:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item DH_CHECK_P_NOT_PRIME
+
+The parameter B<p> is not prime.
+
+=item DH_CHECK_P_NOT_SAFE_PRIME
+
+The parameter B<p> is not a safe prime and no B<q> value is present.
+
+=item DH_UNABLE_TO_CHECK_GENERATOR
+
+The generator B<g> cannot be checked for suitability.
+
+=item DH_NOT_SUITABLE_GENERATOR
+
+The generator B<g> is not suitable.
+
+=item DH_CHECK_Q_NOT_PRIME
+
+The parameter B<q> is not prime.
+
+=item DH_CHECK_INVALID_Q_VALUE
+
+The parameter B<q> is invalid.
+
+=item DH_CHECK_INVALID_J_VALUE
+
+The parameter B<j> is invalid.
+
+=back
+
+DH_check_ex(), DH_check_params() and DH_check_pub_key_ex() are similar to
+DH_check() and DH_check_params() respectively, but the error reasons are added
+to the thread's error queue instead of provided as return values from the
+function.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_generate_parameters_ex(), DH_check() and DH_check_params() return 1
+if the check could be performed, 0 otherwise.
+
+DH_generate_parameters() returns a pointer to the DH structure or NULL if
+the parameter generation fails.
+
+DH_check_ex(), DH_check_params() and DH_check_pub_key_ex() return 1 if the
+check is successful, 0 for failed.
+
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<DH_free(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+DH_generate_parameters() was deprecated in OpenSSL 0.9.8; use
+DH_generate_parameters_ex() instead.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e878fa005149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get0_pqg.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_get0_pqg, DH_set0_pqg, DH_get0_key, DH_set0_key,
+DH_get0_p, DH_get0_q, DH_get0_g,
+DH_get0_priv_key, DH_get0_pub_key,
+DH_clear_flags, DH_test_flags, DH_set_flags, DH_get0_engine,
+DH_get_length, DH_set_length - Routines for getting and setting data in a DH object
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ void DH_get0_pqg(const DH *dh,
+                  const BIGNUM **p, const BIGNUM **q, const BIGNUM **g);
+ int DH_set0_pqg(DH *dh, BIGNUM *p, BIGNUM *q, BIGNUM *g);
+ void DH_get0_key(const DH *dh,
+                  const BIGNUM **pub_key, const BIGNUM **priv_key);
+ int DH_set0_key(DH *dh, BIGNUM *pub_key, BIGNUM *priv_key);
+ const BIGNUM *DH_get0_p(const DH *dh);
+ const BIGNUM *DH_get0_q(const DH *dh);
+ const BIGNUM *DH_get0_g(const DH *dh);
+ const BIGNUM *DH_get0_priv_key(const DH *dh);
+ const BIGNUM *DH_get0_pub_key(const DH *dh);
+ void DH_clear_flags(DH *dh, int flags);
+ int DH_test_flags(const DH *dh, int flags);
+ void DH_set_flags(DH *dh, int flags);
+ ENGINE *DH_get0_engine(DH *d);
+ long DH_get_length(const DH *dh);
+ int DH_set_length(DH *dh, long length);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A DH object contains the parameters B<p>, B<q> and B<g>. Note that the B<q>
+parameter is optional. It also contains a public key (B<pub_key>) and
+(optionally) a private key (B<priv_key>).
+
+The B<p>, B<q> and B<g> parameters can be obtained by calling DH_get0_pqg().
+If the parameters have not yet been set then B<*p>, B<*q> and B<*g> will be set
+to NULL. Otherwise they are set to pointers to their respective values. These
+point directly to the internal representations of the values and therefore
+should not be freed directly.
+Any of the out parameters B<p>, B<q>, and B<g> can be NULL, in which case no
+value will be returned for that parameter.
+
+The B<p>, B<q> and B<g> values can be set by calling DH_set0_pqg() and passing
+the new values for B<p>, B<q> and B<g> as parameters to the function. Calling
+this function transfers the memory management of the values to the DH object,
+and therefore the values that have been passed in should not be freed directly
+after this function has been called. The B<q> parameter may be NULL.
+
+To get the public and private key values use the DH_get0_key() function. A
+pointer to the public key will be stored in B<*pub_key>, and a pointer to the
+private key will be stored in B<*priv_key>. Either may be NULL if they have not
+been set yet, although if the private key has been set then the public key must
+be. The values point to the internal representation of the public key and
+private key values. This memory should not be freed directly.
+Any of the out parameters B<pub_key> and B<priv_key> can be NULL, in which case
+no value will be returned for that parameter.
+
+The public and private key values can be set using DH_set0_key(). Either
+parameter may be NULL, which means the corresponding DH field is left
+untouched. As with DH_set0_pqg() this function transfers the memory management
+of the key values to the DH object, and therefore they should not be freed
+directly after this function has been called.
+
+Any of the values B<p>, B<q>, B<g>, B<priv_key>, and B<pub_key> can also be
+retrieved separately by the corresponding function DH_get0_p(), DH_get0_q(),
+DH_get0_g(), DH_get0_priv_key(), and DH_get0_pub_key(), respectively.
+
+DH_set_flags() sets the flags in the B<flags> parameter on the DH object.
+Multiple flags can be passed in one go (bitwise ORed together). Any flags that
+are already set are left set. DH_test_flags() tests to see whether the flags
+passed in the B<flags> parameter are currently set in the DH object. Multiple
+flags can be tested in one go. All flags that are currently set are returned, or
+zero if none of the flags are set. DH_clear_flags() clears the specified flags
+within the DH object.
+
+DH_get0_engine() returns a handle to the ENGINE that has been set for this DH
+object, or NULL if no such ENGINE has been set.
+
+The DH_get_length() and DH_set_length() functions get and set the optional
+length parameter associated with this DH object. If the length is non-zero then
+it is used, otherwise it is ignored. The B<length> parameter indicates the
+length of the secret exponent (private key) in bits.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Values retrieved with DH_get0_key() are owned by the DH object used
+in the call and may therefore I<not> be passed to DH_set0_key().  If
+needed, duplicate the received value using BN_dup() and pass the
+duplicate.  The same applies to DH_get0_pqg() and DH_set0_pqg().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_set0_pqg() and DH_set0_key() return 1 on success or 0 on failure.
+
+DH_get0_p(), DH_get0_q(), DH_get0_g(), DH_get0_priv_key(), and DH_get0_pub_key()
+return the respective value, or NULL if it is unset.
+
+DH_test_flags() returns the current state of the flags in the DH object.
+
+DH_get0_engine() returns the ENGINE set for the DH object or NULL if no ENGINE
+has been set.
+
+DH_get_length() returns the length of the secret exponent (private key) in bits,
+or zero if no such length has been explicitly set.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_generate_parameters(3)>, L<DH_generate_key(3)>,
+L<DH_set_method(3)>, L<DH_size(3)>, L<DH_meth_new(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get_1024_160.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get_1024_160.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4044f1041857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_get_1024_160.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_get_1024_160,
+DH_get_2048_224,
+DH_get_2048_256,
+BN_get0_nist_prime_192,
+BN_get0_nist_prime_224,
+BN_get0_nist_prime_256,
+BN_get0_nist_prime_384,
+BN_get0_nist_prime_521,
+BN_get_rfc2409_prime_768,
+BN_get_rfc2409_prime_1024,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_1536,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_2048,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_3072,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_4096,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_6144,
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_8192
+- Create standardized public primes or DH pairs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+ DH *DH_get_1024_160(void)
+ DH *DH_get_2048_224(void)
+ DH *DH_get_2048_256(void)
+
+ const BIGNUM *BN_get0_nist_prime_192(void)
+ const BIGNUM *BN_get0_nist_prime_224(void)
+ const BIGNUM *BN_get0_nist_prime_256(void)
+ const BIGNUM *BN_get0_nist_prime_384(void)
+ const BIGNUM *BN_get0_nist_prime_521(void)
+
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc2409_prime_768(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc2409_prime_1024(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_1536(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_2048(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_3072(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_4096(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_6144(BIGNUM *bn)
+ BIGNUM *BN_get_rfc3526_prime_8192(BIGNUM *bn)
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_get_1024_160(), DH_get_2048_224(), and DH_get_2048_256() each return
+a DH object for the IETF RFC 5114 value.
+
+BN_get0_nist_prime_192(), BN_get0_nist_prime_224(), BN_get0_nist_prime_256(),
+BN_get0_nist_prime_384(), and BN_get0_nist_prime_521() functions return
+a BIGNUM for the specific NIST prime curve (e.g., P-256).
+
+BN_get_rfc2409_prime_768(), BN_get_rfc2409_prime_1024(),
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_1536(), BN_get_rfc3526_prime_2048(),
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_3072(), BN_get_rfc3526_prime_4096(),
+BN_get_rfc3526_prime_6144(), and BN_get_rfc3526_prime_8192() functions
+return a BIGNUM for the specified size from IETF RFC 2409.  If B<bn>
+is not NULL, the BIGNUM will be set into that location as well.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Defined above.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_meth_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_meth_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63aa6513403a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_meth_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_meth_new, DH_meth_free, DH_meth_dup, DH_meth_get0_name, DH_meth_set1_name,
+DH_meth_get_flags, DH_meth_set_flags, DH_meth_get0_app_data,
+DH_meth_set0_app_data, DH_meth_get_generate_key, DH_meth_set_generate_key,
+DH_meth_get_compute_key, DH_meth_set_compute_key, DH_meth_get_bn_mod_exp,
+DH_meth_set_bn_mod_exp, DH_meth_get_init, DH_meth_set_init, DH_meth_get_finish,
+DH_meth_set_finish, DH_meth_get_generate_params,
+DH_meth_set_generate_params - Routines to build up DH methods
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ DH_METHOD *DH_meth_new(const char *name, int flags);
+
+ void DH_meth_free(DH_METHOD *dhm);
+
+ DH_METHOD *DH_meth_dup(const DH_METHOD *dhm);
+
+ const char *DH_meth_get0_name(const DH_METHOD *dhm);
+ int DH_meth_set1_name(DH_METHOD *dhm, const char *name);
+
+ int DH_meth_get_flags(const DH_METHOD *dhm);
+ int DH_meth_set_flags(DH_METHOD *dhm, int flags);
+
+ void *DH_meth_get0_app_data(const DH_METHOD *dhm);
+ int DH_meth_set0_app_data(DH_METHOD *dhm, void *app_data);
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_generate_key(const DH_METHOD *dhm))(DH *);
+ int DH_meth_set_generate_key(DH_METHOD *dhm, int (*generate_key)(DH *));
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_compute_key(const DH_METHOD *dhm))
+     (unsigned char *key, const BIGNUM *pub_key, DH *dh);
+ int DH_meth_set_compute_key(DH_METHOD *dhm,
+     int (*compute_key)(unsigned char *key, const BIGNUM *pub_key, DH *dh));
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_bn_mod_exp(const DH_METHOD *dhm))
+     (const DH *dh, BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *p,
+      const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx, BN_MONT_CTX *m_ctx);
+ int DH_meth_set_bn_mod_exp(DH_METHOD *dhm,
+     int (*bn_mod_exp)(const DH *dh, BIGNUM *r, const BIGNUM *a,
+                       const BIGNUM *p, const BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx,
+                       BN_MONT_CTX *m_ctx));
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_init(const DH_METHOD *dhm))(DH *);
+ int DH_meth_set_init(DH_METHOD *dhm, int (*init)(DH *));
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_finish(const DH_METHOD *dhm))(DH *);
+ int DH_meth_set_finish(DH_METHOD *dhm, int (*finish)(DH *));
+
+ int (*DH_meth_get_generate_params(const DH_METHOD *dhm))
+     (DH *, int, int, BN_GENCB *);
+ int DH_meth_set_generate_params(DH_METHOD *dhm,
+     int (*generate_params)(DH *, int, int, BN_GENCB *));
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<DH_METHOD> type is a structure used for the provision of custom DH
+implementations. It provides a set of functions used by OpenSSL for the
+implementation of the various DH capabilities.
+
+DH_meth_new() creates a new B<DH_METHOD> structure. It should be given a
+unique B<name> and a set of B<flags>. The B<name> should be a NULL terminated
+string, which will be duplicated and stored in the B<DH_METHOD> object. It is
+the callers responsibility to free the original string. The flags will be used
+during the construction of a new B<DH> object based on this B<DH_METHOD>. Any
+new B<DH> object will have those flags set by default.
+
+DH_meth_dup() creates a duplicate copy of the B<DH_METHOD> object passed as a
+parameter. This might be useful for creating a new B<DH_METHOD> based on an
+existing one, but with some differences.
+
+DH_meth_free() destroys a B<DH_METHOD> structure and frees up any memory
+associated with it.
+
+DH_meth_get0_name() will return a pointer to the name of this DH_METHOD. This
+is a pointer to the internal name string and so should not be freed by the
+caller. DH_meth_set1_name() sets the name of the DH_METHOD to B<name>. The
+string is duplicated and the copy is stored in the DH_METHOD structure, so the
+caller remains responsible for freeing the memory associated with the name.
+
+DH_meth_get_flags() returns the current value of the flags associated with this
+DH_METHOD. DH_meth_set_flags() provides the ability to set these flags.
+
+The functions DH_meth_get0_app_data() and DH_meth_set0_app_data() provide the
+ability to associate implementation specific data with the DH_METHOD. It is
+the application's responsibility to free this data before the DH_METHOD is
+freed via a call to DH_meth_free().
+
+DH_meth_get_generate_key() and DH_meth_set_generate_key() get and set the
+function used for generating a new DH key pair respectively. This function will
+be called in response to the application calling DH_generate_key(). The
+parameter for the function has the same meaning as for DH_generate_key().
+
+DH_meth_get_compute_key() and DH_meth_set_compute_key() get and set the
+function used for computing a new DH shared secret respectively. This function
+will be called in response to the application calling DH_compute_key(). The
+parameters for the function have the same meaning as for DH_compute_key().
+
+DH_meth_get_bn_mod_exp() and DH_meth_set_bn_mod_exp() get and set the function
+used for computing the following value:
+
+ r = a ^ p mod m
+
+This function will be called by the default OpenSSL function for
+DH_generate_key(). The result is stored in the B<r> parameter. This function
+may be NULL unless using the default generate key function, in which case it
+must be present.
+
+DH_meth_get_init() and DH_meth_set_init() get and set the function used
+for creating a new DH instance respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DH_new() (if the current default
+DH_METHOD is this one) or DH_new_method(). The DH_new() and DH_new_method()
+functions will allocate the memory for the new DH object, and a pointer to this
+newly allocated structure will be passed as a parameter to the function. This
+function may be NULL.
+
+DH_meth_get_finish() and DH_meth_set_finish() get and set the function used
+for destroying an instance of a DH object respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DH_free(). A pointer to the DH
+to be destroyed is passed as a parameter. The destroy function should be used
+for DH implementation specific clean up. The memory for the DH itself should
+not be freed by this function. This function may be NULL.
+
+DH_meth_get_generate_params() and DH_meth_set_generate_params() get and set the
+function used for generating DH parameters respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DH_generate_parameters_ex() (or
+DH_generate_parameters()). The parameters for the function have the same
+meaning as for DH_generate_parameters_ex(). This function may be NULL.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_meth_new() and DH_meth_dup() return the newly allocated DH_METHOD object
+or NULL on failure.
+
+DH_meth_get0_name() and DH_meth_get_flags() return the name and flags
+associated with the DH_METHOD respectively.
+
+All other DH_meth_get_*() functions return the appropriate function pointer
+that has been set in the DH_METHOD, or NULL if no such pointer has yet been
+set.
+
+DH_meth_set1_name() and all DH_meth_set_*() functions return 1 on success or
+0 on failure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_generate_parameters(3)>, L<DH_generate_key(3)>,
+L<DH_set_method(3)>, L<DH_size(3)>, L<DH_get0_pqg(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7e60c9a569c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_new, DH_free - allocate and free DH objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ DH* DH_new(void);
+
+ void DH_free(DH *dh);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_new() allocates and initializes a B<DH> structure.
+
+DH_free() frees the B<DH> structure and its components. The values are
+erased before the memory is returned to the system.
+If B<dh> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+If the allocation fails, DH_new() returns B<NULL> and sets an error
+code that can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>. Otherwise it returns
+a pointer to the newly allocated structure.
+
+DH_free() returns no value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<DH_generate_parameters(3)>,
+L<DH_generate_key(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new_by_nid.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new_by_nid.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73636c5d1e9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_new_by_nid.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_new_by_nid, DH_get_nid - get or find DH named parameters
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+ DH *DH_new_by_nid(int nid);
+ int *DH_get_nid(const DH *dh);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_new_by_nid() creates and returns a DH structure containing named parameters
+B<nid>. Currently B<nid> must be B<NID_ffdhe2048>, B<NID_ffdhe3072>,
+B<NID_ffdhe4096>, B<NID_ffdhe6144> or B<NID_ffdhe8192>.
+
+DH_get_nid() determines if the parameters contained in B<dh> match
+any named set. It returns the NID corresponding to the matching parameters or
+B<NID_undef> if there is no match.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_new_by_nid() returns a set of DH parameters or B<NULL> if an error occurred.
+
+DH_get_nid() returns the NID of the matching set of parameters or
+B<NID_undef> if there is no match.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea45961f1500
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_set_method.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_set_default_method, DH_get_default_method,
+DH_set_method, DH_new_method, DH_OpenSSL - select DH method
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ void DH_set_default_method(const DH_METHOD *meth);
+
+ const DH_METHOD *DH_get_default_method(void);
+
+ int DH_set_method(DH *dh, const DH_METHOD *meth);
+
+ DH *DH_new_method(ENGINE *engine);
+
+ const DH_METHOD *DH_OpenSSL(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A B<DH_METHOD> specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for Diffie-Hellman
+operations. By modifying the method, alternative implementations
+such as hardware accelerators may be used. IMPORTANT: See the NOTES section for
+important information about how these DH API functions are affected by the use
+of B<ENGINE> API calls.
+
+Initially, the default DH_METHOD is the OpenSSL internal implementation, as
+returned by DH_OpenSSL().
+
+DH_set_default_method() makes B<meth> the default method for all DH
+structures created later.
+B<NB>: This is true only whilst no ENGINE has been set
+as a default for DH, so this function is no longer recommended.
+This function is not thread-safe and should not be called at the same time
+as other OpenSSL functions.
+
+DH_get_default_method() returns a pointer to the current default DH_METHOD.
+However, the meaningfulness of this result is dependent on whether the ENGINE
+API is being used, so this function is no longer recommended.
+
+DH_set_method() selects B<meth> to perform all operations using the key B<dh>.
+This will replace the DH_METHOD used by the DH key and if the previous method
+was supplied by an ENGINE, the handle to that ENGINE will be released during the
+change. It is possible to have DH keys that only work with certain DH_METHOD
+implementations (eg. from an ENGINE module that supports embedded
+hardware-protected keys), and in such cases attempting to change the DH_METHOD
+for the key can have unexpected results.
+
+DH_new_method() allocates and initializes a DH structure so that B<engine> will
+be used for the DH operations. If B<engine> is NULL, the default ENGINE for DH
+operations is used, and if no default ENGINE is set, the DH_METHOD controlled by
+DH_set_default_method() is used.
+
+A new DH_METHOD object may be constructed using DH_meth_new() (see
+L<DH_meth_new(3)>).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_OpenSSL() and DH_get_default_method() return pointers to the respective
+B<DH_METHOD>s.
+
+DH_set_default_method() returns no value.
+
+DH_set_method() returns non-zero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
+the method for B<dh> (including unloading the ENGINE handle if the previous
+method was supplied by an ENGINE).
+
+DH_new_method() returns NULL and sets an error code that can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)> if the allocation fails. Otherwise it
+returns a pointer to the newly allocated structure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_meth_new(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_size.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_size.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3b65d7ea6d6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DH_size.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DH_size, DH_bits, DH_security_bits - get Diffie-Hellman prime size and
+security bits
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dh.h>
+
+ int DH_size(const DH *dh);
+
+ int DH_bits(const DH *dh);
+
+ int DH_security_bits(const DH *dh);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DH_size() returns the Diffie-Hellman prime size in bytes. It can be used
+to determine how much memory must be allocated for the shared secret
+computed by L<DH_compute_key(3)>.
+
+DH_bits() returns the number of significant bits.
+
+B<dh> and B<dh-E<gt>p> must not be B<NULL>.
+
+DH_security_bits() returns the number of security bits of the given B<dh>
+key. See L<BN_security_bits(3)>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DH_size() returns the prime size of Diffie-Hellman in bytes.
+
+DH_bits() returns the number of bits in the key.
+
+DH_security_bits() returns the number of security bits.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<DH_generate_key(3)>,
+L<BN_num_bits(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+DH_bits() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_SIG_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_SIG_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..92c7bfdf505e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_SIG_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_SIG_get0, DSA_SIG_set0,
+DSA_SIG_new, DSA_SIG_free - allocate and free DSA signature objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ DSA_SIG *DSA_SIG_new(void);
+ void DSA_SIG_free(DSA_SIG *a);
+ void DSA_SIG_get0(const DSA_SIG *sig, const BIGNUM **pr, const BIGNUM **ps);
+ int DSA_SIG_set0(DSA_SIG *sig, BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *s);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_SIG_new() allocates an empty B<DSA_SIG> structure.
+
+DSA_SIG_free() frees the B<DSA_SIG> structure and its components. The
+values are erased before the memory is returned to the system.
+
+DSA_SIG_get0() returns internal pointers to the B<r> and B<s> values contained
+in B<sig>.
+
+The B<r> and B<s> values can be set by calling DSA_SIG_set0() and passing the
+new values for B<r> and B<s> as parameters to the function. Calling this
+function transfers the memory management of the values to the DSA_SIG object,
+and therefore the values that have been passed in should not be freed directly
+after this function has been called.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+If the allocation fails, DSA_SIG_new() returns B<NULL> and sets an
+error code that can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>. Otherwise it returns a pointer
+to the newly allocated structure.
+
+DSA_SIG_free() returns no value.
+
+DSA_SIG_set0() returns 1 on success or 0 on failure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<DSA_do_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_do_sign.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_do_sign.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a0dd8bb2f60d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_do_sign.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_do_sign, DSA_do_verify - raw DSA signature operations
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ DSA_SIG *DSA_do_sign(const unsigned char *dgst, int dlen, DSA *dsa);
+
+ int DSA_do_verify(const unsigned char *dgst, int dgst_len,
+                   DSA_SIG *sig, DSA *dsa);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_do_sign() computes a digital signature on the B<len> byte message
+digest B<dgst> using the private key B<dsa> and returns it in a
+newly allocated B<DSA_SIG> structure.
+
+L<DSA_sign_setup(3)> may be used to precompute part
+of the signing operation in case signature generation is
+time-critical.
+
+DSA_do_verify() verifies that the signature B<sig> matches a given
+message digest B<dgst> of size B<len>.  B<dsa> is the signer's public
+key.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_do_sign() returns the signature, NULL on error.  DSA_do_verify()
+returns 1 for a valid signature, 0 for an incorrect signature and -1
+on error. The error codes can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<DSA_SIG_new(3)>,
+L<DSA_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_dup_DH.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_dup_DH.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..09cbf4b3a9cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_dup_DH.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_dup_DH - create a DH structure out of DSA structure
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ DH *DSA_dup_DH(const DSA *r);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_dup_DH() duplicates DSA parameters/keys as DH parameters/keys. q
+is lost during that conversion, but the resulting DH parameters
+contain its length.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_dup_DH() returns the new B<DH> structure, and NULL on error. The
+error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 NOTE
+
+Be careful to avoid small subgroup attacks when using this.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DH_new(3)>, L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_key.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_key.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9ff755335255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_key.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_generate_key - generate DSA key pair
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ int DSA_generate_key(DSA *a);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_generate_key() expects B<a> to contain DSA parameters. It generates
+a new key pair and stores it in B<a-E<gt>pub_key> and B<a-E<gt>priv_key>.
+
+The PRNG must be seeded prior to calling DSA_generate_key().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_generate_key() returns 1 on success, 0 otherwise.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<DSA_generate_parameters_ex(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_parameters.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_parameters.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..970f6a6b08af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_generate_parameters.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_generate_parameters_ex, DSA_generate_parameters - generate DSA parameters
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ int DSA_generate_parameters_ex(DSA *dsa, int bits,
+                                const unsigned char *seed, int seed_len,
+                                int *counter_ret, unsigned long *h_ret,
+                                BN_GENCB *cb);
+
+Deprecated:
+
+ #if OPENSSL_API_COMPAT < 0x00908000L
+ DSA *DSA_generate_parameters(int bits, unsigned char *seed, int seed_len,
+                              int *counter_ret, unsigned long *h_ret,
+                              void (*callback)(int, int, void *), void *cb_arg);
+ #endif
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_generate_parameters_ex() generates primes p and q and a generator g
+for use in the DSA and stores the result in B<dsa>.
+
+B<bits> is the length of the prime p to be generated.
+For lengths under 2048 bits, the length of q is 160 bits; for lengths
+greater than or equal to 2048 bits, the length of q is set to 256 bits.
+
+If B<seed> is NULL, the primes will be generated at random.
+If B<seed_len> is less than the length of q, an error is returned.
+
+DSA_generate_parameters_ex() places the iteration count in
+*B<counter_ret> and a counter used for finding a generator in
+*B<h_ret>, unless these are B<NULL>.
+
+A callback function may be used to provide feedback about the progress
+of the key generation. If B<cb> is not B<NULL>, it will be
+called as shown below. For information on the BN_GENCB structure and the
+BN_GENCB_call function discussed below, refer to
+L<BN_generate_prime(3)>.
+
+DSA_generate_prime() is similar to DSA_generate_prime_ex() but
+expects an old-style callback function; see
+L<BN_generate_prime(3)> for information on the old-style callback.
+
+=over 2
+
+=item *
+
+When a candidate for q is generated, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 0, m++)> is called
+(m is 0 for the first candidate).
+
+=item *
+
+When a candidate for q has passed a test by trial division,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, -1)> is called.
+While a candidate for q is tested by Miller-Rabin primality tests,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, i)> is called in the outer loop
+(once for each witness that confirms that the candidate may be prime);
+i is the loop counter (starting at 0).
+
+=item *
+
+When a prime q has been found, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 2, 0)> and
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 3, 0)> are called.
+
+=item *
+
+Before a candidate for p (other than the first) is generated and tested,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 0, counter)> is called.
+
+=item *
+
+When a candidate for p has passed the test by trial division,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, -1)> is called.
+While it is tested by the Miller-Rabin primality test,
+B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 1, i)> is called in the outer loop
+(once for each witness that confirms that the candidate may be prime).
+i is the loop counter (starting at 0).
+
+=item *
+
+When p has been found, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 2, 1)> is called.
+
+=item *
+
+When the generator has been found, B<BN_GENCB_call(cb, 3, 1)> is called.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_generate_parameters_ex() returns a 1 on success, or 0 otherwise.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+DSA_generate_parameters() returns a pointer to the DSA structure or
+B<NULL> if the parameter generation fails.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Seed lengths greater than 20 are not supported.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<DSA_free(3)>, L<BN_generate_prime(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+DSA_generate_parameters() was deprecated in OpenSSL 0.9.8; use
+DSA_generate_parameters_ex() instead.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_get0_pqg.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_get0_pqg.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..793c9bc56357
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_get0_pqg.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_get0_pqg, DSA_set0_pqg, DSA_get0_key, DSA_set0_key,
+DSA_get0_p, DSA_get0_q, DSA_get0_g,
+DSA_get0_pub_key, DSA_get0_priv_key,
+DSA_clear_flags, DSA_test_flags, DSA_set_flags,
+DSA_get0_engine - Routines for getting and
+setting data in a DSA object
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ void DSA_get0_pqg(const DSA *d,
+                   const BIGNUM **p, const BIGNUM **q, const BIGNUM **g);
+ int DSA_set0_pqg(DSA *d, BIGNUM *p, BIGNUM *q, BIGNUM *g);
+ void DSA_get0_key(const DSA *d,
+                   const BIGNUM **pub_key, const BIGNUM **priv_key);
+ int DSA_set0_key(DSA *d, BIGNUM *pub_key, BIGNUM *priv_key);
+ const BIGNUM *DSA_get0_p(const DSA *d);
+ const BIGNUM *DSA_get0_q(const DSA *d);
+ const BIGNUM *DSA_get0_g(const DSA *d);
+ const BIGNUM *DSA_get0_pub_key(const DSA *d);
+ const BIGNUM *DSA_get0_priv_key(const DSA *d);
+ void DSA_clear_flags(DSA *d, int flags);
+ int DSA_test_flags(const DSA *d, int flags);
+ void DSA_set_flags(DSA *d, int flags);
+ ENGINE *DSA_get0_engine(DSA *d);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A DSA object contains the parameters B<p>, B<q> and B<g>. It also contains a
+public key (B<pub_key>) and (optionally) a private key (B<priv_key>).
+
+The B<p>, B<q> and B<g> parameters can be obtained by calling DSA_get0_pqg().
+If the parameters have not yet been set then B<*p>, B<*q> and B<*g> will be set
+to NULL. Otherwise they are set to pointers to their respective values. These
+point directly to the internal representations of the values and therefore
+should not be freed directly.
+
+The B<p>, B<q> and B<g> values can be set by calling DSA_set0_pqg() and passing
+the new values for B<p>, B<q> and B<g> as parameters to the function. Calling
+this function transfers the memory management of the values to the DSA object,
+and therefore the values that have been passed in should not be freed directly
+after this function has been called.
+
+To get the public and private key values use the DSA_get0_key() function. A
+pointer to the public key will be stored in B<*pub_key>, and a pointer to the
+private key will be stored in B<*priv_key>. Either may be NULL if they have not
+been set yet, although if the private key has been set then the public key must
+be. The values point to the internal representation of the public key and
+private key values. This memory should not be freed directly.
+
+The public and private key values can be set using DSA_set0_key(). The public
+key must be non-NULL the first time this function is called on a given DSA
+object. The private key may be NULL.  On subsequent calls, either may be NULL,
+which means the corresponding DSA field is left untouched. As for DSA_set0_pqg()
+this function transfers the memory management of the key values to the DSA
+object, and therefore they should not be freed directly after this function has
+been called.
+
+Any of the values B<p>, B<q>, B<g>, B<priv_key>, and B<pub_key> can also be
+retrieved separately by the corresponding function DSA_get0_p(), DSA_get0_q(),
+DSA_get0_g(), DSA_get0_priv_key(), and DSA_get0_pub_key(), respectively.
+
+DSA_set_flags() sets the flags in the B<flags> parameter on the DSA object.
+Multiple flags can be passed in one go (bitwise ORed together). Any flags that
+are already set are left set. DSA_test_flags() tests to see whether the flags
+passed in the B<flags> parameter are currently set in the DSA object. Multiple
+flags can be tested in one go. All flags that are currently set are returned, or
+zero if none of the flags are set. DSA_clear_flags() clears the specified flags
+within the DSA object.
+
+DSA_get0_engine() returns a handle to the ENGINE that has been set for this DSA
+object, or NULL if no such ENGINE has been set.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Values retrieved with DSA_get0_key() are owned by the DSA object used
+in the call and may therefore I<not> be passed to DSA_set0_key().  If
+needed, duplicate the received value using BN_dup() and pass the
+duplicate.  The same applies to DSA_get0_pqg() and DSA_set0_pqg().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_set0_pqg() and DSA_set0_key() return 1 on success or 0 on failure.
+
+DSA_test_flags() returns the current state of the flags in the DSA object.
+
+DSA_get0_engine() returns the ENGINE set for the DSA object or NULL if no ENGINE
+has been set.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_generate_parameters(3)>, L<DSA_generate_key(3)>,
+L<DSA_dup_DH(3)>, L<DSA_do_sign(3)>, L<DSA_set_method(3)>, L<DSA_SIG_new(3)>,
+L<DSA_sign(3)>, L<DSA_size(3)>, L<DSA_meth_new(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_meth_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_meth_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..faf86ef9dafc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_meth_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_meth_new, DSA_meth_free, DSA_meth_dup, DSA_meth_get0_name,
+DSA_meth_set1_name, DSA_meth_get_flags, DSA_meth_set_flags,
+DSA_meth_get0_app_data, DSA_meth_set0_app_data, DSA_meth_get_sign,
+DSA_meth_set_sign, DSA_meth_get_sign_setup, DSA_meth_set_sign_setup,
+DSA_meth_get_verify, DSA_meth_set_verify, DSA_meth_get_mod_exp,
+DSA_meth_set_mod_exp, DSA_meth_get_bn_mod_exp, DSA_meth_set_bn_mod_exp,
+DSA_meth_get_init, DSA_meth_set_init, DSA_meth_get_finish, DSA_meth_set_finish,
+DSA_meth_get_paramgen, DSA_meth_set_paramgen, DSA_meth_get_keygen,
+DSA_meth_set_keygen - Routines to build up DSA methods
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ DSA_METHOD *DSA_meth_new(const char *name, int flags);
+
+ void DSA_meth_free(DSA_METHOD *dsam);
+
+ DSA_METHOD *DSA_meth_dup(const DSA_METHOD *meth);
+
+ const char *DSA_meth_get0_name(const DSA_METHOD *dsam);
+ int DSA_meth_set1_name(DSA_METHOD *dsam, const char *name);
+
+ int DSA_meth_get_flags(const DSA_METHOD *dsam);
+ int DSA_meth_set_flags(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int flags);
+
+ void *DSA_meth_get0_app_data(const DSA_METHOD *dsam);
+ int DSA_meth_set0_app_data(DSA_METHOD *dsam, void *app_data);
+
+ DSA_SIG *(*DSA_meth_get_sign(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(const unsigned char *,
+                                                       int, DSA *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_sign(DSA_METHOD *dsam, DSA_SIG *(*sign)(const unsigned char *,
+                                                          int, DSA *));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_sign_setup(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *, BN_CTX *,$
+                                                        BIGNUM **, BIGNUM **);
+ int DSA_meth_set_sign_setup(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*sign_setup)(DSA *, BN_CTX *,
+                                                                 BIGNUM **, BIGNUM **));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_verify(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(const unsigned char *,
+                                                    int, DSA_SIG *, DSA *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_verify(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*verify)(const unsigned char *,
+                                                         int, DSA_SIG *, DSA *));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_mod_exp(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *dsa, BIGNUM *rr, BIGNUM *a1,
+                                                     BIGNUM *p1, BIGNUM *a2, BIGNUM *p2,
+                                                     BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx,
+                                                     BN_MONT_CTX *in_mont);
+ int DSA_meth_set_mod_exp(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*mod_exp)(DSA *dsa, BIGNUM *rr,
+                                                           BIGNUM *a1, BIGNUM *p1,
+                                                           BIGNUM *a2, BIGNUM *p2,
+                                                           BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx,
+                                                           BN_MONT_CTX *mont));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_bn_mod_exp(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *dsa, BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a,
+                                                        const BIGNUM *p, const BIGNUM *m,
+                                                        BN_CTX *ctx, BN_MONT_CTX *mont);
+ int DSA_meth_set_bn_mod_exp(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*bn_mod_exp)(DSA *dsa,
+                                                                 BIGNUM *r,
+                                                                 BIGNUM *a,
+                                                                 const BIGNUM *p,
+                                                                 const BIGNUM *m,
+                                                                 BN_CTX *ctx,
+                                                                 BN_MONT_CTX *mont));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_init(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_init(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*init)(DSA *));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_finish(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_finish(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*finish)(DSA *));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_paramgen(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *, int,
+                                                      const unsigned char *,
+                                                      int, int *, unsigned long *,
+                                                      BN_GENCB *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_paramgen(DSA_METHOD *dsam,
+                           int (*paramgen)(DSA *, int, const unsigned char *,
+                                           int, int *, unsigned long *, BN_GENCB *));
+
+ int (*DSA_meth_get_keygen(const DSA_METHOD *dsam))(DSA *);
+ int DSA_meth_set_keygen(DSA_METHOD *dsam, int (*keygen)(DSA *));
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<DSA_METHOD> type is a structure used for the provision of custom DSA
+implementations. It provides a set of functions used by OpenSSL for the
+implementation of the various DSA capabilities. See the L<dsa> page for more
+information.
+
+DSA_meth_new() creates a new B<DSA_METHOD> structure. It should be given a
+unique B<name> and a set of B<flags>. The B<name> should be a NULL terminated
+string, which will be duplicated and stored in the B<DSA_METHOD> object. It is
+the callers responsibility to free the original string. The flags will be used
+during the construction of a new B<DSA> object based on this B<DSA_METHOD>. Any
+new B<DSA> object will have those flags set by default.
+
+DSA_meth_dup() creates a duplicate copy of the B<DSA_METHOD> object passed as a
+parameter. This might be useful for creating a new B<DSA_METHOD> based on an
+existing one, but with some differences.
+
+DSA_meth_free() destroys a B<DSA_METHOD> structure and frees up any memory
+associated with it.
+
+DSA_meth_get0_name() will return a pointer to the name of this DSA_METHOD. This
+is a pointer to the internal name string and so should not be freed by the
+caller. DSA_meth_set1_name() sets the name of the DSA_METHOD to B<name>. The
+string is duplicated and the copy is stored in the DSA_METHOD structure, so the
+caller remains responsible for freeing the memory associated with the name.
+
+DSA_meth_get_flags() returns the current value of the flags associated with this
+DSA_METHOD. DSA_meth_set_flags() provides the ability to set these flags.
+
+The functions DSA_meth_get0_app_data() and DSA_meth_set0_app_data() provide the
+ability to associate implementation specific data with the DSA_METHOD. It is
+the application's responsibility to free this data before the DSA_METHOD is
+freed via a call to DSA_meth_free().
+
+DSA_meth_get_sign() and DSA_meth_set_sign() get and set the function used for
+creating a DSA signature respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DSA_do_sign() (or DSA_sign()). The
+parameters for the function have the same meaning as for DSA_do_sign().
+
+DSA_meth_get_sign_setup() and DSA_meth_set_sign_setup() get and set the function
+used for precalculating the DSA signature values B<k^-1> and B<r>. This function
+will be called in response to the application calling DSA_sign_setup(). The
+parameters for the function have the same meaning as for DSA_sign_setup().
+
+DSA_meth_get_verify() and DSA_meth_set_verify() get and set the function used
+for verifying a DSA signature respectively. This function will be called in
+response to the application calling DSA_do_verify() (or DSA_verify()). The
+parameters for the function have the same meaning as for DSA_do_verify().
+
+DSA_meth_get_mod_exp() and DSA_meth_set_mod_exp() get and set the function used
+for computing the following value:
+
+ rr = a1^p1 * a2^p2 mod m
+
+This function will be called by the default OpenSSL method during verification
+of a DSA signature. The result is stored in the B<rr> parameter. This function
+may be NULL.
+
+DSA_meth_get_bn_mod_exp() and DSA_meth_set_bn_mod_exp() get and set the function
+used for computing the following value:
+
+ r = a ^ p mod m
+
+This function will be called by the default OpenSSL function for
+DSA_sign_setup(). The result is stored in the B<r> parameter. This function
+may be NULL.
+
+DSA_meth_get_init() and DSA_meth_set_init() get and set the function used
+for creating a new DSA instance respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DSA_new() (if the current default
+DSA_METHOD is this one) or DSA_new_method(). The DSA_new() and DSA_new_method()
+functions will allocate the memory for the new DSA object, and a pointer to this
+newly allocated structure will be passed as a parameter to the function. This
+function may be NULL.
+
+DSA_meth_get_finish() and DSA_meth_set_finish() get and set the function used
+for destroying an instance of a DSA object respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DSA_free(). A pointer to the DSA
+to be destroyed is passed as a parameter. The destroy function should be used
+for DSA implementation specific clean up. The memory for the DSA itself should
+not be freed by this function. This function may be NULL.
+
+DSA_meth_get_paramgen() and DSA_meth_set_paramgen() get and set the function
+used for generating DSA parameters respectively. This function will be called in
+response to the application calling DSA_generate_parameters_ex() (or
+DSA_generate_parameters()). The parameters for the function have the same
+meaning as for DSA_generate_parameters_ex().
+
+DSA_meth_get_keygen() and DSA_meth_set_keygen() get and set the function
+used for generating a new DSA key pair respectively. This function will be
+called in response to the application calling DSA_generate_key(). The parameter
+for the function has the same meaning as for DSA_generate_key().
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_meth_new() and DSA_meth_dup() return the newly allocated DSA_METHOD object
+or NULL on failure.
+
+DSA_meth_get0_name() and DSA_meth_get_flags() return the name and flags
+associated with the DSA_METHOD respectively.
+
+All other DSA_meth_get_*() functions return the appropriate function pointer
+that has been set in the DSA_METHOD, or NULL if no such pointer has yet been
+set.
+
+DSA_meth_set1_name() and all DSA_meth_set_*() functions return 1 on success or
+0 on failure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_generate_parameters(3)>, L<DSA_generate_key(3)>,
+L<DSA_dup_DH(3)>, L<DSA_do_sign(3)>, L<DSA_set_method(3)>, L<DSA_SIG_new(3)>,
+L<DSA_sign(3)>, L<DSA_size(3)>, L<DSA_get0_pqg(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The functions described here were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..22474251f2b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_new, DSA_free - allocate and free DSA objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ DSA* DSA_new(void);
+
+ void DSA_free(DSA *dsa);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_new() allocates and initializes a B<DSA> structure. It is equivalent to
+calling DSA_new_method(NULL).
+
+DSA_free() frees the B<DSA> structure and its components. The values are
+erased before the memory is returned to the system.
+If B<dsa> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+If the allocation fails, DSA_new() returns B<NULL> and sets an error
+code that can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>. Otherwise it returns a pointer
+to the newly allocated structure.
+
+DSA_free() returns no value.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>,
+L<DSA_generate_parameters(3)>,
+L<DSA_generate_key(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f10307e66d66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_set_method.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_set_default_method, DSA_get_default_method,
+DSA_set_method, DSA_new_method, DSA_OpenSSL - select DSA method
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ void DSA_set_default_method(const DSA_METHOD *meth);
+
+ const DSA_METHOD *DSA_get_default_method(void);
+
+ int DSA_set_method(DSA *dsa, const DSA_METHOD *meth);
+
+ DSA *DSA_new_method(ENGINE *engine);
+
+ DSA_METHOD *DSA_OpenSSL(void);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+A B<DSA_METHOD> specifies the functions that OpenSSL uses for DSA
+operations. By modifying the method, alternative implementations
+such as hardware accelerators may be used. IMPORTANT: See the NOTES section for
+important information about how these DSA API functions are affected by the use
+of B<ENGINE> API calls.
+
+Initially, the default DSA_METHOD is the OpenSSL internal implementation,
+as returned by DSA_OpenSSL().
+
+DSA_set_default_method() makes B<meth> the default method for all DSA
+structures created later.
+B<NB>: This is true only whilst no ENGINE has
+been set as a default for DSA, so this function is no longer recommended.
+This function is not thread-safe and should not be called at the same time
+as other OpenSSL functions.
+
+DSA_get_default_method() returns a pointer to the current default
+DSA_METHOD. However, the meaningfulness of this result is dependent on
+whether the ENGINE API is being used, so this function is no longer
+recommended.
+
+DSA_set_method() selects B<meth> to perform all operations using the key
+B<rsa>. This will replace the DSA_METHOD used by the DSA key and if the
+previous method was supplied by an ENGINE, the handle to that ENGINE will
+be released during the change. It is possible to have DSA keys that only
+work with certain DSA_METHOD implementations (eg. from an ENGINE module
+that supports embedded hardware-protected keys), and in such cases
+attempting to change the DSA_METHOD for the key can have unexpected
+results. See L<DSA_meth_new> for information on constructing custom DSA_METHOD
+objects;
+
+DSA_new_method() allocates and initializes a DSA structure so that B<engine>
+will be used for the DSA operations. If B<engine> is NULL, the default engine
+for DSA operations is used, and if no default ENGINE is set, the DSA_METHOD
+controlled by DSA_set_default_method() is used.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_OpenSSL() and DSA_get_default_method() return pointers to the respective
+B<DSA_METHOD>s.
+
+DSA_set_default_method() returns no value.
+
+DSA_set_method() returns non-zero if the provided B<meth> was successfully set as
+the method for B<dsa> (including unloading the ENGINE handle if the previous
+method was supplied by an ENGINE).
+
+DSA_new_method() returns NULL and sets an error code that can be
+obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)> if the allocation
+fails. Otherwise it returns a pointer to the newly allocated structure.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_meth_new(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_sign.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_sign.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..889c7a1e0708
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_sign.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_sign, DSA_sign_setup, DSA_verify - DSA signatures
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ int DSA_sign(int type, const unsigned char *dgst, int len,
+              unsigned char *sigret, unsigned int *siglen, DSA *dsa);
+
+ int DSA_sign_setup(DSA *dsa, BN_CTX *ctx, BIGNUM **kinvp, BIGNUM **rp);
+
+ int DSA_verify(int type, const unsigned char *dgst, int len,
+                unsigned char *sigbuf, int siglen, DSA *dsa);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_sign() computes a digital signature on the B<len> byte message
+digest B<dgst> using the private key B<dsa> and places its ASN.1 DER
+encoding at B<sigret>. The length of the signature is places in
+*B<siglen>. B<sigret> must point to DSA_size(B<dsa>) bytes of memory.
+
+DSA_sign_setup() is defined only for backward binary compatibility and
+should not be used.
+Since OpenSSL 1.1.0 the DSA type is opaque and the output of
+DSA_sign_setup() cannot be used anyway: calling this function will only
+cause overhead, and does not affect the actual signature
+(pre-)computation.
+
+DSA_verify() verifies that the signature B<sigbuf> of size B<siglen>
+matches a given message digest B<dgst> of size B<len>.
+B<dsa> is the signer's public key.
+
+The B<type> parameter is ignored.
+
+The PRNG must be seeded before DSA_sign() (or DSA_sign_setup())
+is called.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_sign() and DSA_sign_setup() return 1 on success, 0 on error.
+DSA_verify() returns 1 for a valid signature, 0 for an incorrect
+signature and -1 on error. The error codes can be obtained by
+L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 CONFORMING TO
+
+US Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS 186 (Digital Signature
+Standard, DSS), ANSI X9.30
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<ERR_get_error(3)>, L<RAND_bytes(3)>,
+L<DSA_do_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_size.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_size.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ff7df3d296ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DSA_size.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DSA_size, DSA_bits, DSA_security_bits - get DSA signature size, key bits or security bits
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/dsa.h>
+
+ int DSA_size(const DSA *dsa);
+ int DSA_bits(const DSA *dsa);
+ int DSA_security_bits(const DSA *dsa);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+DSA_size() returns the maximum size of an ASN.1 encoded DSA signature
+for key B<dsa> in bytes. It can be used to determine how much memory must
+be allocated for a DSA signature.
+
+B<dsa-E<gt>q> must not be B<NULL>.
+
+DSA_bits() returns the number of bits in key B<dsa>: this is the number
+of bits in the B<p> parameter.
+
+DSA_security_bits() returns the number of security bits of the given B<dsa>
+key. See L<BN_security_bits(3)>.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+DSA_size() returns the signature size in bytes.
+
+DSA_bits() returns the number of bits in the key.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>, L<DSA_sign(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2000-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_get_data_mtu.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_get_data_mtu.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ab7147217ac1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_get_data_mtu.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DTLS_get_data_mtu - Get maximum data payload size
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ssl.h>
+
+ size_t DTLS_get_data_mtu(const SSL *ssl);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This function obtains the maximum data payload size for the established
+DTLS connection B<ssl>, based on the DTLS record MTU and the overhead
+of the DTLS record header, encryption and authentication currently in use.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Returns the maximum data payload size on success, or 0 on failure.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+This function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_set_timer_cb.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_set_timer_cb.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6e1347213e6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLS_set_timer_cb.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+DTLS_timer_cb,
+DTLS_set_timer_cb
+- Set callback for controlling DTLS timer duration
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ssl.h>
+
+ typedef unsigned int (*DTLS_timer_cb)(SSL *s, unsigned int timer_us);
+
+ void DTLS_set_timer_cb(SSL *s, DTLS_timer_cb cb);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This function sets an optional callback function for controlling the
+timeout interval on the DTLS protocol. The callback function will be
+called by DTLS for every new DTLS packet that is sent.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+Returns void.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+This function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.1
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..858e39316105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/DTLSv1_listen.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+SSL_stateless,
+DTLSv1_listen
+- Statelessly listen for incoming connections
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ssl.h>
+
+ int SSL_stateless(SSL *s);
+ int DTLSv1_listen(SSL *ssl, BIO_ADDR *peer);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+SSL_stateless() statelessly listens for new incoming TLSv1.3 connections.
+DTLSv1_listen() statelessly listens for new incoming DTLS connections. If a
+ClientHello is received that does not contain a cookie, then they respond with a
+request for a new ClientHello that does contain a cookie. If a ClientHello is
+received with a cookie that is verified then the function returns in order to
+enable the handshake to be completed (for example by using SSL_accept()).
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Some transport protocols (such as UDP) can be susceptible to amplification
+attacks. Unlike TCP there is no initial connection setup in UDP that
+validates that the client can actually receive messages on its advertised source
+address. An attacker could forge its source IP address and then send handshake
+initiation messages to the server. The server would then send its response to
+the forged source IP. If the response messages are larger than the original
+message then the amplification attack has succeeded.
+
+If DTLS is used over UDP (or any datagram based protocol that does not validate
+the source IP) then it is susceptible to this type of attack. TLSv1.3 is
+designed to operate over a stream-based transport protocol (such as TCP).
+If TCP is being used then there is no need to use SSL_stateless(). However some
+stream-based transport protocols (e.g. QUIC) may not validate the source
+address. In this case a TLSv1.3 application would be susceptible to this attack.
+
+As a countermeasure to this issue TLSv1.3 and DTLS include a stateless cookie
+mechanism. The idea is that when a client attempts to connect to a server it
+sends a ClientHello message. The server responds with a HelloRetryRequest (in
+TLSv1.3) or a HelloVerifyRequest (in DTLS) which contains a unique cookie. The
+client then resends the ClientHello, but this time includes the cookie in the
+message thus proving that the client is capable of receiving messages sent to
+that address. All of this can be done by the server without allocating any
+state, and thus without consuming expensive resources.
+
+OpenSSL implements this capability via the SSL_stateless() and DTLSv1_listen()
+functions. The B<ssl> parameter should be a newly allocated SSL object with its
+read and write BIOs set, in the same way as might be done for a call to
+SSL_accept(). Typically, for DTLS, the read BIO will be in an "unconnected"
+state and thus capable of receiving messages from any peer.
+
+When a ClientHello is received that contains a cookie that has been verified,
+then these functions will return with the B<ssl> parameter updated into a state
+where the handshake can be continued by a call to (for example) SSL_accept().
+Additionally, for DTLSv1_listen(), the B<BIO_ADDR> pointed to by B<peer> will be
+filled in with details of the peer that sent the ClientHello. If the underlying
+BIO is unable to obtain the B<BIO_ADDR> of the peer (for example because the BIO
+does not support this), then B<*peer> will be cleared and the family set to
+AF_UNSPEC. Typically user code is expected to "connect" the underlying socket to
+the peer and continue the handshake in a connected state.
+
+Prior to calling DTLSv1_listen() user code must ensure that cookie generation
+and verification callbacks have been set up using
+SSL_CTX_set_cookie_generate_cb() and SSL_CTX_set_cookie_verify_cb()
+respectively. For SSL_stateless(), SSL_CTX_set_stateless_cookie_generate_cb()
+and SSL_CTX_set_stateless_cookie_verify_cb() must be used instead.
+
+Since DTLSv1_listen() operates entirely statelessly whilst processing incoming
+ClientHellos it is unable to process fragmented messages (since this would
+require the allocation of state). An implication of this is that DTLSv1_listen()
+B<only> supports ClientHellos that fit inside a single datagram.
+
+For SSL_stateless() if an entire ClientHello message cannot be read without the
+"read" BIO becoming empty then the SSL_stateless() call will fail. It is the
+application's responsibility to ensure that data read from the "read" BIO during
+a single SSL_stateless() call is all from the same peer.
+
+SSL_stateless() will fail (with a 0 return value) if some TLS version less than
+TLSv1.3 is used.
+
+Both SSL_stateless() and DTLSv1_listen() will clear the error queue when they
+start.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+For SSL_stateless() a return value of 1 indicates success and the B<ssl> object
+will be set up ready to continue the handshake. A return value of 0 or -1
+indicates failure. If the value is 0 then a HelloRetryRequest was sent. A value
+of -1 indicates any other error. User code may retry the SSL_stateless() call.
+
+For DTLSv1_listen() a return value of >= 1 indicates success. The B<ssl> object
+will be set up ready to continue the handshake.  the B<peer> value will also be
+filled in.
+
+A return value of 0 indicates a non-fatal error. This could (for
+example) be because of non-blocking IO, or some invalid message having been
+received from a peer. Errors may be placed on the OpenSSL error queue with
+further information if appropriate. Typically user code is expected to retry the
+call to DTLSv1_listen() in the event of a non-fatal error.
+
+A return value of <0 indicates a fatal error. This could (for example) be
+because of a failure to allocate sufficient memory for the operation.
+
+For DTLSv1_listen(), prior to OpenSSL 1.1.0, fatal and non-fatal errors both
+produce return codes <= 0 (in typical implementations user code treats all
+errors as non-fatal), whilst return codes >0 indicate success.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
+L<ssl(7)>, L<bio(7)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+SSL_stateless() was first added in OpenSSL 1.1.1.
+
+DTLSv1_listen() return codes were clarified in OpenSSL 1.1.0. The type of "peer"
+also changed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2015-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0bf63f8bde80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECDSA_SIG_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ECDSA_SIG_get0, ECDSA_SIG_get0_r, ECDSA_SIG_get0_s, ECDSA_SIG_set0,
+ECDSA_SIG_new, ECDSA_SIG_free, i2d_ECDSA_SIG, d2i_ECDSA_SIG, ECDSA_size,
+ECDSA_sign, ECDSA_do_sign, ECDSA_verify, ECDSA_do_verify, ECDSA_sign_setup,
+ECDSA_sign_ex, ECDSA_do_sign_ex - low level elliptic curve digital signature
+algorithm (ECDSA) functions
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ecdsa.h>
+
+ ECDSA_SIG *ECDSA_SIG_new(void);
+ void ECDSA_SIG_free(ECDSA_SIG *sig);
+ void ECDSA_SIG_get0(const ECDSA_SIG *sig, const BIGNUM **pr, const BIGNUM **ps);
+ const BIGNUM *ECDSA_SIG_get0_r(const ECDSA_SIG *sig);
+ const BIGNUM *ECDSA_SIG_get0_s(const ECDSA_SIG *sig);
+ int ECDSA_SIG_set0(ECDSA_SIG *sig, BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *s);
+ int i2d_ECDSA_SIG(const ECDSA_SIG *sig, unsigned char **pp);
+ ECDSA_SIG *d2i_ECDSA_SIG(ECDSA_SIG **sig, const unsigned char **pp, long len);
+ int ECDSA_size(const EC_KEY *eckey);
+
+ int ECDSA_sign(int type, const unsigned char *dgst, int dgstlen,
+                unsigned char *sig, unsigned int *siglen, EC_KEY *eckey);
+ ECDSA_SIG *ECDSA_do_sign(const unsigned char *dgst, int dgst_len,
+                          EC_KEY *eckey);
+
+ int ECDSA_verify(int type, const unsigned char *dgst, int dgstlen,
+                  const unsigned char *sig, int siglen, EC_KEY *eckey);
+ int ECDSA_do_verify(const unsigned char *dgst, int dgst_len,
+                     const ECDSA_SIG *sig, EC_KEY* eckey);
+
+ ECDSA_SIG *ECDSA_do_sign_ex(const unsigned char *dgst, int dgstlen,
+                             const BIGNUM *kinv, const BIGNUM *rp,
+                             EC_KEY *eckey);
+ int ECDSA_sign_setup(EC_KEY *eckey, BN_CTX *ctx, BIGNUM **kinv, BIGNUM **rp);
+ int ECDSA_sign_ex(int type, const unsigned char *dgst, int dgstlen,
+                   unsigned char *sig, unsigned int *siglen,
+                   const BIGNUM *kinv, const BIGNUM *rp, EC_KEY *eckey);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Note: these functions provide a low level interface to ECDSA. Most
+applications should use the higher level B<EVP> interface such as
+L<EVP_DigestSignInit(3)> or L<EVP_DigestVerifyInit(3)> instead.
+
+B<ECDSA_SIG> is an opaque structure consisting of two BIGNUMs for the
+B<r> and B<s> value of an ECDSA signature (see X9.62 or FIPS 186-2).
+
+ECDSA_SIG_new() allocates an empty B<ECDSA_SIG> structure. Note: before
+OpenSSL 1.1.0 the: the B<r> and B<s> components were initialised.
+
+ECDSA_SIG_free() frees the B<ECDSA_SIG> structure B<sig>.
+
+ECDSA_SIG_get0() returns internal pointers the B<r> and B<s> values contained
+in B<sig> and stores them in B<*pr> and B<*ps>, respectively.
+The pointer B<pr> or B<ps> can be NULL, in which case the corresponding value
+is not returned.
+
+The values B<r>, B<s> can also be retrieved separately by the corresponding
+function ECDSA_SIG_get0_r() and ECDSA_SIG_get0_s(), respectively.
+
+The B<r> and B<s> values can be set by calling ECDSA_SIG_set0() and passing the
+new values for B<r> and B<s> as parameters to the function. Calling this
+function transfers the memory management of the values to the ECDSA_SIG object,
+and therefore the values that have been passed in should not be freed directly
+after this function has been called.
+
+i2d_ECDSA_SIG() creates the DER encoding of the ECDSA signature B<sig> and
+writes the encoded signature to B<*pp> (note: if B<pp> is NULL i2d_ECDSA_SIG()
+returns the expected length in bytes of the DER encoded signature).
+i2d_ECDSA_SIG() returns the length of the DER encoded signature (or 0 on
+error).
+
+d2i_ECDSA_SIG() decodes a DER encoded ECDSA signature and returns the decoded
+signature in a newly allocated B<ECDSA_SIG> structure. B<*sig> points to the
+buffer containing the DER encoded signature of size B<len>.
+
+ECDSA_size() returns the maximum length of a DER encoded ECDSA signature
+created with the private EC key B<eckey>.
+
+ECDSA_sign() computes a digital signature of the B<dgstlen> bytes hash value
+B<dgst> using the private EC key B<eckey>. The DER encoded signatures is
+stored in B<sig> and its length is returned in B<sig_len>. Note: B<sig> must
+point to ECDSA_size(eckey) bytes of memory. The parameter B<type> is currently
+ignored. ECDSA_sign() is wrapper function for ECDSA_sign_ex() with B<kinv>
+and B<rp> set to NULL.
+
+ECDSA_do_sign() is similar to ECDSA_sign() except the signature is returned
+as a newly allocated B<ECDSA_SIG> structure (or NULL on error). ECDSA_do_sign()
+is a wrapper function for ECDSA_do_sign_ex() with B<kinv> and B<rp> set to
+NULL.
+
+ECDSA_verify() verifies that the signature in B<sig> of size B<siglen> is a
+valid ECDSA signature of the hash value B<dgst> of size B<dgstlen> using the
+public key B<eckey>.  The parameter B<type> is ignored.
+
+ECDSA_do_verify() is similar to ECDSA_verify() except the signature is
+presented in the form of a pointer to an B<ECDSA_SIG> structure.
+
+The remaining functions utilise the internal B<kinv> and B<r> values used
+during signature computation. Most applications will never need to call these
+and some external ECDSA ENGINE implementations may not support them at all if
+either B<kinv> or B<r> is not B<NULL>.
+
+ECDSA_sign_setup() may be used to precompute parts of the signing operation.
+B<eckey> is the private EC key and B<ctx> is a pointer to B<BN_CTX> structure
+(or NULL). The precomputed values or returned in B<kinv> and B<rp> and can be
+used in a later call to ECDSA_sign_ex() or ECDSA_do_sign_ex().
+
+ECDSA_sign_ex() computes a digital signature of the B<dgstlen> bytes hash value
+B<dgst> using the private EC key B<eckey> and the optional pre-computed values
+B<kinv> and B<rp>. The DER encoded signature is stored in B<sig> and its
+length is returned in B<sig_len>. Note: B<sig> must point to ECDSA_size(eckey)
+bytes of memory. The parameter B<type> is ignored.
+
+ECDSA_do_sign_ex() is similar to ECDSA_sign_ex() except the signature is
+returned as a newly allocated B<ECDSA_SIG> structure (or NULL on error).
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ECDSA_SIG_new() returns NULL if the allocation fails.
+
+ECDSA_SIG_set0() returns 1 on success or 0 on failure.
+
+ECDSA_SIG_get0_r() and ECDSA_SIG_get0_s() return the corresponding value,
+or NULL if it is unset.
+
+ECDSA_size() returns the maximum length signature or 0 on error.
+
+ECDSA_sign(), ECDSA_sign_ex() and ECDSA_sign_setup() return 1 if successful
+or 0 on error.
+
+ECDSA_do_sign() and ECDSA_do_sign_ex() return a pointer to an allocated
+B<ECDSA_SIG> structure or NULL on error.
+
+ECDSA_verify() and ECDSA_do_verify() return 1 for a valid
+signature, 0 for an invalid signature and -1 on error.
+The error codes can be obtained by L<ERR_get_error(3)>.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Creating an ECDSA signature of a given SHA-256 hash value using the
+named curve prime256v1 (aka P-256).
+
+First step: create an EC_KEY object (note: this part is B<not> ECDSA
+specific)
+
+ int ret;
+ ECDSA_SIG *sig;
+ EC_KEY *eckey;
+
+ eckey = EC_KEY_new_by_curve_name(NID_X9_62_prime256v1);
+ if (eckey == NULL)
+     /* error */
+ if (EC_KEY_generate_key(eckey) == 0)
+     /* error */
+
+Second step: compute the ECDSA signature of a SHA-256 hash value
+using ECDSA_do_sign():
+
+ sig = ECDSA_do_sign(digest, 32, eckey);
+ if (sig == NULL)
+     /* error */
+
+or using ECDSA_sign():
+
+ unsigned char *buffer, *pp;
+ int buf_len;
+
+ buf_len = ECDSA_size(eckey);
+ buffer = OPENSSL_malloc(buf_len);
+ pp = buffer;
+ if (ECDSA_sign(0, dgst, dgstlen, pp, &buf_len, eckey) == 0)
+     /* error */
+
+Third step: verify the created ECDSA signature using ECDSA_do_verify():
+
+ ret = ECDSA_do_verify(digest, 32, sig, eckey);
+
+or using ECDSA_verify():
+
+ ret = ECDSA_verify(0, digest, 32, buffer, buf_len, eckey);
+
+and finally evaluate the return value:
+
+ if (ret == 1)
+     /* signature ok */
+ else if (ret == 0)
+     /* incorrect signature */
+ else
+     /* error */
+
+=head1 CONFORMING TO
+
+ANSI X9.62, US Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS 186-2
+(Digital Signature Standard, DSS)
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<DSA_new(3)>,
+L<EVP_DigestSignInit(3)>,
+L<EVP_DigestVerifyInit(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2004-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECPKParameters_print.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECPKParameters_print.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..24b6bb9e04db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/ECPKParameters_print.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ECPKParameters_print, ECPKParameters_print_fp - Functions for decoding and
+encoding ASN1 representations of elliptic curve entities
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ec.h>
+
+ int ECPKParameters_print(BIO *bp, const EC_GROUP *x, int off);
+ int ECPKParameters_print_fp(FILE *fp, const EC_GROUP *x, int off);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The ECPKParameters represent the public parameters for an
+B<EC_GROUP> structure, which represents a curve.
+
+The ECPKParameters_print() and ECPKParameters_print_fp() functions print
+a human-readable output of the public parameters of the EC_GROUP to B<bp>
+or B<fp>. The output lines are indented by B<off> spaces.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+ECPKParameters_print() and ECPKParameters_print_fp()
+return 1 for success and 0 if an error occurs.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>, L<EC_GROUP_copy(3)>,
+L<EC_POINT_new(3)>, L<EC_POINT_add(3)>, L<EC_KEY_new(3)>,
+L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>,
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2013-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GFp_simple_method.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GFp_simple_method.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f283d8e71ec5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GFp_simple_method.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+EC_GFp_simple_method, EC_GFp_mont_method, EC_GFp_nist_method, EC_GFp_nistp224_method, EC_GFp_nistp256_method, EC_GFp_nistp521_method, EC_GF2m_simple_method, EC_METHOD_get_field_type - Functions for obtaining EC_METHOD objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ec.h>
+
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_simple_method(void);
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_mont_method(void);
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_nist_method(void);
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_nistp224_method(void);
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_nistp256_method(void);
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GFp_nistp521_method(void);
+
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GF2m_simple_method(void);
+
+ int EC_METHOD_get_field_type(const EC_METHOD *meth);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The Elliptic Curve library provides a number of different implementations through a single common interface.
+When constructing a curve using EC_GROUP_new (see L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>) an
+implementation method must be provided. The functions described here all return a const pointer to an
+B<EC_METHOD> structure that can be passed to EC_GROUP_NEW. It is important that the correct implementation
+type for the form of curve selected is used.
+
+For F2^m curves there is only one implementation choice, i.e. EC_GF2_simple_method.
+
+For Fp curves the lowest common denominator implementation is the EC_GFp_simple_method implementation. All
+other implementations are based on this one. EC_GFp_mont_method builds on EC_GFp_simple_method but adds the
+use of montgomery multiplication (see L<BN_mod_mul_montgomery(3)>). EC_GFp_nist_method
+offers an implementation optimised for use with NIST recommended curves (NIST curves are available through
+EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name as described in L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>).
+
+The functions EC_GFp_nistp224_method, EC_GFp_nistp256_method and EC_GFp_nistp521_method offer 64 bit
+optimised implementations for the NIST P224, P256 and P521 curves respectively. Note, however, that these
+implementations are not available on all platforms.
+
+EC_METHOD_get_field_type identifies what type of field the EC_METHOD structure supports, which will be either
+F2^m or Fp. If the field type is Fp then the value B<NID_X9_62_prime_field> is returned. If the field type is
+F2^m then the value B<NID_X9_62_characteristic_two_field> is returned. These values are defined in the
+obj_mac.h header file.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+All EC_GFp* functions and EC_GF2m_simple_method always return a const pointer to an EC_METHOD structure.
+
+EC_METHOD_get_field_type returns an integer that identifies the type of field the EC_METHOD structure supports.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>, L<EC_GROUP_copy(3)>,
+L<EC_POINT_new(3)>, L<EC_POINT_add(3)>, L<EC_KEY_new(3)>,
+L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>,
+L<BN_mod_mul_montgomery(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2013-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_copy.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_copy.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ee20f9526adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_copy.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+EC_GROUP_get0_order, EC_GROUP_order_bits, EC_GROUP_get0_cofactor,
+EC_GROUP_copy, EC_GROUP_dup, EC_GROUP_method_of, EC_GROUP_set_generator,
+EC_GROUP_get0_generator, EC_GROUP_get_order, EC_GROUP_get_cofactor,
+EC_GROUP_set_curve_name, EC_GROUP_get_curve_name, EC_GROUP_set_asn1_flag,
+EC_GROUP_get_asn1_flag, EC_GROUP_set_point_conversion_form,
+EC_GROUP_get_point_conversion_form, EC_GROUP_get0_seed,
+EC_GROUP_get_seed_len, EC_GROUP_set_seed, EC_GROUP_get_degree,
+EC_GROUP_check, EC_GROUP_check_discriminant, EC_GROUP_cmp,
+EC_GROUP_get_basis_type, EC_GROUP_get_trinomial_basis,
+EC_GROUP_get_pentanomial_basis
+- Functions for manipulating EC_GROUP objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ec.h>
+
+ int EC_GROUP_copy(EC_GROUP *dst, const EC_GROUP *src);
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_dup(const EC_GROUP *src);
+
+ const EC_METHOD *EC_GROUP_method_of(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_set_generator(EC_GROUP *group, const EC_POINT *generator,
+                            const BIGNUM *order, const BIGNUM *cofactor);
+ const EC_POINT *EC_GROUP_get0_generator(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_get_order(const EC_GROUP *group, BIGNUM *order, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ const BIGNUM *EC_GROUP_get0_order(const EC_GROUP *group);
+ int EC_GROUP_order_bits(const EC_GROUP *group);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_cofactor(const EC_GROUP *group, BIGNUM *cofactor, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ const BIGNUM *EC_GROUP_get0_cofactor(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ void EC_GROUP_set_curve_name(EC_GROUP *group, int nid);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_curve_name(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ void EC_GROUP_set_asn1_flag(EC_GROUP *group, int flag);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_asn1_flag(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ void EC_GROUP_set_point_conversion_form(EC_GROUP *group, point_conversion_form_t form);
+ point_conversion_form_t EC_GROUP_get_point_conversion_form(const EC_GROUP *);
+
+ unsigned char *EC_GROUP_get0_seed(const EC_GROUP *x);
+ size_t EC_GROUP_get_seed_len(const EC_GROUP *);
+ size_t EC_GROUP_set_seed(EC_GROUP *, const unsigned char *, size_t len);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_get_degree(const EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_check(const EC_GROUP *group, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_check_discriminant(const EC_GROUP *group, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_cmp(const EC_GROUP *a, const EC_GROUP *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_get_basis_type(const EC_GROUP *);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_trinomial_basis(const EC_GROUP *, unsigned int *k);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_pentanomial_basis(const EC_GROUP *, unsigned int *k1,
+                                    unsigned int *k2, unsigned int *k3);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+EC_GROUP_copy copies the curve B<src> into B<dst>. Both B<src> and B<dst> must use the same EC_METHOD.
+
+EC_GROUP_dup creates a new EC_GROUP object and copies the content from B<src> to the newly created
+EC_GROUP object.
+
+EC_GROUP_method_of obtains the EC_METHOD of B<group>.
+
+EC_GROUP_set_generator sets curve parameters that must be agreed by all participants using the curve. These
+parameters include the B<generator>, the B<order> and the B<cofactor>. The B<generator> is a well defined point on the
+curve chosen for cryptographic operations. Integers used for point multiplications will be between 0 and
+n-1 where n is the B<order>. The B<order> multiplied by the B<cofactor> gives the number of points on the curve.
+
+EC_GROUP_get0_generator returns the generator for the identified B<group>.
+
+The functions EC_GROUP_get_order and EC_GROUP_get_cofactor populate the provided B<order> and B<cofactor> parameters
+with the respective order and cofactors for the B<group>.
+
+The functions EC_GROUP_set_curve_name and EC_GROUP_get_curve_name, set and get the NID for the curve respectively
+(see L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>). If a curve does not have a NID associated with it, then EC_GROUP_get_curve_name
+will return 0.
+
+The asn1_flag value is used to determine whether the curve encoding uses
+explicit parameters or a named curve using an ASN1 OID: many applications only
+support the latter form. If asn1_flag is B<OPENSSL_EC_NAMED_CURVE> then the
+named curve form is used and the parameters must have a corresponding
+named curve NID set. If asn1_flags is B<OPENSSL_EC_EXPLICIT_CURVE> the
+parameters are explicitly encoded. The functions EC_GROUP_get_asn1_flag and
+EC_GROUP_set_asn1_flag get and set the status of the asn1_flag for the curve.
+Note: B<OPENSSL_EC_EXPLICIT_CURVE> was first added to OpenSSL 1.1.0, for
+previous versions of OpenSSL the value 0 must be used instead. Before OpenSSL
+1.1.0 the default form was to use explicit parameters (meaning that
+applications would have to explicitly set the named curve form) in OpenSSL
+1.1.0 and later the named curve form is the default.
+
+The point_conversion_form for a curve controls how EC_POINT data is encoded as ASN1 as defined in X9.62 (ECDSA).
+point_conversion_form_t is an enum defined as follows:
+
+ typedef enum {
+        /** the point is encoded as z||x, where the octet z specifies
+         *   which solution of the quadratic equation y is  */
+        POINT_CONVERSION_COMPRESSED = 2,
+        /** the point is encoded as z||x||y, where z is the octet 0x04  */
+        POINT_CONVERSION_UNCOMPRESSED = 4,
+        /** the point is encoded as z||x||y, where the octet z specifies
+         *  which solution of the quadratic equation y is  */
+        POINT_CONVERSION_HYBRID = 6
+ } point_conversion_form_t;
+
+For POINT_CONVERSION_UNCOMPRESSED the point is encoded as an octet signifying the UNCOMPRESSED form has been used followed by
+the octets for x, followed by the octets for y.
+
+For any given x co-ordinate for a point on a curve it is possible to derive two possible y values. For
+POINT_CONVERSION_COMPRESSED the point is encoded as an octet signifying that the COMPRESSED form has been used AND which of
+the two possible solutions for y has been used, followed by the octets for x.
+
+For POINT_CONVERSION_HYBRID the point is encoded as an octet signifying the HYBRID form has been used AND which of the two
+possible solutions for y has been used, followed by the octets for x, followed by the octets for y.
+
+The functions EC_GROUP_set_point_conversion_form and EC_GROUP_get_point_conversion_form set and get the point_conversion_form
+for the curve respectively.
+
+ANSI X9.62 (ECDSA standard) defines a method of generating the curve parameter b from a random number. This provides advantages
+in that a parameter obtained in this way is highly unlikely to be susceptible to special purpose attacks, or have any trapdoors in it.
+If the seed is present for a curve then the b parameter was generated in a verifiable fashion using that seed. The OpenSSL EC library
+does not use this seed value but does enable you to inspect it using EC_GROUP_get0_seed. This returns a pointer to a memory block
+containing the seed that was used. The length of the memory block can be obtained using EC_GROUP_get_seed_len. A number of the
+builtin curves within the library provide seed values that can be obtained. It is also possible to set a custom seed using
+EC_GROUP_set_seed and passing a pointer to a memory block, along with the length of the seed. Again, the EC library will not use
+this seed value, although it will be preserved in any ASN1 based communications.
+
+EC_GROUP_get_degree gets the degree of the field. For Fp fields this will be the number of bits in p.  For F2^m fields this will be
+the value m.
+
+The function EC_GROUP_check_discriminant calculates the discriminant for the curve and verifies that it is valid.
+For a curve defined over Fp the discriminant is given by the formula 4*a^3 + 27*b^2 whilst for F2^m curves the discriminant is
+simply b. In either case for the curve to be valid the discriminant must be non zero.
+
+The function EC_GROUP_check performs a number of checks on a curve to verify that it is valid. Checks performed include
+verifying that the discriminant is non zero; that a generator has been defined; that the generator is on the curve and has
+the correct order.
+
+EC_GROUP_cmp compares B<a> and B<b> to determine whether they represent the same curve or not.
+
+The functions EC_GROUP_get_basis_type, EC_GROUP_get_trinomial_basis and EC_GROUP_get_pentanomial_basis should only be called for curves
+defined over an F2^m field. Addition and multiplication operations within an F2^m field are performed using an irreducible polynomial
+function f(x). This function is either a trinomial of the form:
+
+f(x) = x^m + x^k + 1 with m > k >= 1
+
+or a pentanomial of the form:
+
+f(x) = x^m + x^k3 + x^k2 + x^k1 + 1 with m > k3 > k2 > k1 >= 1
+
+The function EC_GROUP_get_basis_type returns a NID identifying whether a trinomial or pentanomial is in use for the field. The
+function EC_GROUP_get_trinomial_basis must only be called where f(x) is of the trinomial form, and returns the value of B<k>. Similarly
+the function EC_GROUP_get_pentanomial_basis must only be called where f(x) is of the pentanomial form, and returns the values of B<k1>,
+B<k2> and B<k3> respectively.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+The following functions return 1 on success or 0 on error: EC_GROUP_copy, EC_GROUP_set_generator, EC_GROUP_check,
+EC_GROUP_check_discriminant, EC_GROUP_get_trinomial_basis and EC_GROUP_get_pentanomial_basis.
+
+EC_GROUP_dup returns a pointer to the duplicated curve, or NULL on error.
+
+EC_GROUP_method_of returns the EC_METHOD implementation in use for the given curve or NULL on error.
+
+EC_GROUP_get0_generator returns the generator for the given curve or NULL on error.
+
+EC_GROUP_get_order, EC_GROUP_get_cofactor, EC_GROUP_get_curve_name, EC_GROUP_get_asn1_flag, EC_GROUP_get_point_conversion_form
+and EC_GROUP_get_degree return the order, cofactor, curve name (NID), ASN1 flag, point_conversion_form and degree for the
+specified curve respectively. If there is no curve name associated with a curve then EC_GROUP_get_curve_name will return 0.
+
+EC_GROUP_get0_order() returns an internal pointer to the group order.
+EC_GROUP_get_order_bits() returns the number of bits in the group order.
+EC_GROUP_get0_cofactor() returns an internal pointer to the group cofactor.
+
+EC_GROUP_get0_seed returns a pointer to the seed that was used to generate the parameter b, or NULL if the seed is not
+specified. EC_GROUP_get_seed_len returns the length of the seed or 0 if the seed is not specified.
+
+EC_GROUP_set_seed returns the length of the seed that has been set. If the supplied seed is NULL, or the supplied seed length is
+0, the return value will be 1. On error 0 is returned.
+
+EC_GROUP_cmp returns 0 if the curves are equal, 1 if they are not equal, or -1 on error.
+
+EC_GROUP_get_basis_type returns the values NID_X9_62_tpBasis or NID_X9_62_ppBasis (as defined in <openssl/obj_mac.h>) for a
+trinomial or pentanomial respectively. Alternatively in the event of an error a 0 is returned.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<EC_GROUP_new(3)>,
+L<EC_POINT_new(3)>, L<EC_POINT_add(3)>, L<EC_KEY_new(3)>,
+L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>, L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2013-2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1eee494927f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_GROUP_new.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+EC_GROUP_get_ecparameters,
+EC_GROUP_get_ecpkparameters,
+EC_GROUP_new,
+EC_GROUP_new_from_ecparameters,
+EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters,
+EC_GROUP_free,
+EC_GROUP_clear_free,
+EC_GROUP_new_curve_GFp,
+EC_GROUP_new_curve_GF2m,
+EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name,
+EC_GROUP_set_curve,
+EC_GROUP_get_curve,
+EC_GROUP_set_curve_GFp,
+EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp,
+EC_GROUP_set_curve_GF2m,
+EC_GROUP_get_curve_GF2m,
+EC_get_builtin_curves - Functions for creating and destroying EC_GROUP
+objects
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ec.h>
+
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new(const EC_METHOD *meth);
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_from_ecparameters(const ECPARAMETERS *params)
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters(const ECPKPARAMETERS *params)
+ void EC_GROUP_free(EC_GROUP *group);
+ void EC_GROUP_clear_free(EC_GROUP *group);
+
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_curve_GFp(const BIGNUM *p, const BIGNUM *a,
+                                  const BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_curve_GF2m(const BIGNUM *p, const BIGNUM *a,
+                                   const BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ EC_GROUP *EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name(int nid);
+
+ int EC_GROUP_set_curve(EC_GROUP *group, const BIGNUM *p, const BIGNUM *a,
+                        const BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_curve(const EC_GROUP *group, BIGNUM *p, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b,
+                        BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int EC_GROUP_set_curve_GFp(EC_GROUP *group, const BIGNUM *p,
+                            const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp(const EC_GROUP *group, BIGNUM *p,
+                            BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int EC_GROUP_set_curve_GF2m(EC_GROUP *group, const BIGNUM *p,
+                             const BIGNUM *a, const BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+ int EC_GROUP_get_curve_GF2m(const EC_GROUP *group, BIGNUM *p,
+                             BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, BN_CTX *ctx);
+
+ ECPARAMETERS *EC_GROUP_get_ecparameters(const EC_GROUP *group, ECPARAMETERS *params)
+ ECPKPARAMETERS *EC_GROUP_get_ecpkparameters(const EC_GROUP *group, ECPKPARAMETERS *params)
+
+ size_t EC_get_builtin_curves(EC_builtin_curve *r, size_t nitems);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Within the library there are two forms of elliptic curve that are of interest. The first form is those defined over the
+prime field Fp. The elements of Fp are the integers 0 to p-1, where p is a prime number. This gives us a revised
+elliptic curve equation as follows:
+
+y^2 mod p = x^3 +ax + b mod p
+
+The second form is those defined over a binary field F2^m where the elements of the field are integers of length at
+most m bits. For this form the elliptic curve equation is modified to:
+
+y^2 + xy = x^3 + ax^2 + b (where b != 0)
+
+Operations in a binary field are performed relative to an B<irreducible polynomial>. All such curves with OpenSSL
+use a trinomial or a pentanomial for this parameter.
+
+A new curve can be constructed by calling EC_GROUP_new, using the implementation provided by B<meth> (see
+L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>). It is then necessary to call EC_GROUP_set_curve() to set the curve parameters.
+EC_GROUP_new_from_ecparameters() will create a group from the
+specified B<params> and
+EC_GROUP_new_from_ecpkparameters() will create a group from the specific PK B<params>.
+
+EC_GROUP_set_curve() sets the curve parameters B<p>, B<a> and B<b>. For a curve over Fp B<b>
+is the prime for the field. For a curve over F2^m B<p> represents the irreducible polynomial - each bit
+represents a term in the polynomial. Therefore there will either be three or five bits set dependent on whether
+the polynomial is a trinomial or a pentanomial.
+
+EC_group_get_curve() obtains the previously set curve parameters.
+
+EC_GROUP_set_curve_GFp() and EC_GROUP_set_curve_GF2m() are synonyms for EC_GROUP_set_curve(). They are defined for
+backwards compatibility only and should not be used.
+
+EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp() and EC_GROUP_get_curve_GF2m() are synonyms for EC_GROUP_get_curve(). They are defined for
+backwards compatibility only and should not be used.
+
+The functions EC_GROUP_new_curve_GFp and EC_GROUP_new_curve_GF2m are shortcuts for calling EC_GROUP_new and then the
+EC_GROUP_set_curve function. An appropriate default implementation method will be used.
+
+Whilst the library can be used to create any curve using the functions described above, there are also a number of
+predefined curves that are available. In order to obtain a list of all of the predefined curves, call the function
+EC_get_builtin_curves. The parameter B<r> should be an array of EC_builtin_curve structures of size B<nitems>. The function
+will populate the B<r> array with information about the builtin curves. If B<nitems> is less than the total number of
+curves available, then the first B<nitems> curves will be returned. Otherwise the total number of curves will be
+provided. The return value is the total number of curves available (whether that number has been populated in B<r> or
+not). Passing a NULL B<r>, or setting B<nitems> to 0 will do nothing other than return the total number of curves available.
+The EC_builtin_curve structure is defined as follows:
+
+ typedef struct {
+        int nid;
+        const char *comment;
+        } EC_builtin_curve;
+
+Each EC_builtin_curve item has a unique integer id (B<nid>), and a human readable comment string describing the curve.
+
+In order to construct a builtin curve use the function EC_GROUP_new_by_curve_name and provide the B<nid> of the curve to
+be constructed.
+
+EC_GROUP_free frees the memory associated with the EC_GROUP.
+If B<group> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+EC_GROUP_clear_free destroys any sensitive data held within the EC_GROUP and then frees its memory.
+If B<group> is NULL nothing is done.
+
+=head1 RETURN VALUES
+
+All EC_GROUP_new* functions return a pointer to the newly constructed group, or NULL on error.
+
+EC_get_builtin_curves returns the number of builtin curves that are available.
+
+EC_GROUP_set_curve_GFp, EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp, EC_GROUP_set_curve_GF2m, EC_GROUP_get_curve_GF2m return 1 on success or 0 on error.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crypto(7)>, L<EC_GROUP_copy(3)>,
+L<EC_POINT_new(3)>, L<EC_POINT_add(3)>, L<EC_KEY_new(3)>,
+L<EC_GFp_simple_method(3)>, L<d2i_ECPKParameters(3)>
+
+=head1 COPYRIGHT
+
+Copyright 2013-2018 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
+
+Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License").  You may not use
+this file except in compliance with the License.  You can obtain a copy
+in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
+L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_KEY_get_enc_flags.pod b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_KEY_get_enc_flags.pod
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f73a1d59d04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/crypto/openssl/doc/man3/EC_KEY_get_enc_flags.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+EC_KEY_get_enc_flags, EC_KEY_set_enc_flags
+- Get and set flags for encoding EC_KEY structures
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+ #include <openssl/ec.h>
+
+ unsigned int EC_KEY_get_enc_flags(const EC_KEY *key);
+ void EC_KEY_set_enc_flags(EC_KEY *eckey, unsigned int flags);
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The format of the external representation of the public key written by
+i2d_ECPrivateKey() (such as whether it is stored in a compressed form or not) is
+described by the point_conversion_form. See L<EC_GROUP_copy(3)>
+for a description of point_conversion_form.
+
+When reading a private key encoded without an associated public key (e.g. if
+EC_PKEY_NO_PUBKEY has been used - se